JP2015089403A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve taste of a game by effectively executing a performance to indicate a possibility that a variable winning part may be converted into an open state.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: prior determination means that can preliminarily determine whether or not a variable display game corresponding to an operation-start memory turns out a specific result, before execution of the variable display game; a plurality of performance parts, the number of which is set to correspond to a prescribed number capable of storing operation-start memories and, distances of which from a variable winning part are set to be different respectively; forenotice condition determination means capable of determining whether or not the preliminarily determined operation-start memory is a specific operation-start memory establishing the forenotice condition; and forenotice performance means that can execute a forenotice performance by causing a performance part to execute a performance in a prescribed mode, the performance part of which distance order from the variable winning part is corresponding to consumption order of the specific operation-start memory. With a change in the consumption order of the specific operation-start memory, the forenotice performance means changes a performance part that executes a performance in the prescribed mode.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of imparting a gaming value to a player, and more particularly, to a gaming machine that performs a notice effect based on a pre-determination result corresponding to start memory.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a variation display game is executed based on a winning (inflow, passage) of a game ball to a starting area provided in the gaming area, and the variation display game has a predetermined result determined in advance. In such a case, it is common to give a game value advantageous to the player, such as converting the variable winning portion from a closed state to an open state.

  In such a gaming machine, the right to execute a variable display game (such as a special figure variable display game or a common figure variable display game) is stored as a start memory based on the winning of a game ball in the start area, within a prescribed number range, Most of them execute the variable display game by digesting the start-up memory in the stored order.

  Therefore, recently, a gaming machine that pre-determines whether or not the variable display game corresponding to the start-up memory has a specific result before the execution of the variable display game, and performs a notice effect based on the result of the pre-determination Has also been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-167164 A

  By the way, in a gaming machine as disclosed in the above-mentioned patent document, since the relevance between the notice effect and the variable winning portion is low, the variable winning portion may be converted from the closed state to the open state. There was a problem that it was not possible to produce the game effectively and the entertainment of the game was poor.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by effectively producing the possibility that the variable winning portion is converted to the open state. An object is to provide a possible gaming machine.

  According to a representative aspect of the present invention, when a variation display game is executed based on a winning of a game ball in a start area provided in the game area, and the variation display game has a predetermined specific result, the game In a gaming machine capable of converting a variable winning portion provided in a region from a closed state to an open state, a range of a prescribed number as a starting memory with a right to execute the variable display game based on a winning of a game ball in the starting region Start storage means that can be stored in the memory, fluctuation display means that can execute the variable display game by digesting the start memories stored in the start storage means in the order stored, and the start Pre-determining means capable of pre-determining whether or not the variable display game corresponding to the memory results in the specific result before execution of the variable display game, and a number corresponding to the prescribed number and It is possible to determine whether or not a plurality of performance units set so that the distances from the moving prize units are different from each other, and whether the predetermined start memory is a specific start memory that establishes the notice condition A notice that allows a notice effect to be executed by causing the effect part to produce an effect in a predetermined manner with the notice condition determining means and the order of the distance from the variable winning prize part corresponding to the digest order of the specific start-up memory The notice effecting means is characterized in that the effecting part that causes the effect to be produced in the predetermined mode is changed in accordance with a change in the digest order of the specific start-up memory.

  In addition, a some production | presentation part is the four hold display parts 71-hold display part 74 of the common figure memory | storage display unit 70 in the 4th Embodiment of this invention, for example. The variable winning section is the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24. The predetermined mode is a light emission effect or a vibration effect. In addition, the start storage unit, the change display unit, and the advance determination unit are, for example, the game control device 100. For example, the notice condition determining means and the notice effect means are the effect control device 150.

  According to the typical embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to effectively produce the possibility that the variable winning portion is converted to the open state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board and game production | presentation structure of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the back surface composition object of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged front view of the back surface composition object centering on the production movable unit of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged front view of the back surface composition object centering on the distribution movable unit of the 1st embodiment of the present invention, and a raising / lowering unit. It is a perspective view of the sub display unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a disassembled perspective view of a sub display unit, (B) is a perspective view of the state which the sub display unit protruded in the front-back direction. . It is a perspective view of a distribution movable unit of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, (A) is an exploded perspective view of a distribution movable unit, and (B) is a perspective view of a state where a distribution movable unit waits in an initial position. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front structure of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the center frame unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an expansion perspective view of the center frame unit centering on the top fluctuation winning part of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an expansion perspective view of the game production structure centering on the upper fluctuation prize-winning part of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of a prize space of the 1st embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a figure in case a distribution rotator is in a 0 degree rotation state, (B) is a distribution rotator in a 180 degree rotation state FIG. It is the perspective view of the area division member of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the perspective view which looked at the area division member from the back surface, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the area division member from the front lower side. is there. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the accessory of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a front view of a game production | presentation structure, (B) is the state of the state which the production | presentation movable member and the distribution rotator were united. It is a front view. It is a figure explaining the progress display part of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is an enlarged front view of the game production | presentation structure centering on a progress display part, (B) is light emission of 4th design LED. It is a transition diagram which shows a pattern. It is a disassembled perspective view of the light-guide plate unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional perspective view of the light-guide plate unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view of a light-guide plate unit, (B) is an expanded cross section of the part enclosed with the circular broken line in (A). A perspective view and (C) are expanded sectional views of a portion surrounded by a circular broken line in (A). It is a figure which shows the light emission area | region of the light guide plate of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a figure which shows the light emission area | region of a front side light-guide plate, (B) is a figure which shows the light emission area | region of a back side light-guide plate. is there. It is a perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional perspective view of the right protrusion part of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game flow of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the game control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the production | presentation control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the small hit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the small hit process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the jackpot process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the jackpot process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart when there is no winning at the upper prize winning opening of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart when there is a prize at the top prize winning opening of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart when there are a plurality of winnings in the upper prize winning opening of the first embodiment of the present invention and a V winning is generated. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st CPU main process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st scene control process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen of the energy-saving mode state which reduced the brightness | luminance of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a customer waiting demonstration screen of energy-saving mode, (B) is a menu screen of energy-saving mode. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the moving image browsing process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the reproduction | regeneration processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the video recording process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the some moving image information preserve | saved of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a fluctuation | variation of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the indicator operation setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the raising / lowering and front-back operation of the sub display unit 340 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) and (B) show a 1st front-back operation mode, (C) and (D) are FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a second front-rear operation mode. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation which combined the 1st back-and-forth operation | movement aspect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the screen production on a main display screen and a sub display screen. (A) shows production example 1, (B) shows production example 2, (C) and (D) are diagrams showing a common production example that follows production examples 1 and 2. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in case the sub display unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention returns to an initial position. (A) shows a state of moving back and forth, (B) and (C) show examples of return effects when the notice effect image indirectly suggests reliability, and (D) and (E) notice It is a figure which shows the example of a return effect in case an effect image directly suggests reliability. It is a figure which shows the back-and-front operation | movement aspect of the 1st display and the 2nd display of the modification of the back-and-forth operation | movement aspect of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) and (B) are 1st display back. The figure which shows the state which slides to (C), (D) is a figure which shows the state which a 1st indicator rotates back. It is a figure which shows the structure of the front member and damping member of the modification of the sub display unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) And (B) arrange | positions the 2nd indicator in a damping member. FIGS. 7A and 7B are views showing a state in which the convex lens unit is disposed on the front member, and FIGS. 8C and 9D illustrate a state in which the second display unit is disposed on the damping member and the light guide plate unit is disposed on the front member. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory operation | movement setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the light-guide plate effect setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission mode selection table of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a figure which shows the light emission mode selection table 1, (B) is a figure which shows the light emission mode selection table 2, (C) is The figure which shows the light emission mode selection table 3, (D) is a figure which shows the light emission mode selection table 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 4 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 5 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 6 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 7 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 8 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 9 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 10 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 11 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 12 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 13 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 14 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 15 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 16 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern 17 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pending | holding number command reception process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is the front view which expanded the lower part of the game board which showed the path | route to which a game ball | bowl flows down by the left strike of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is the front view which expanded the lower part of the game board which showed the path | route where a game ball | bowl flows down by the right strike of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a simplified diagram of the winning device showing the operation of the right effect member by winning a special prize 1 start winning opening of Modification 1 of the winning device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the simplified figure of the winning device which shows operation | movement of the left production | presentation member by winning of the special figure 2 start winning opening of the modification 1 of the winning device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 9 is a simplified diagram of the winning device in a state where the special drawing 2 start winning opening of the variation 2 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention is not opened. FIG. 9 is a simplified diagram of the winning device in a state where the special figure 2 start winning opening of the variation 2 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention is opened. A lower variation prize-winning device (attacker) is disposed between a pair of projecting portions of the third modification of the prize-winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a simplified diagram of a winning device in which a mouth is arranged. FIG. 10 is a simplified diagram of a winning device in which a special figure 1 starting winning port, a special figure 2 starting winning port, and a lower large winning port of Modification 4 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention are integrally disposed; . It is the perspective view which looked at the winning device of the modification 5 of the winning device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front upper direction. It is a cross-sectional perspective view of the protrusion part which looked at the protrusion part of the modification 5 of the winning device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the player's viewpoint. It is a screen transition figure which shows the example of an effect which provided the interlocking | linkage with the rotation operation | movement of the distribution movable unit of the other example of production of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the design fluctuation of a fluctuation display game. It is a screen transition figure which shows the example of an effect which provided the interlocking | linkage with the rotation operation | movement of the distribution movable unit of the other example of production 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the symbol variation in pseudo | simulation continuous variation. It is a front view of the gaming machine of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the right side protrusion part (frame side part production | presentation unit) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the standing state and tilted state (folded state) of the right side protrusion part which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the right side protrusion part of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front structure of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an expansion perspective view near the ball introduction part of the inclined shelf part according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sphere introduction part of the inclined shelf part according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged front view which shows a mode that a game ball flows down in the upper part of the game area which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged front view which shows a mode that several game balls flow down in the upper part of the game area which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the spherical flow path which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light-guide plate of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial front view which shows the game machine of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial front view which shows the modification 1 with respect to the game machine (FIG. 95) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial front view which shows the modification 2 with respect to the game machine (FIG. 95) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial front view which shows the modification 3 with respect to the game machine (FIG. 95) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial front view which shows the modification 4 with respect to the game machine (FIG. 95) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a fluctuation | variation of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory operation | movement setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection table (for operation | movement probability selection) of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the light-guide plate effect setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission mode selection table of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect example 3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect example 4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect example 5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect example 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the destination notice effect setting process of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the destination notice effect concerning the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the distribution rotator moving destination notice which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the other example of presentation of the distribution rotary body movement destination notice which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the further example of another production | presentation of the distribution rotator moving destination notice which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation of the production | presentation movable member movement destination notice which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation of the sub display apparatus movement destination notice which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the display apparatus (display device) of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is the upper view which looked down at the sub display apparatus of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the top. It is an exploded view of the light-guide plate display apparatus of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the light emission area | region (light emission pattern) of the light-guide plate of the light-guide plate display apparatus which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the indicator operation setting process of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the horizontal movement operation | movement mode determination table, the light-guide plate operation | movement determination table, and the light-guide plate light emission mode determination table of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display effect unit production example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the display effect unit production example 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the display effect unit production example 3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the display effect unit production example 4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the light-guide plate unit production example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the light-guide plate unit production example 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship (merged state) of the sub display apparatus of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged front view of the center case of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an expansion perspective view of the winning unit of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the winning unit of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the common memory display unit of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the common memory display unit of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game flow of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure small hits pattern determination table of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hits process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 small hits middle process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle part of the special figure 2 small hits middle process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the special figure 2 small hits middle process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the usual game process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the common figure pending | holding information determination process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specification regarding the common figure of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the common figure prefetch effect setting process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the common figure pending | holding display mode determination table of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the center case effect control process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit effect setting process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure holding | maintenance display aspect of the 4th Embodiment of this invention, and a common figure holding | maintenance display aspect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the prefetch chance mode of the modification 3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the small hit effect control process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the small hit effect control process of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character determination table of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the special figure 2 small hit state of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of becoming V prize in the small hit effect in the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows in time series the example of an effect in case it does not become V prize in the small hit effect in the 4th Embodiment of this invention.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine 1 refer to directions seen from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
The gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an opening / closing frame 3 whose one side is attached to an outer frame (support) 2 fixed to an island facility via a hinge 18 so as to be freely opened and closed. The open / close frame 3 includes a front frame 4 and a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 5.

  The front frame 4 is provided with a game board 20 (see FIG. 2) having a game area 22 in a concave chamber-like game board storage part having an open front surface. A glass frame 5 provided with a transparent plate 5a is attached. Here, the transparent plate 5a is unitized in a state where two sheets are arranged in the front and rear, and is a transparent member such as glass, acrylic, polycarbonate, or the like. In this way, the transparent plate 5a functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 22 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 20 to be visible.

  The front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 22 of the game board 20 can be accessed by opening the glass frame 5. Further, by opening the front frame 4, it is possible to access the game control device 100 (see FIGS. 3 and 23) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 20.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge of the glass frame 5 around the transparent plate 5a.

  On the upper and left sides of the glass frame 5, decoration devices 6 and 7 capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 6 and 7 accommodate illumination members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside the decoration devices 6 and 7 constitute a part of the frame decoration device 171 (see FIG. 24).

  Upper speakers 8a are respectively disposed at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 5. Apart from these upper speakers 8a, two lower speakers 8b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 1. The lower speaker 8 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 5 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 4. These upper speaker 8a and lower speaker 8b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  Abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine 1 include failure of the gaming machine 1 and implementation of fraud. The cheating includes, for example, an act of illegally manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet (magnet fraud), an act of oscillating radio waves with respect to the start switch of the gaming machine 1 (radio fraud), etc. It is. These fraudulent acts are detected by detecting magnetism with the magnetic sensor 29a (see FIG. 23) or detecting radio waves with the radio wave sensor 29b (see FIG. 23).

  Moreover, the act of opening the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is also included abnormally. The open / close state of the front frame 4 is detected by a front frame open detection switch 4e (see FIG. 23), and the open / closed state of the glass frame 5 is detected by a glass frame open detection switch 5d (see FIG. 23). When the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification such as outputting an alarm sound (error sound) from the upper speaker 8a and the lower speaker 8b is performed.

  On the right side of the glass frame 5, a right side protruding portion 19 is provided that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 1 and protrudes forward (player side). The right protrusion 19 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the right protrusion 19 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 171 (see FIG. 24).

  An upper plate unit 12 having an upper plate (storage plate) 13 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 5. The upper plate 13 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 13 are supplied to a launching device provided at the lower part of the front frame 4.

  The upper plate unit 12 includes an effect operation unit 15 that receives an input operation from a player, an upper plate decoration unit 14 that performs a light emission effect according to the game state, and a ball lending operation device 40 that receives an input operation from the player. And a lower speaker 8b positioned at the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the gaming machine 1.

  The production operation unit 15 is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit 12 so that the player can easily operate. The effect operation unit 15 is an operation device in which a touch panel function is incorporated in addition to a push button, and further has a light emission function as a part of the light emission effect of the upper plate decoration unit 14. The touch panel is laid on the surface (operation surface) of the push button.

  When the player operates the effect operation unit 15, the player performs an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variable display game or the like displayed on the first display (main display device) 31 (see FIG. 2). be able to. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the fluctuation display game includes a special figure fluctuation display game and a common figure fluctuation display game. When the fluctuation display game is simply referred to as a fluctuation display game, in this specification, the special figure fluctuation display game is indicated.

  Further, not only during the execution of the variable display game, but also when the player operates the effect operation unit 15 during non-execution, it may be possible to change (customize) the effect pattern, BGM, etc. You may enable it to adjust a volume and the brightness | luminance of various LED.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game (auxiliary game) is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a specific game state (a normal power support state or a short time state) or a special game state (a big hit state or a small hit state).

  The upper dish decoration unit 14 is a device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper dish unit 12. Note that light is emitted in conjunction with the operation of the effect operation unit 15 or the light emission effect.

  The ball lending operation device 40 is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit 12. The ball lending operation device 40 includes a ball lending button 41, a return button 42, and a balance display unit 43. The ball lending button 41 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 42 is a button operated by the player when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit of a table unit (not shown). is there. The balance display unit 43 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  A lower tray unit 9 having a lower tray 10 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the front frame 4 below the glass frame 5 including the upper tray unit 12 and the like. The lower plate 10 is disposed below the upper plate unit 12 with a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit 12. The lower dish 10 includes a ball punching hole 11a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower dish 10 in the vertical direction, and a lower dish ball removing operation unit 11b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 11a. When the player operates the lower dish ball removal operation portion 11b to open the ball removal hole 11a, the game balls stored in the lower dish 10 can be discharged to the outside.

  The lower plate unit 9 is also locked with the firing handle 16 for operating the internal launching device, the lower speaker 8b located at the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the gaming machine 1, and the glass frame 5 closed. And a pothole portion 17 for performing the above.

  The firing handle 16 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 4 and below the lower speaker 8b on the right side. When the player rotates the launch handle 16, the launch device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 13 onto the game area 22 of the game board 20. The launching speed of the game ball launched from the launching device is set so as to increase as the rotational operation amount of the launching handle 16 increases.

  In the vicinity of the firing handle 16, a firing stop switch (not shown) and a touch switch (not shown) are provided. The launch stop switch is for stopping the launch of the game ball by the launch device by outputting a launch stop switch signal to the launch control device 420 (see FIG. 23) when pressed by the player. The touch switch (not shown) detects that the player is operating the firing handle 16 (the player's hand is touching the firing handle 16) and sends a touch signal to the firing control device 420 (see FIG. 23). When the touch signal is not output, the launch of the game ball from the launch device is stopped.

  In response to an operation of the launch handle 16 by the player, the launching device launches a game ball with a first launch force and a game ball with a second launch force different from the first launch force. And a second launch mode for launching. For example, the first firing mode is one of left-handed and right-handed, and the second firing mode is the other of left-handed and right-handed. Left-handed and right-handed are modes in which game balls are launched and flowed down to the left and right sides of the game area 22, respectively.

[Game board configuration]
With reference to FIG. 2, the gaming board 20 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The game board 20 partitions the substantially circular game area 22 by providing guide rails 22a as partition members on the surface of a substantially square game board main body. The material of the game board body may be a wooden plywood board, a plastic board, or an acrylic board. Then, a game ball is launched from the launching device into the game area 22 to play a game. The game area 22 is provided with a windmill as a hitting direction changing member, a number of obstacle nails, and the like, and the shot game balls flow down the game area 22 while changing the rolling direction by these hitting direction changing members. To do.

  A center frame unit 210 (see FIG. 3) that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for the decorative special figure variation display game is attached from approximately the center of the game area 22 to the upper right. The center frame unit 210 constitutes a part of the front structure 200 (see FIG. 3), as will be described later. Behind the center frame unit 210 (on the back side of the game board) is a back surface structure (production device unit) 300 (see FIG. 3) in which an opening window 301c is formed, and the display unit is displayed through the opening window 301c. The first display (main display device) 31 is disposed so that can be visually recognized. The first display 31 has a main display screen 32 capable of executing a decoration special figure variation display game for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of decoration identification information corresponding to the special figure variation display game. The first display 31 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, but may include a transmissive display such as an EL, or may be a 7-segment display, or a combination thereof. Also good.

  The main display screen 32 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each of the variable display areas, a character that produces decoration identification information (decoration special symbol) and a special decoration map variable display game is displayed. In addition, the main display screen 32 displays an image based on the progress of the game such as a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, and the like.

  A second display (sub display device) 34 having a sub display screen 35 is disposed in the upper right part of the main display screen 32. Display contents that can be displayed on the main display screen 32 may be displayed on the sub display screen 35, and display contents independent from the display contents displayed on the main display screen 32 may be displayed.

  In the game area 22 on the left side of the center frame unit 210, direction changing members such as obstacle nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) that change the flow direction of the game ball are arranged. A warp device 33 is arranged on the left side of the center frame unit 210 so that the warp entrance faces the game area 22.

  On the inner bottom portion of the center frame unit 210, a stage portion 240 is disposed for rolling out the game ball and then leading it to the game area 22 below the center frame unit 210. The game ball that has flowed into the warp passage of the warp device 33 from the warp entrance is guided to the stage unit 240. The stage portion 240 has a bowl-shaped rolling portion 243 that extends in the left-right direction at the center of the lower portion of the center frame unit 210 and that allows a game ball that has flowed down the warp passage to roll. The hook-shaped rolling part 243 is formed in a wave shape that inclines downward toward the center part and the center part rises upward.

  The game ball guided to the stage unit 240 from the warp path rolls on the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 and then passes through the guide channel from the specific inlet 36 provided at the center of the bowl-shaped rolling part 243. Are discharged to the game area 22 or discharged to the game area 22 from the disengagement introduction ports 38 (disengagement introduction ports 38a and 38b) provided on the left and right of the central portion of the bowl-shaped rolling portion 243. Here, the specific lead-out port (directly upper port) 37 corresponding to the outlet of the guide channel is disposed immediately above the special figure 1 start winning port 23, whereas the detachment introduction port 38 is the special figure 1 start winning port. Therefore, the possibility that the game balls discharged from the detachment introduction port 38 will win the special figure 1 start winning port 23 is extremely low.

  Also, in the game area 22 below the center frame unit 210, there is a winning device 280 including a special figure 1 start winning opening 23, a special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, a movable member 24a, a movable space (effect movable section) 286, and the like. Arranged. The special figure 1 start winning opening 23 and the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 are winning openings for establishing a start condition of the special figure changing display game (auxiliary game) by winning a game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a special figure 2 fluctuation is provided immediately below the special figure 1 start prize opening (first start prize area) 23 to which the start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (auxiliary game) is given (established). A special figure 2 start winning opening (second start winning area) 24 for providing (establishing) a start condition for the display game (auxiliary game) is provided. The special figure 2 start winning opening 24 includes a pair of movable members 24a whose upper side is opened in an inverted “C” shape and converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow. When the game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 or the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, a special symbol (special figure) variable display game is executed. It should be noted that a game ball can be awarded only to the left in the special figure 1 start winning opening 23.

  The pair of movable members 24a of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 normally holds a closed state (a winning regulation state that is disadvantageous for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the special figure 1 start prize opening 23 is provided above the special figure 2 start prize opening 24, the game ball is placed in the special figure 2 start prize opening 24 when the movable member 24a is closed. You can't win a prize.

  The movable member 24a opens in the shape of a reverse “C” via the general-purpose solenoid 24b (see FIG. 20) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode (a hit result mode). As a result, the game ball changes (converts) to an open state (a winning easy state advantageous to the player) that is likely to flow into the special figure 2 start winning opening 24.

  The movable member 24a is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy winning state or increases the generation time of the easy winning state in the probability variation state (probability variation state) or the short time state (time reduction state) compared to the normal game state. Such a state is generally called a public power support state.

  In addition, three general winning holes 26 are arranged in the lower left game area 22 of the center frame unit 210, and one general winning opening 26 is arranged in the lower right game area 22 of the center frame unit 210. ing.

  On the right side of the center frame unit 210, there is disposed a general diagram start gate 25 that establishes a start condition for a normal symbol (normal diagram) variable display game when a game ball passes. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 22 passes through the usual figure starting gate 25, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  Further, an up-variable winning device 28 is provided below the usual start gate 25. The upper prize winning port 28b provided in the upper fluctuation winning device 28 is normally blocked by the movable member 28a so that the game ball cannot be won, and the special figure variation display game is in the small hit result mode (second special result mode). When the small hit state (second special game state) occurs, the movable member 28a is tilted from the standing state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) by the upper prize winning solenoid 28c (see FIG. 23) (player). Game ball can be won by being converted into an open state advantageous to the player). When a winning of a game ball is detected by an upper count switch 28d (see FIG. 23) provided in the up fluctuation winning device 28, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10) is paid out as a game value (privilege). Further, when the passing (winning) of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 225a (see FIG. 23) provided in the specific area 225 (see FIG. 12), it is possible to further generate (acquire) a big hit state. .

  Further, a lower variation winning device 27 is provided in the game area 22 at the lower right of the center frame unit 210. The lower big prize opening 27b provided in the lower fluctuation prize winning device 27 is normally blocked by an opening / closing plate (not shown) so that a game ball cannot win, and the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit result mode (first special result mode). ), Or when the big hit state (first special game state) occurs due to the game ball passing through the specific area 225 in the small hit state, the lower big prize winning solenoid 27c (see FIG. 23) The game ball can be won by changing (not shown) from a protruding state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to a retracted state (open state advantageous to the player). When a winning of a game ball is detected by a lower count switch 27d (see FIG. 23) provided in the lower fluctuation winning device 27, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out as a game value (privilege).

  The game area 22 below the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is provided with an out opening 39 for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening or the like.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 22 and in the lower right part of the game board 20, a collective display for executing a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a general figure fluctuation display game. A device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display unit) 51 and a second special figure fluctuation display unit (figure display unit) (figure display game) composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Special display 2 display) 52 and a memory display unit for notification of the start (pending) memory number of each special figure variation display game composed of a plurality of LEDs (special figure 1 hold display part 53, special figure 2 hold display part) 54), a general map display unit (general map display) 55 for a general map variable display game, and a general map hold display unit 56 for notifying the start (hold) memory number of the general map variable display game. ing.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 has a high-probability display unit and a short-time state for notifying that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the first big hit occurrence. Then, the conversion state (opening time, opening number, etc.) of the gaming state display unit 57 including the short-time state display unit that lights up and notifies the occurrence of the short-running state, and the lower variation winning device 27 or the upper variation winning device 28 at the time of big hit. There are provided an open pattern (number of rounds) display section 58 to be displayed and a firing mode instruction display section 59 that lights up at the time of a big hit and indicates a right-hand strike.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, the details of the general map variation display game and the special diagram variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 1, a game is played by the player operating the launch handle 16 to launch a game ball from the launch device toward the game area 22. The launched game balls flow down the game area 22 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 22, and the normal start gate 25, the general winning opening 26, and the special figure 1. Win the start winning opening 23, the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, the lower variation winning device 27 or the upper variation winning device 28, or flow into the out port 39 provided at the bottom of the game area 22 and discharge from the game area 22 Is done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 26, the special figure 1 starting winning opening 23, the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, the lower variation winning apparatus 27 or the upper variation winning apparatus 28, the type corresponding to the type of the winning opening won. A number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 13 via a payout unit (not shown).

  The normal start gate 25 is provided with a gate switch 25a (see FIG. 23) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 25. When the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 25, it is detected by the gate switch 25a, and the usual figure change display game is executed.

  In a state where the normal map change display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map change display game has already been played and the normal map change display game has not ended, FIG. 2 When the start winning opening 24 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 25, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1). .

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by the universal map display unit 55 provided in the collective display device 50. The common map display unit 55 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general map) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 25 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 55 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the electric solenoid 24b (see FIG. 23) is driven, the movable member 24a is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game to the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is performed. Ball winning is allowed.

  The special figure 1 start winning opening 23 is provided with a special figure 1 winning opening switch (start opening 1 switch) 23d (see FIG. 23) for detecting the winning of a game ball to the special figure 1 starting winning opening 23. ing. The special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is provided with a special figure 2 winning opening switch (start opening 2 switch) 24d (see FIG. 23) for detecting the winning of a game ball to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24. ing.

  When a game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and various variation pattern random number values are extracted, and the first start memory which is the right to start the special figure 1 variation display game is extracted. Are stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 up to a predetermined number (for example, four). When a game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and various variation pattern random number values are extracted, and a second start memory which is a right to start the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted. Are stored in the special figure 2 reserved storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The number of memories of the first start memory and the second start memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display section 53 and the special figure 2 hold display section 54 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the first indicator 31 is also displayed on the main display screen 32, the special figure 1 storage display LED 232 (see FIG. 16), and the special figure 2 storage display LED 234 (see FIG. 16).

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the first start memory (the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 start winning opening 23). Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the second start memory (the winning of the game ball to the special figure 2 start winning opening 24).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are played by stopping and displaying a predetermined result form after the identification information is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In addition, the first display 31 executes a decoration special figure fluctuation display game that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decoration special figure variation display game on the first display 31, the decoration special symbol (decoration identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is on the left (see the left decoration special symbol 61, FIG. 81), and on the right (right ornament special symbol). 62, refer to FIG. 81), and change display (scroll display) in the order of or at the same time (inside decoration special symbol 63, refer to FIG. 81). Thereafter, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially or simultaneously, and the result of the decorative special symbol change display game is displayed. In addition, the first display 31 or the like displays various effects such as the appearance of a character in order to improve interest.

  When a game ball is awarded to the special figure 1 starting prize opening 23 or the special figure 2 starting prize opening 24 at a predetermined timing (when the value of the big hit random number obtained at the time of winning detection is a big hit value) As a result of the figure variation display game, the first special result mode (big hit result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and the big hit state (first special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode as a result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game, decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) executed on the first display 31 is the first special result aspect. (For example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  After that, a big win state (first special game state) occurs, and the big prize opening is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the lower big prize opening solenoid 27c provided in the lower fluctuation prize winning device 27. To open state. That is, the lower big prize opening 27b provided in the lower fluctuation prize winning device 27 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) wins, during which the player acquires many game balls. The privilege that you can do is granted. Further, in the big hit state, the lower big winning opening 27b is defined as one round until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) wins, and the round is generated a plurality of times.

  Similarly, when the winning of the game ball to the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is made at a predetermined timing (when the value of the big hit random number acquired at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure 2 fluctuation display As a result of the game, the second special result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and the small hit state (second special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game executed on the first display 31 is a second special result mode (for example, a predetermined number such as “1, 3, 5”, etc.). Stop of special combination indicating stop of combination and small hit).

  Thereafter, a small hit state (second special game state) is generated, and the upper prize winning opening 28b is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). A specific area 225 in which a big hit state can be acquired (generated) is provided in the up-floating winning device 28, and when a game ball that has won a prize in the upper big prize opening 28b passes the specific area 225, the small hit state is set to 1. Transition to the big hit state as the round. In other words, the upper prize winning opening 28b provided in the upper fluctuation winning apparatus 28 opens widely for a predetermined time, and during this time, the player can obtain a chance to acquire (generate) a big hit state in addition to the winning ball by the winning ball. The privilege (game value) is given.

  In the present embodiment, there is a case where the aforementioned small hit state (second special gaming state) is generated and a case where it is not generated between the time when the special hit state is derived and the occurrence of the big hit state. You may unify to either one. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  With respect to the decoration special figure fluctuation display game on the first display 31, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas. It may be executed in the same display device or display area. In this case, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game) corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in the order in which the start memory is stored.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the player performs left-handed or right-handed according to the gaming state. A left-handed or right-handed instruction is displayed on the main display screen 32 of the first display 31 so that the player can easily make a game according to the gaming state.

[Game production component]
Next, the game effect component 21 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 20 and the game effect component 21 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  A front structure 200 (center frame unit 210), a left winning port unit 260, a right winning port unit 270, and a winning device 280 are respectively attached to the openings formed in the game board 20 from the front. Further, the game board 20 is attached to a fitting portion 301 a formed in a bowl shape on the control base member 301 of the back surface structure 300.

  The back surface structure 300 accommodates the second display 34, various movable accessories, a driving source thereof, and the like in a concave chamber-shaped accommodation portion 301b formed in the control base member 301 and having an open front surface. Further, on the upper back surface of the control base member 301, the display unit 30 including the first display 31 and the effect control device (display control device) 150 is arranged in accordance with the opening window 301 c formed in the control base member 301. The Furthermore, a game control device 100 that controls the game in an integrated manner is fixed to the lower back surface of the control base member 301. As will be described later, the first display 31 (display unit 30) can be moved backward or rotated backward by a drive mechanism (see FIG. 50).

  The front structure 200 includes a warp device 33, a stage unit 240, an upward winning device 28, and the like, and the back structure 300 accommodates an accessory device or the like in a deep accommodating portion 301b. The front structure 200 and the back structure 300 form a game effect structure 21 that provides the player with a screen effect, an accessory effect, and the like, with the game board 20 sandwiched therebetween.

[Back side structure]
Next, the back surface structure 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the back surface structure 300 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The back surface structure 300 includes a control base member 301, a second display 34 (sub display unit 340) disposed on the control base member 301, various movable accessories, and the like. The control base member 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an accommodating portion 301b formed to accommodate an accessory, an opening window portion 301c formed at the bottom (back wall) of the accommodating portion 301b, and an accommodating portion. The front part of the part 301b is provided with a fitting part 301a formed in a bowl shape.

  The fitting portion 301 a of the control base member 301 is formed in a shape that can be fitted to the game board 20, and is screwed with the game board 20 fitted to the front surface of the control base member 301. The accommodating part 301b is formed in the shape of a concave chamber whose front face opens with a depth that can sufficiently secure an arrangement space and an operation space for an accessory. In the housing portion 301b in the present embodiment, the production movable unit 310, the distribution movable unit 320, the unit base member 302 (302a, 302b) serving as a mounting base for these movable accessories, the sub display unit 340, and the sub display unit An elevating unit 370 that elevates and lowers 340 is disposed. In FIG. 4, the effect movable unit 310, the distribution movable unit 320, and the sub display unit 340 are all on standby at the initial position.

  The unit base member 302 includes a vertical unit base 302a extending in the vertical direction in the accommodating portion 301b and a horizontal unit base 302b extending in the horizontal direction in the accommodating portion 301b. The unit base member 302 is decorated on the front surface in consideration of being visually recognized by the player. The vertical unit base 302 a is mainly provided for attaching the effect movable unit 310 to the control base member 301, and the horizontal unit base 302 b is mainly provided for attaching the distribution movable unit 320 to the control base member 301.

  The effect movable unit 310 includes an effect movable member 311 and two support arms 314 (a main support arm 314a and a driven support arm 314b) that are link members. The base end portion of the main driving support arm 314a is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 315, and the driving force of the motor 315 is transmitted to the stage movable member 311 so that the stage movable member 311 rotates. The effect movable member 311 waits at the initial position (standby position, standby area) outside the opening window 301c so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the main display screen 32, and the first display 31 is adjusted according to the progress of the game. It turns forward (operation position, production area) and produces an effect such as light emission.

  The sorting movable unit 320 includes a sorting rotator 321 and one support arm 322, and a base end 322a (see FIG. 6) of the support arm 322 is fixed to an output shaft of the motor 330 (see FIG. 6). . As will be described later, the sorting rotator 321 waits while rotating with respect to the support arm 322 in the two-type game space where the up variation winning device 28 is arranged, and displays the first display according to the progress of the game. It rotates to the front of the container 31 and produces effects such as light emission accompanied by a rotation operation.

  The sub display unit 340 includes a second display 34, an arm portion 343 that supports the second display 34, and the like, and can be moved up and down by an elevating unit 370. Further, as will be described later, the second indicator 34 can also operate in the front-rear direction. The sub display unit 340 waits at an initial position (standby position, standby area) outside the opening window 301c so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the main display screen 32, and performs the first display from the initial position according to the progress of the game. The player 31 descends to the front of the device 31 (operation position, production area) and displays a screen corresponding to the gaming state. An image independent of the display content displayed on the main display screen 32 may be displayed on the sub display screen 35 provided in the second display 34, and among the display contents displayed on the main display screen 32, You may display the display content of the part which overlaps with the main display screen 32. FIG. The sub display unit 340 may partially overlap the main display screen 32 at the initial position.

  The lifting unit 370 moves the sub display unit 340 up and down by the driving force of the motor 371. Details of the operation mechanism will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, on the surfaces of the arm portion 343 of the sub display unit 340 and the front case 376 of the elevating unit 370, for example, characters (decorations) such as “I will support you with spirit” and “I will move up and down!” Are engraved as part of the production. Has been.

  In the lower part of the control base member 301, a flow path of a game ball guided from the game board 20 is formed by a winning ball flow path member 303. The game balls flowing down from the game board 20 to the winning ball flow path member 303 are the general winning port 26, the special figure 1 starting winning port 23, the special figure 2 starting winning port 24, the down variation winning device 27, and the up variation winning device 28. This is a game ball that won a prize. Of the plurality of ball channels formed by the winning ball channel member 303, a ball channel for flowing down (winning) game balls flowing into (wins) the three general winning ports 26 on the left side of the game board 20, A winning port switch 26a and a winning port switch 26b are respectively installed in the middle of the ball flow paths for flowing down the game balls that flow into (win) the general winning port 26 on the right side.

  Further, on the lower right side of the control base member 301, the game board 20 is attached (attached) to the game board storage part of the front frame 4, so that the game board 20 is fitted to the drawer connector provided on the front frame 4. A drawer connector substrate 304 to which the connection of the front frame 4 is connected is provided.

  Note that the location and direction of the drive source (motor 315, etc.) in this embodiment is an example, and can be placed at any location with a gear, cam, or joint interposed between the drive source and the driven body. And The drive source is not limited to a motor, and may be an actuator such as a solenoid.

[Direction movable unit]
Next, the effect movable unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged front view of the back surface structure 300 around the effect movable unit 310 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 includes a fan-shaped effect movable member 311 and two support arms 314 (a main support arm 314a and a driven support arm 314b) that are link members. The effect movable member 311 is rotatably supported by the two support arms 314. The effect movable member 311 includes an LED substrate (not shown) inside, and can emit light from the plurality of light emitting units 312. In addition, an arcuate recess (notch) 313 is formed on the right side of the effect movable member 311, and the arcuate recess 313 is configured to accommodate the left half of the sorting rotator 321 (see FIG. 6). (See FIG. 15).

  The support arm 314 includes a main support arm 314a that transmits the driving force of the motor 315, and a driven support arm 314b that follows the movement of the main support arm 314a.

  One end (base end portion) of the main support arm 314a is fixed to the output shaft 316a of the motor 315, and the other end (free end portion) is rotatably attached to the upper part of the back surface of the effect movable member 311 (axis-mounted). ).

  One end (base end portion) of the driven support arm 314b is rotatably attached (axially attached) to a rotation shaft 316b formed on the horizontal unit base 302b, and the other end (free end portion) is an effect movable member 311. It is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the rotator so as to be freely rotatable (axis-mounted). The driven support arm 314b supports the effect movable member 311 from below while following the movement of the main support arm 314a.

  A position detection sensor 308a is provided at the upper left corner of the horizontal unit base 302b. The position detection sensor 308a is configured so that the effect movable unit 310 (the effect movable member 311) is in the initial position (standby position, standby area). Detect whether or not. Also, an arm support portion 309 is formed to abut the driven support arm 314b in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 316b to restrict the operation of the driven support arm 314b or maintain the posture. The position detection sensor 308a is, for example, a photo interrupter, and includes a light emitting element and a light receiving element facing each other. When light between the elements is blocked by the light shielding plate 318 formed on the back surface of the driven support arm 314b and the light receiving element cannot detect the light, the position detection sensor 308a detects that the effect movable unit 310 is in the initial position. . The arm support 309 is provided with a light shielding plate 318 on the back side of the driven support arm 314b so as to come into contact with a portion having increased strength, so that the driven support arm 314b is not easily damaged.

  The motor 315 is, for example, a geared pulse motor, and is set so as to rotate the effect movable unit 310 from the initial position to the maximum rotation position (operation position, effect region) with N pulses. Can be rotated. The motor 315 can control the number of rotations by pulse control, but if the effect movable unit 310 rotates beyond the necessary rotation amount, there is a possibility of colliding with other structures, so the driven support arm 314b An arm support 309 is provided so that the rotation width is regulated. The effect movable unit 310 rotates between the initial position and the maximum rotation position, that is, the range indicated by the arrow A1 in FIG. 5 by the driving force of the motor 315.

  Since the effect portion shown to the player in the effect movable unit 310 is the effect movable member 311, the support arm 314 may be, for example, a transparent or translucent member so as not to stand out. Further, since the support arm 314 is simply a straight member, it may be given a shape or pattern that gives an aesthetic feeling. The effect movable member 311 may also be a transparent or translucent member so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the main display screen 32.

  Similarly, since the unit base member 302 and the motor 315 are also visible depending on the player's viewpoint, the surface of the unit base member 302 is decorated with a pattern or the like, and a decorative member (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the motor 315. It is put on. Further, the unit base member 302 can emit light by receiving illumination from the inside.

[Distributable movable unit and lifting unit]
Next, the sorting movable unit 320 and the lifting unit 370 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view of the back surface structure 300 centering on the sorting movable unit 320 and the lifting unit 370 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The lifting unit 370 shows the internal mechanism with the front case 376 removed.

  In the distribution movable unit 320 in the initial position (standby position, standby region), the distribution rotating body 321 forms a part of the upward fluctuation winning device 28. Moreover, the distribution movable unit 320 functions as an effect device with a large operation by rotating to the front (operation position, effect area) of the first display 31 according to the progress of the game. As will be described later, the sorting rotator 321 is a structure that determines whether or not a prize can be given to a specific area (V zone) 225 (see FIG. 12) determined by the acquisition (occurrence) of the big hit state. It is a structure of particular interest.

  The sorting movable unit 320 includes a sorting rotator 321, a support arm 322, a rotation base 323, a motor 325, and an LED substrate 326 (see FIG. 8). The sorting rotator 321 is rotatably supported with respect to the horizontal unit base 302 b by the support arm 322 and the rotation base portion 323 and is rotatable with respect to the rotation base portion 323. Further, the sorting rotator 321 can emit light by light emitted from the LED substrate 326 (see FIG. 8) attached to the rotation base 323.

  The base end 322a of the support arm 322 is fixed to the output shaft 331 (see FIG. 8) of the motor 330 that protrudes forward from the lateral unit base 302b. A rotation base portion 323 (see FIG. 8) is formed at the free end portion of the support arm 322, and a light shielding plate 327 is provided between the base end portion 322a and the rotation base portion 323. Further, the support arm 322 may be a transparent or translucent member, for example, similarly to the support arm 314 of the effect movable unit 310. In addition, the support arm 322 may be provided with a decorative portion such as a shape or a pattern that gives aesthetics.

  A rotation base support portion 306 for supporting the rotation base portion 323 and maintaining the posture is formed at the right end of the horizontal unit base 302b. Further, a position detection sensor 308b is provided on the upper right surface of the horizontal unit base 302b, and the position detection sensor 308b detects whether or not the sorting movable unit 320 (sorting rotating body 321) is in the initial position. The position detection sensor 308b is, for example, a photo interrupter. When the sensor cannot detect light by the light shielding plate 327 formed under the support arm 322, the sorting movable unit 320 (sorting rotating body 321) is set to the initial position. Detect that there is. The horizontal unit base 302b may be provided with a support portion that regulates the maximum rotation position of the sorting movable unit 320. Further, the posture of the sorting movable unit 320 may be maintained by bringing the light shielding plate 327 into contact with the horizontal unit base 302b.

  The motor 330 is disposed on the back surface of the horizontal unit base 302b. The motor 330 is, for example, a geared pulse motor similar to the motor 315, and can rotate the sorting movable unit 320 at a high speed. The distribution movable unit 320 is driven between the initial position (standby position and standby area) and the maximum rotation position (operation position and effect area) by the driving force of the motor 330, that is, the range indicated by the arrow A2 in FIG. Rotate.

  Next, the elevating unit 370 that moves the sub display unit 340 up and down will be described.

  The elevating unit 370 includes a front case 376 and a back case 377 as a housing, and includes a mechanism for moving the sub display unit 340 up and down in the housing. The back case 377 may be formed as a part of the control base member 301. In addition, a motor 371 as a drive source is disposed below the lifting unit 370.

  The lifting unit 370 includes a lifting rod 372, a connecting member 373 that connects the output shaft of the motor 371 and the lifting rod 372, and a position detection sensor 374 in the housing. The elevating rod 372 is configured as a screw-like rod-like screw member having a spiral convex portion 372a and a concave portion 372b.

  The sub display unit 340 is installed perpendicular to the axial direction of the lifting rod 372, and a cylindrical portion 344 formed on the arm portion 343 is attached to the lifting rod 372 so as to be movable up and down.

  On the left side surfaces of the front case 376 and the back case 377, a groove-like elevating guide portion 378 that restricts the arm portion 343 from rotating within the range in which the arm portion 343 of the sub display unit 340 moves up and down is formed. A guide lower limit portion 379 is formed to restrict the lower limit of the stroke.

  When the lifting rod 372 rotates in one direction, the cylindrical portion 344 of the arm portion 343 rises, and when the lifting rod 372 rotates in the other direction, the cylindrical portion 344 of the arm portion 343 descends. In this way, the sub display unit 340 moves up and down as the cylinder portion 344 of the arm portion 343 moves up and down.

  The position detection sensor 374 is, for example, a photo interrupter. When the sub display unit 340 is in the initial position (standby position, standby area), the light shielding plate 345 formed on the back surface of the arm portion 343 blocks the light of the sensor. . Further, the light shielding plate 345 may regulate the upper and lower limit of the sub display unit 340. The sub display unit 340 can be moved up and down in a range between an initial position and a maximum lowered position (operation position, effect area) indicated by an arrow A3 in FIG.

[Sub display unit]
Next, the sub display unit 340 will be described with reference to FIG. 7A and 7B are perspective views of the sub display unit 340 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the sub display unit 340. FIG. 7B is a perspective view of the sub display unit 340 protruding in the front-rear direction. FIG.

  The sub display unit 340 can be moved up and down by the elevating unit 370 and can be protruded in the front-rear direction by a drive source built in the sub display unit 340. FIG. 7B shows the operation location and the operation amount of the sub display unit 340 (front member 350, vibration damping member 360) in the front-rear direction.

  The sub display unit 340 includes a display base member 341, a front member (front member) 350 (second display 34), and a vibration damping member (rear member) 360. The display base member 341 includes a substantially rectangular movable base portion 342 and an arm portion 343 that supports the movable base portion 342.

  The movable base portion 342 includes a space in which the motor 346 and the like can be incorporated, and the motor 346 is fixed by a rib 342a. A link arm member 347 having protrusions 347 a formed at both ends is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 346, and the link arm member 347 transmits the driving force of the motor 346 to the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360. In addition, guide portions 348 into which guide cylinder rods 352 provided at the four back corners of the front member 350 can be inserted are formed at the four inner corners of the body portion forming the outer shape of the movable base portion 342. In addition, a position detection sensor 349 is provided on the front surface of the body portion of the movable base portion 342 at a position facing the light shielding plate 354 provided on the back side of the front member 350, and whether or not the second display 34 is in the initial position. Is detected.

  The arm part 343 has a wiring processing part on the back for passing the wiring to the motor 346 and the second display 34, and the surface of the arm part 343 is decorated with characters and the like. The arm portion 343 is formed with a cylindrical portion 344 that slides with respect to the lifting rod 372. The cylinder portion 344 is a cylindrical member that is provided at the base end portion of the arm portion 343 and extends in the vertical direction. The cylindrical portion 344 has an inner diameter that is slidable with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the concave portion 372 b of the lifting rod 372.

  The front member (front member) 350 includes a second indicator 34 and a decorative frame member 351 that decorates the outer periphery of the second indicator 34 on the front surface, and a guide cylinder rod 352, a light shielding plate 354, and a link arm on the rear surface. An engagement piece 353 that engages with the member 347 is provided. The guide cylinder rod 352 supports the front member 350 with respect to the movable base 342 and can accommodate the guide rod 362 of the vibration damping member 360. The guide cylinder rod 352 has an insertion hole (not shown) as an inserted portion into which the guide rod 362 of the vibration damping member 360 is inserted.

  The engagement piece 353 is formed at a position on the right side from the center of the back surface of the second display 34. The engagement piece 353 includes an engagement portion 353a formed as a long hole extending in the left-right direction, and the projection 347a on one end side of the link arm member 347 engages with the engagement portion 353a. Note that the second indicator 34 may be a screen-like indicator projected from the back surface or the like instead of a self-lighting display.

  The damping member (rear member) 360 is a member for suppressing vibration (swing) of the sub display unit 340 accompanying the front-back movement of the front member 350. When the front member 350 protrudes forward, vibration (swing) accompanying the operation is generated in the sub display unit 340. However, the vibration damping member 360 is activated by operating to the opposite side at the same timing as the front member 350. Cancels vibration (sway). Therefore, the damping member 360 has substantially the same weight (mass) as the front member 350. However, the weight, operation width, and moving speed of the vibration damping member 360 may be different from those of the front member 350 as long as the vibration of the entire sub display unit 340 due to the back and forth movement of the front member 350 can be suppressed. The damping member 360 may also be provided with presentation functions such as a display function and a light emitting function.

  The damping member 360 includes a damping plate 361, a guide rod 362, and an engagement piece 363. When the damping member 360 has only a damping function, it is preferable that the damping plate 361 has a size that is hidden behind the front member 350 in front view so that the damping plate 361 cannot be seen by the player. The guide rod 362 that supports the damping plate 361 with respect to the movable base portion 342 is long enough not to be removed from the guide cylinder rod 352 even when the front member 350 and the damping member 360 are at the maximum projecting position. It is prepared. The engagement piece 363 is formed at a position on the right side from the center of the back surface of the vibration damping plate 361. The engagement piece 363 includes an engagement portion 363a formed as an elongated hole extending in the left-right direction, and the projection 347a on the other end side of the link arm member 347 engages with the engagement portion 363a.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the sub display unit 340 configured as described above has a protrusion on one end side of the link arm member 347 when the output shaft of the motor 346 rotates and the link arm member 347 rotates in one direction. The portion 347a presses the engagement piece 353 forward while sliding in the left-right direction from one end to the other end inside the engagement portion 353a, and a projection 347a on the other end side of the link arm member 347 The engagement piece 363 is pressed backward while sliding in the left-right direction from one end to the other end inside the engagement portion 363a. Accordingly, the guide cylinder rod 352 slides in the guide portion 348 and the front member 350 moves forward, while the guide rod 362 slides in the guide cylinder rod 352 and the damping member 360 moves rearward. . When the link arm member 347 is rotated approximately ¼ from the horizontal state to the vertical state, the projections 347a and 347a at both ends reach the other end portions of the engaging portion 353a and the engaging portion 363a, respectively. The front and rear movements of the front member 350 and the damping member 360 are stopped. Therefore, the amount of movement (movement width) of the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 in the front-rear direction is substantially equal to the distance from the output shaft of the motor 346 to the protrusion 347a of the link arm member 347.

  Conversely, when the output shaft of the motor 346 rotates and the link arm member 347 rotates in the other direction, the projection 347a on one end side of the link arm member 347 moves from the other end to the end of the engaging portion 353a. The engaging piece 353 is pulled rearward while sliding in the left-right direction, and the projection 347a on the other end side of the link arm member 347 faces the inside of the engaging portion 363a from the other end to one end. The engaging piece 363 is pulled forward while sliding in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the guide cylinder rod 352 slides in the guide portion 348 and the front member 350 moves backward, while the guide rod 362 slides in the guide cylinder rod 352 and the damping member 360 moves forward. . Then, when the link arm member 347 is rotated approximately 1/4 from the vertical state to the horizontal state, the projecting portions 347a and 347a at both ends reach the one end portions of the engaging portion 353a and the engaging portion 363a, respectively. The back surface of the front member 350 and the front surface of the vibration damping member 360 abut against the display base member 341, and the movement of the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 in the front-rear direction is stopped.

[Moveable unit]
Next, the configuration of the sorting movable unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8A and 8B are perspective views of the sorting movable unit 320 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8A is an exploded perspective view of the sorting movable unit 320, and FIG. It is a perspective view of the state which waits in a position (standby position, standby area).

  In the sorting movable unit 320, the sorting rotator 321 always rotates at the tip (free end side) of the support arm 322. Moreover, the distribution movable unit 320 rotates from the initial position to the maximum rotation position (operation position, effect area) according to the progress of the game. The rotation amount of the sorting movable unit 320 and the rotation direction of the sorting rotator 321 are shown in FIG. The rotation direction of the sorting rotator 321 can be arbitrarily changed, and the rotation speed can also be arbitrarily changed.

  A motor 330 that supplies a driving force that rotates to the sorting movable unit 320 is disposed on the back surface of the horizontal unit base 302b. The output shaft 331 of the motor 330 is inserted into a shaft hole 305 formed in the horizontal unit base 302 b and is fixed to the base end portion 322 a of the support arm 322 of the sorting movable unit 320.

  The sorting movable unit 320 includes a sorting rotator 321, a rotation base 323 that supports the sorting rotator 321, a support arm 322 that supports the rotation base 323, a motor 325 that rotates the sorting rotator 321, and the sorting. An LED substrate 326 for irradiating the rotating body 321 with light is provided. The sorting rotator 321 is formed with a plurality of light transmitting portions 328 that transmit or diffuse light emitted from the LEDs 326 a of the LED substrate 326 and a recess portion 329 that allows a winning path to the specific region 225 to pass therethrough. The recess 329 is set to have a width that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and when the recess 329 is at a position facing the specific area 225, the game ball can be awarded to the specific area 225 (see FIG. 12).

  A light shielding plate 327 is formed on the support arm 322. When the sorting movable unit 320 is in the initial position, the light shielding plate 327 shields light between elements of the position detection sensor 308b. In addition, the light shielding plate 327 restricts the rotation width of the sorting movable unit 320 by contacting the sensor mounting portion 307 (lateral unit base 302b).

  The horizontal unit base 302b is formed with a rotation base support portion 306 that is in contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base portion 323 to maintain the posture of the sorting movable unit 320. However, the sorting rotating body 321 always rotates. In consideration of this, the sorting rotator 321 and the rotation base support 306 do not contact each other.

  The rotation base portion 323 has a bottomed cylindrical shape that is integrally formed on the free end side of the support arm 322, and includes a housing portion 324 that houses the motor 325 and the LED substrate 326.

  The motor 325 supplies a driving force that rotates to the sorting rotator 321. A plurality of LEDs 326 a are provided on the LED substrate 326, and the LEDs 326 a are arranged in an annular shape around the motor 325. The effect light output from the LED 326a is transmitted or diffused forward through the light transmitting portion 328.

[Front structure]
Next, the front structure 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the front structure 200 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The front structure 200 includes a center frame unit 210, a stage unit 240, and a light guide plate unit 250.

  The center frame unit 210 includes a frame portion 211 that forms a frame, an entrance restriction wall (armor portion) 211a, a flange portion 212, a universal start gate portion 213 provided with a general start gate 25, and a winning space forming portion 214. Prepare.

  A flange portion 212 is formed on the outer periphery of the base portion of the armor portion 211 a protruding forward of the frame portion 211, and the frame portion 211 behind the flange portion 212 is inserted into the game board 20. In addition, below the armor portion 211a, an installation portion 215 that is notched for installing the stage portion 240 is formed. The armor portion 211a restricts the game ball from entering the inside of the center frame unit 210 from the game area 22, and also displays an indicator, a movable accessory, etc. through the opening (display window portion) 211b of the center frame unit 210. A visible frontage is formed. The winning space formation unit 214 is a space in which the up variation winning device 28 is disposed, and is provided with three winning areas (see FIG. 12).

  The stage unit 240 is installed on the installation unit 215 from the front of the center frame unit 210. The stage unit 240 has a warp device 33 (warp flow path member 241) at the left end and an area partition member (space partition member) 242 at the right end. The area partition member 242 is formed so as to cover the upper portion of the winning space 220 (see FIG. 10), and restricts the game balls rolling on the stage from jumping into the winning space 220.

  The light guide plate unit 250 includes a light guide plate having a reflecting portion that reflects light emitted from the LEDs disposed on the outer periphery to the front. The light guide plate unit 250 covers the entire opening (display window) 211b of the center frame unit 210 from the rear, and provides the player with a light emission effect. In addition, the light guide plate unit 250 restricts the game ball rolling on the stage from jumping into the housing portion 301b of the back surface structure 300 in which the display and the movable accessory are disposed.

[Center frame unit]
Next, the center frame unit 210 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the center frame unit 210 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, the stage unit 240 will be mainly described. Although the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 is formed in a concave shape as a whole, a gentle mountain-shaped ridge is formed at the bottom, and a specific introduction port 36 is provided at the top of the ridge. Displacement introduction ports 38 (38a, 38b) are provided on the left and right of the bulge. Moreover, the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 protrudes to the game area and restricts the entry of the game ball into the internal space.

  A rear regulating wall 244 is formed on the back side of the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 that contacts the light guide plate unit 250. The rear regulating wall 244 prevents a game ball that passes through the warp device 33 and vigorously flows down the bowl-shaped rolling portion 243 from rolling backward and damaging the light guide plate unit 250. In addition, the rear regulating wall 244 limits the player's line of sight to the back surface structure 300, for example, the support arm 322 of the sorting movable unit 320 in the initial position (standby position, standby area) from the player. Can be hidden. Therefore, it can suppress impairing the interest of the game. The rear regulating wall 244 may be decorated, and the rear regulating wall 244 may be formed of a translucent member.

  Next, an explanation will be given focusing on the up variation winning portion 245 in which the up variation winning device 28 is disposed. The up variation winning device 28 opens the movable member (movable wing piece) 28a at a predetermined timing when the variation display game is a small hit, so that the game ball can pass through the top large winning port 28b (see FIG. 11). The game ball that has passed through the upper large winning opening 28b rolls in the winning space (ball rolling area) 220 and wins in any one of the three winning areas (see FIG. 12). The winning space 220 is formed by being partitioned by the winning space forming portion 214 and the area partitioning member 242.

  The entry restriction wall (armor part) 211a protrudes forward from the frame part 211 inserted into the game board 20, thereby forming a boundary between the game area 22 and the display window part 211b on the game board 20. In the upper armor portion 211a in which the movable member 28a is disposed, a universal start gate portion 213 having the general start gate 25 inside is formed. Further, a progress display unit 230 having fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233 (see FIG. 16) is provided above the normal start gate unit 213 and in front of the armor unit 211a.

[Upward variation winning part (2 kinds of game space part)]
Next, the up variation winning portion 245 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is an enlarged perspective view of the center frame unit 210 centering on the upper variation winning portion 245 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The up variation winning portion 245 is an area where the up variation winning device 28 is disposed. Specifically, the upper prize winning port 28b formed by opening the movable member 28a of the up variation winning device 28, the winning space forming part 214, the area dividing member 242, and the sorting rotator 321 (see FIG. 12). Includes a winning space 220 formed by.

  When the movable member 28a of the up swing winning device 28 is opened, the top large winning port 28b is opened. A game ball that rolls from the game area 22 to the winning space (ball rolling area) 220 through the upper large winning opening 28b passes through the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216), and the count sensor 216 receives a prize. Detected. The game ball that has passed through the count sensor 216 and moved to the center of the winning space 220 has its rolling direction changed to the rear by the R-shaped inflow guide 222, and the distribution unit (allocation area) 223 (see FIG. 12). ).

  As described above, the winning space 220 is formed by the winning space forming portion 214 and the region partitioning member 242, but the winning space forming portion 214 and the region partitioning member 242 may be integrally formed. An end shielding rib 246 is formed on the back surface of the region partition member (space partition member) 242 along the upper ridge. The end shielding rib 246 is a rib for shielding the end portion of the light guide plate so that the player cannot see it.

  FIG. 12 is an enlarged perspective view of the game effect constituting body 21 centering on the upper variation winning portion 245 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  As described above, the upward variation winning portion 245 includes the upper large winning opening 28b and the winning space (ball rolling region) 220. The winning space 220 includes a distribution unit (allocation area) 223 in which the winning balls are distributed to the normal area 224 or the specific area 225.

  The allocating unit 223 distributes the game balls to two normal areas 224 (left normal area 224a and right normal area 224b) that do not lead to the acquisition of the big hit state, or to the specific area 225 determined by the acquisition (occurrence) of the big hit state. It is an area. Passage sensors 224c, 224d, and 225a (see FIG. 23) are provided in the normal area 224 and the specific area 225, respectively.

  The distribution unit 223 is a part of the winning space formation unit 214 and is formed in a trapezoidal shape in a sectional view. The distribution unit 223 includes the distribution corridor 223a connected to the specific area 225, and the distribution slopes inclined from the left and right of the distribution corridor 223a toward the normal area 224 (left distribution slope 223b, right distribution slope 223c). With.

  Above the specific area 225, the sorting rotator 321 at the initial position is rotating, and the winning ball passes through the specific area 225 only when the recess 329 of the sorting rotator 321 faces the specific area 225. It becomes possible. The timing at which the winning balls are distributed to the normal area 224 or the specific area 225 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the rotation state of the sorting rotator 321 is a rotation state in which the recess 329 is vertically below the 0 degree rotation state, and the sorting rotator 321 rotates clockwise in front view.

  As described above, the up variation winning portion 245 is an important area related to winning the jackpot. For this reason, there is a possibility that the up-variable winning portion 245 may be cheated in order to obtain a winning in the specific area 225 using vibration or magnetic force. Therefore, a magnetic sensor 29a and a vibration sensor 29c are embedded in the winning space forming unit 214, which is directly below the winning space 220, and monitors gaming fraud.

[Distribution timing]
13A and 13B are perspective views of the winning space 220 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13A is a view when the sorting rotator 321 is in a 0-degree rotation state, and FIG. It is a figure in case the body 321 exists in a 180 degree | times rotation state.

  A game ball that has won the upper prize winning opening 28b rolls on the ball rolling path 221 and the rolling direction is changed from the left to the back by the R-shaped inflow guide 222, and the distribution unit (allocation area) ) Come to 223. The winning ball that has faced the sorting unit 223 rolls in the sorting corridor 223a and rolls to a region where the sorting rotator 321 is located. Here, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the sorting rotator 321 is in the 0-degree rotation state, the game ball is located in the specific area 225 because the recess 329 is located facing the specific area 225. Can flow into.

  On the other hand, when the recess 329 is not directly above the specific area 225, the specific area 225 is blocked by the sorting rotator 321 as shown in FIG. It becomes. Even if the game ball rolls in the sorting corridor 223a, it abuts against the sorting rotator 321 and is flipped forward and rolls on the left sorting slope 223b to flow into the left normal area 224a or to the right sorting. It rolls on the slope 223c and flows into the right normal region 224b.

  As described above, the sorting rotator 321 rotates in front of the first display 31 according to the progress of the game and performs an effect such as light emission. This corresponds to a sorting member (guidance member) having a mechanical sorting function (guidance for changing the flow-down direction of the game ball) that determines whether or not the game ball can flow into 225. In addition, the recessed part 329 may be formed with the width | variety wider than the width | variety shown in a figure, and two or more may be provided.

[Shooting mechanism]
Next, the photographing mechanism of the up variation winning unit 245 will be described with reference to FIG. 14A and 14B are perspective views of the area partitioning member 242 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which FIG. 14A is a perspective view of the area partitioning member 242 viewed from the back surface, and FIG. 14B is a front view of the area partitioning member 242. It is the perspective view seen from the bottom.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the area partition member 242 that is the canopy of the winning space 220 includes a housing portion 242a, and the LED substrate 247, the left camera module 248a, and the right camera module 248b are placed in the housing portion 242a in the directions of the arrows. To house.

  The LED substrate 247 includes space illumination LEDs 247a and 247b. The left camera module 248a has a left camera lens unit 249a, and the right camera module 248b has a right camera lens unit 249b.

  In addition, the area partition member 242 is formed with a slit 242b on the lower surface of the housing portion 242a to expose the left camera lens portion 249a, the right camera lens portion 249b, and the space illumination LEDs 247a and 247b. Since the slit 242b has a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has flowed into the winning space 220 with respect to the left camera lens unit 249a, the right camera lens unit 249b, and the space illumination LEDs 247a and 247b facing the inside of the slit 242b. There is no collision.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the space illumination LEDs 247a and 247b illuminate the winning space 220 from above, the left camera module 248a images the winning space 220 from the upper left side, and the right camera module 248b receives the winning space 220. From above.

  The camera module 248 (the left camera module 248a and the right camera module 248b) shoots the distribution unit (distribution region) as a moving image around the periphery of the distribution unit (distribution region) 223 illuminated by the illumination. Each of the camera module 248a and the right camera module 248b captures the periphery of the distribution unit (distribution area) 223 from different angles.

  Note that the camera module 248 may always shoot, or the game ball may shoot only for a predetermined period after passing through the count sensor 216. Further, one camera module may always shoot and the other camera module may shoot only for a predetermined period after the game ball passes the count sensor 216. The captured video is stored in association with an event such as a winning ball flowing into the specific area 225, an fraud detection sensor is activated, etc., and can be played back on the first display 31, the second display 34, etc. The data can be output to a storage medium owned by the player via an interface (not shown).

  A game ball winning in the specific area 225 (so-called V winning) is not an event that can be easily achieved, so that the player can play the V winning scene and confirm it (so-called playback). Can be improved. Further, by associating signal detection of the magnetic sensor 29a, the vibration sensor 29c, and the like with the storage of the moving image, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of fraud as a moving image from the game board 20 side. In particular, it may be difficult to check the player's hand in detail only with the security camera provided in the game hall, but if the video is taken centering on the winning space 220, the player's hand is detailed. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, a camera that captures the area around the ball rolling path 221 may be provided separately, and by capturing each area from a different angle with a plurality of cameras, it is possible to save a realistic video in each scene up to the V prize. Can do.

[Example of action of an accessory]
Next, an operation example of the movable accessory will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the accessory according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is a front view of a game effect component, and (B) is an effect movable member and a distribution rotator. It is a front view of the state which united.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the effect movable unit 310 can rotate within the range of the arrow A1, and the distribution movable unit 320 can rotate within the range of the arrow A2. The sub display unit 340 can be moved up and down in the range of the arrow A3. The sub display unit 340 is disposed at a different depth from the effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320, and does not hinder the rotation / lifting operation.

  Further, the sorting rotator 321 rotates clockwise. The effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 are both rotated to the maximum rotation position, and the left half of the distribution rotating body 321 is accommodated in the arc-shaped recess 313 formed on the right side of the effect movable member 311. Both of them constitute a decorative member with a sense of unity, and an interesting decoration effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the light emitting unit 312 of the effect movable member 311 and the light transmitting part 328 of the sorting rotator can execute the light emitting effect. For example, the light emitting unit 312 repeats light emission (lighting) and light extinction alternately with the light emitting units 312 adjacent to each other, or all light emission (lighting). The same applies to the light transmitting portion 328. The emission color is not limited to one color.

[Progress display section]
Next, the progress display unit 230 disposed in the center frame unit 210 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the progress display unit 230 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is an enlarged front view of the game effect component 21 with the progress display unit 230 as the center, and (B). These are the transition diagrams which show the light emission pattern of 4th design LED231,233.

  The progress display section 230 includes, in order from the top, a special figure 1 4th pattern (progress display) LED 231, a special figure 1 storage display LED 232, a special figure 2 4th pattern (progress display) LED 233, a special figure 2 storage display LED 234, A figure (progress display) LED 235 and a universal memory display LED 236 are provided.

  Among them, special figure 1 4 symbol LED 231 and special figure 2 4 symbol LED 233 notify the result of the variable display game together with the stop mode of the special symbol (identification information) displayed on the main display screen 32. There are four types of light emission patterns. While the special symbol stop mode alone prevents the player from knowing whether it is a small hit or a big hit, the special symbol stop mode and the light emission patterns of the fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233 allow the small hit / big hit. In order to notify the player of the other, fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233 are provided.

  The general map LED 235 notifies the result of the general map fluctuation display game by a light emission pattern.

  The special figure 1 memory display LED 232, the special figure 2 memory display LED 234, and the universal figure memory display LED 236 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the number of stored start memories.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, four patterns are set for the light emission patterns of the fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233. The light emission pattern of the special pattern 1 fourth design LED 231 and the light emission pattern of the special figure 2 fourth design LED 233 are the same.

  For example, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of the way, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED 231 is turned off.

  If the numbers of special symbols are uneven, for example “1, 3, 5”, and the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special symbol 1 4 symbol LED 231 emits pink. To do.

  When the numbers of special symbols are aligned, for example, “7, 7, 7”, and the result of the special-figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the special-figure 1 fourth design LED 231 emits pink light.

  Regardless of the stop mode of the special symbol, when the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is a big hit (for example, a normal big hit), the special symbol first symbol LED 231 emits orange light.

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (for example, a special big hit) regardless of the stop mode of the special symbol, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED 231 emits brown light.

  The fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233 change so as to repeat light emission (lighting) and light extinction over the execution period of the variable display game, and the fluctuation ends (light emission or light extinction) with the end of the variable display game. Thus, it may have only a function that suggests the progress of the variable display game.

  Thus, since the progress display unit 230 is an important region for notifying the progress of the game, it is necessary to ensure visibility for the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, no decoration LED (light emitting member, light source) is disposed in the space between the first display 31 and the progress display unit 230 (particularly, the fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233). Therefore, the visibility of the variation, stop, and emission color of the fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233 to the player is ensured.

  In addition, when arrange | positioning decoration LED in the space between the 1st indicator 31 and the progress display part 230, the light emission aspect of decoration LED and 4th design LED231,233 is varied. Specifically, the visibility of the fourth symbol LEDs 231 and 233 is ensured by making the emission color, luminance, and diffusion pattern of the lenses different.

[Light guide plate unit]
Next, the light guide plate unit 250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit 250 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The light guide plate unit 250 is attached to the center frame unit 210 from the rear to form a boundary surface between the front structure 200 and the back structure 300, and guides light from the outer peripheral ends of the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252. The reflected light is reflected forward in a predetermined light emitting area (light emitting pattern).

  The light guide plate unit 250 includes a plurality of light guide plates including a front light guide plate 251 and a rear light guide plate 252. The front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 are supported by a spacer member 253 that is a support frame so that the light guide plates do not adhere to each other.

  Further, the front LED substrate 254 is attached to the front side of the spacer member 253 so as to follow the outer periphery of the front light guide plate 251. Similarly, the rear LED substrate 255 is attached to the back side of the spacer member 253 along the outer periphery of the rear light guide plate 252.

  18A and 18B are cross-sectional perspective views of the light guide plate unit 250 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional perspective view of the light guide plate unit 250, and FIG. 18B is a circular broken line in FIG. FIG. 4C is an enlarged cross-sectional perspective view of the encircled portion, and FIG.

  The front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 may be formed of, for example, acrylic as a main material, and may be partially or wholly colored to such an extent that the transparency is not greatly reduced.

  On the outer periphery of the front light guide plate 251, front LED substrates 254 on which the LEDs 256 and 257 are mounted are arranged on both surfaces, and the front LED substrate 254 is attached to the spacer member 253 so as to surround the outer periphery of the front light guide plate 251. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C, a plurality of LEDs 257 are provided on the back surface of the front LED board 254 at substantially equal intervals, and the heads of the LEDs 257 abut against the spacer member 253. Or close. The LED 257 is a front light guide plate LED for irradiating light inside the front light guide plate 251 so as to face the end surface of the front light guide plate 251.

  On the front surface of the front LED board 254, a plurality of LEDs 256 having an irradiation surface facing forward are disposed at substantially equal intervals in order to irradiate the armor portion 211a with light. The LED 256 is an armor portion LED for illuminating the armor portion 211a.

  On the outer periphery of the rear light guide plate 252, a rear LED substrate 255 for mounting the LED 258 is disposed on the front surface, and the rear LED substrate 255 is attached to the spacer member 253 so as to surround the outer periphery of the rear light guide plate 252. The heads of the LEDs 258, which are arranged in a plurality at substantially equal intervals on the rear LED substrate 255, come into contact with or close to the spacer member 253. The LED 258 is a rear light guide plate LED that irradiates light inside the rear light guide plate 252 while facing the end surface of the rear light guide plate 252.

  LED 256 is disposed with the irradiation surface facing forward, whereas LED 257 and LED 258 are disposed with the irradiation surface facing the end surface of the light guide plate (downward in FIG. 18C). The

  As described above, since the LEDs 256 and 257 are mounted on both sides of the front LED board 254, the number of boards and the number of components can be reduced. Moreover, since the board | substrate itself of the front side LED board 254 functions as a light-shielding member, it can control that the irradiation light from LED of one side affects the irradiation object of the other side.

  As described above, the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 diffuse and reflect the light guided from the outer peripheral end portion forward in a light emission region (light emission pattern) to be described later. Appears to emit light.

  The stage effect can be enhanced by causing only the front light guide plate 251 or the rear light guide plate 252 to emit light arbitrarily. However, when the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 come into contact with each other, incident light from the end portion is applied. The light enters the other light guide plate through the contact point, and the light guide plate that does not emit light emits light. Therefore, a gap 259 is provided between the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 by the spacer member 253 so that the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 do not contact each other. In addition, the spacer member 253 has a function of shielding the light from one LED 257, 258 so that the other light guide plate is not irradiated.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing light emitting regions (light emitting patterns) of the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 19A is a light emitting region (light emission) of the front light guide plate 251. (B) is a figure which shows the light emission area | region (light emission pattern) of the rear side light-guide plate 252. FIG.

  The front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 can be divided into a light emitting region and a non-light emitting region, respectively. The light emitting region is formed, for example, on the back surfaces of the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 by laser uneven processing or a printed film.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, for example, a radial light emitting region 251a (radial region) is formed on the front light guide plate 251, and when the light emitting region 251a emits light, a circular non-light emitting region 251b and a radial non light emitting region are formed. 251b can be visually recognized by contrast with the light emitting region 251a. The front light guide plate 251 uses the entire region of the light guide plate as a light emitting region, and provides a light emitting effect with an impact on the player.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the rear light guide plate 252 includes, for example, a light emitting region (character region) 252a in which characters “CHANCE” and “Gekiatsu” emerge, and a light emitting region (pattern in which a pattern emerges). Regions) 252b and 252c are formed. Among these, for example, the “CHANCE” portion and the “extremely hot” portion of the light emitting region 252a are different in the formation direction of the reflection surface, and the incident direction of the light guided from the end portion is incident on only one side portion. By controlling in this way, only the “CHANCE” portion or the “super hot” portion can be made to emit light.

  The light emitting areas 252b and 252c where the pattern emerges are the light emitting area 252b as an object area formed so as to be paired with the effect movable member 311 in the maximum rotation position, and the effect movable member 311 in the maximum rotation position. A light emitting region 252c is included as a pattern region formed in accordance with the light emitting unit 312. Similarly to the character region 252a, the pattern regions 252b and 252c can arbitrarily emit light in both regions and one of the regions.

  The rear light guide plate 252 uses a specific area as a light emitting area, and emits a character or a fine pattern in the specific area to provide a message or a detailed light emitting effect to the player. In particular, since the light emitting area 252a of the rear light guide plate 252 overlaps with the non-light emitting area 251b of the front light guide plate 251, it is possible to provide a player with a three-dimensional light emission effect that is interesting and impactful.

  As described above, each of the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 has a purpose of light emission effect, and only the front light guide plate 251 or the rear light guide plate 252 according to the purpose emits light so that a plurality of light emission patterns can be obtained. Can be provided. The effect pattern including the light emission pattern of the light guide plate unit 250 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 71.

[Director]
Next, the winning device 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the winning device 280 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the right winning effect unit 282 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The winning device 280 is provided with a special figure 1 start winning opening 23, a special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, and a movable member 24a on the front surface of the base member 281. A front decoration member 289 is provided on the front surface of the movable member 24a.

  On the back surface of the base member 281, there are provided a winning ball passage 23 e through which a game ball won in the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 passes, a general electric solenoid 24 b for supplying driving force to the movable member 24 a, and the like.

  In addition, a pair of winning effect units 282 are provided on both the left and right sides of the winning device 280. Since the left winning effect unit 282 and the right winning effect unit 282 have the same configuration, the right winning effect unit will be described here.

  The winning effect unit 282 includes a protrusion 283 provided on the front surface of the base member 281 and a rear protrusion 288 provided on the back surface of the base member 281. A single winning effect unit 282 may be provided instead of a plurality.

  The projecting portion 283 has an outer shape formed by the surrounding wall portion 285, and an effect member (character member) 287 is disposed in a movable space (effect moving portion) 286 surrounded by the surrounding wall portion 285. The upper side wall of the surrounding wall portion 285 is formed as a guide shelf portion 284.

  The guide shelf 284 has an upper surface inclined downward toward the second start winning area (special drawing 2 start winning opening) 24, and moves the game ball rolling on the guide shelf 284 in the direction of the second start winning area 24. Can be guided to.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the winning effect unit 282 includes an effect member 287 on the front surface of the base member 281, that is, the protruding portion 283, and supplies driving force to the effect member 287 on the back surface of the base member 281, that is, the rearward protruding portion 288. The drive mechanism 290 to provide is provided.

  The projecting portion 283 of the winning effect unit 282 has a movable space 286 that houses the effect member 287, and the rear projecting portion 288 of the winning effect unit 282 has a housing space 288 a that houses the drive mechanism 290. . The movable space 286 and the accommodation space 288a communicate with each other.

  The drive mechanism 290 includes a motor 291, a pulley 292, an endless belt 293, and a support shaft portion 294, and the pulley 292 is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 291. The endless belt 293 is wound around a belt receiving portion 287 a formed below the pulley 292 and the effect member 287. The power of the motor 291 is transmitted to the effect member 287 via the endless belt 293.

  The effect member 287 is pivotally supported by the support shaft portion 294, and the endless belt 293 causes the effect member 287 to rotate left and right in small increments, for example. The effect member 287 is, for example, a movable doll (character), and operates by winning a prize, a battle effect, a jackpot notice, or the like. In addition, although the production | presentation member 287 used as a pair operate | moves with the same structure, a different structure may be sufficient.

  For example, the effect member 287 is configured such that the left effect member 287 moves when a winning occurs at the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, and the right effect member 287 moves when a winning occurs at the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24. Set and entertain the eyes of the player.

  Thus, the winning effect unit 282 operates the effect member 287 in accordance with the progress and state of the game, and improves the interest of the game.

  In addition, the effect member 287 may emit light from the inside, or may have a plurality of motion joints and execute a complex motion. Further, the effect member 287 may be accommodated in the rear protrusion 288, and may be operated to jump out to the front protrusion 283 (movable space 286) at a specific timing, like a wall clock.

[Game Flow]
Next, the game flow of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 22 is a state transition diagram illustrating a main pattern in which each gaming state transitions to another gaming state according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The gaming state according to the first embodiment of the present invention includes a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state (a normal power support state, a short time state), and a special gaming state.

  The normal gaming state is a state without general power support (non-electric support state). In the present embodiment, the normal variation display game is always won, but since the normal variation time is set to 60 seconds, the frequency with which the movable member 24a is expanded is low. Normally, the game state at the time of starting the game is the normal game state except after a power failure.

  On the other hand, the specific game state is a state with a general power support (electric support state). As in the normal gaming state, the normal figure change display game is always won, but since the normal figure change time is set to 1 second, the frequency with which the movable member 24a is expanded increases. In the specific gaming state, the special figure change time is set to a short time, so that the special figure 2 start memory is easily stored, and the special figure 2 start memory is quickly digested.

  Further, the special game state is a state advantageous to the player. In the special gaming state, a state where a big hit occurs and the lower big prize opening 27b is opened at a predetermined timing (big hit state), and a small hit occurs and the upper big prize opening 28b is opened at a predetermined timing (Small hit state) is included.

  The big hit state occurs when the value of the big hit random number extracted when winning at the start winning opening is the big hit value and the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the first special result mode (big hit result mode). . The big hit state constitutes a first special game state in which the lower fluctuation winning device 27 is converted into an open state over a plurality of rounds, and the player can acquire a large number of prize balls. The jackpot state includes a special jackpot that transitions to a specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and a normal jackpot that transitions to the normal gaming state after the termination of the special gaming state. The type of jackpot state is set according to the jackpot symbol (the type of the first special result mode) determined by the value of the jackpot symbol random number.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special figure variation display game is set to 1/200 in the normal game state and the specific game state, and is the same probability.

  The small hit state is when the value of the big hit random number extracted when winning the start winning opening is the small hit value and the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the second special result mode (small hit result mode). Occurs. The small hit state constitutes a second special game state in which the movable member (movable wing piece) 28a is opened for a predetermined time, and a state transition for generating (shifting to) the big hit state (first special game state) It becomes a game.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, a small hit state is established with a probability of 195/200, and the movable member 28a is opened. If a game ball wins at the special figure 1 start winning slot 23, the probability of a small hit state is set to 0/200, and the game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning slot 23. However, the movable member 28a is not opened. Note that even if a game ball has won the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, a small hit state may be generated.

  Next, the game state transition will be described. First, from the normal gaming state, a special big hit in FIG. 1 or a special big hit in FIG. Here, the big hit in Special Figure 1 is a special big hit at a ratio of 1/2 (50%), and the big hit in Special Figure 2 is a special big hit at a ratio of 3/4 (75%).

  In the normal gaming state, the player generally makes a left strike, and the route from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state is mostly the route from the special jackpot in FIG. As a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed according to the hold of the special figure 2 start memory when the specific game state ends. It is done.

  The probability of a special big hit in the special figure 1 is set to 50%. That is, the special jackpot probability of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state is 1/400. In the case of a normal big hit, after the big hit state ends, the normal gaming state is resumed.

  The specific gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state when a variable display game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times). In addition, when a normal big hit is made during the specific gaming state, the game shifts to the normal gaming state after the big hit state ends even if the prescribed number of variable display games have not been consumed.

  In the specific gaming state, since the ordinary electric power support is executed, the player hits the right with the aim of the usual figure starting gate 25 and the movable member 28a. As described above, since the movable member 24a is frequently expanded by the ordinary power support and the game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, the special figure 2 start memory is stored in a predetermined number (for example, at the start of the variable display game). When there are two or more), the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened (the variation time is shorter than when the second start memory is one). Further, since the variable display game is a small hit with a probability of 195/200, the movable member 28a is frequently released.

  When the game ball wins the upper large winning opening 28b at the timing when the movable member 28a is released, the winning ball is distributed to the normal area 224 and the specific area 225 in the distribution unit 223 in the winning space 220 (see FIG. 12). When the winning ball passes through the specific area 225 via the recess 329 of the sorting rotator 321, a V winning is won and then a big hit state is reached.

  The probability of a special big hit in the special figure 2 or a big win in the V prize is set to 75%. For this reason, once the player enters the specific gaming state, a chance of winning a big win in the V prize is also obtained, and the ratio of continuously entering the specific gaming state is high.

[Game control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the game control device 100 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 23 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls games in the gaming machine 1. A power supply device 450, a payout control device 410, and an effect control device 150 are connected to the game control device 100. The game control device 100 transmits a control signal (command) to the payout control device 410 and the effect control device 150 to instruct execution of various processes. Furthermore, the game control device 100 is connected to various switches and solenoids to be controlled.

  The game control device 100 includes a CPU unit 110 that performs various arithmetic processes, an input unit 120 that receives input of various signals, and an output unit 130 that outputs various signals and control signals. The CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other by a data bus 140.

  The input unit 120 receives signals output from various switches provided on the game board 20 and the like and signals output from the payout control device 410. The input unit 120 includes a proximity interface (I / F) 121 and input ports 122 and 123.

  The input ports 122 and 123 receive a signal input via the proximity I / F 121 or directly receive a signal input from the outside. Information input to the input ports 122 and 123 is provided to the CPU unit 110 and the like via the data bus 140.

  The proximity I / F 121 is an interface that receives signals output from various switches, converts the input signals, and outputs the converted signals to the input port 122. The proximity I / F 121 includes a special figure 1 winning port switch (starting port 1 switch) 23d, a special figure 2 winning port switch (starting port 2 switch) 24d, a gate switch 25a, winning port switches 26a and 26b, and a lower count switch 27d. And the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) is connected. In addition, a specific area switch 225a and normal area switches 224c and 224d are connected to the proximity I / F 121.

  The start port 1 switch 23d is a switch for detecting that a game ball has won a special figure 1 start winning port 23. The start port 2 switch 24d is a switch for detecting that a game ball has won the special figure 2 start winning port 24. The gate switch 25a is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the usual start gate 25. The winning port switch 26a is a switch for detecting that a game ball has won the general winning port 26 on the left side of the gaming area, and the winning port switch 26b has won the general winning port 26 (other holes) on the right side of the gaming area. The detection switch.

  The lower count switch 27d is a switch that detects that the game ball has won the lower major prize opening 27b, and the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) detects that the game ball has won the upper major prize opening 28b. It is a switch to do. When a winning game ball is detected by the lower count switch 27d and the upper count switch 28d, the number of winning game balls is counted, and the counted number of gaming balls is stored in a memory provided in the gaming control device 100. The Further, when the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) detects a winning ball, a remaining ball exists in the winning space 220. Therefore, a timer is activated for a predetermined period, and the specific area switch 225a is awarded while the timer is operating. Do not report detection as illegal.

  The specific area switch 225a detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 225 provided in the sorting unit 223. The left normal area switch 224c detects that a game ball has passed through the left normal area 224a. Similarly, the right normal area switch 224d detects that a game ball has passed through the right normal area 224b.

  The proximity I / F 121 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 12 V and a low level of 5 V supplied from various switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0 V-5 V. Since the proximity I / F 121 is normally within a predetermined range (5V-12V), the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state and output an abnormality detection signal.

  In addition, since the output value (ON / OFF) of the signal input to the proximity I / F 121 is switched by attaching / detaching the connector of the switch connected to the proximity I / F 121, the proximity I / F 121 is not connected to the switch. Even so, the output is kept constant.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal 1 of the radio wave sensor 29b and the abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the input port 123. A detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor 29 a provided on the front frame 4 of the gaming machine 1 or the like is also input to the input port 122.

  The magnetic sensor 29a detects a magnetic force in order to detect an illegal act of manipulating the trajectory of the launched game ball with a magnet. The radio wave sensor 29b detects the radio wave irradiated toward the gaming machine 1 in order to detect an illegal act that causes the winning prize switch 26a, 26b to malfunction. Note that a vibration sensor that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the input port 122.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the input port 122 is supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 193. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 23d and the start port 2 switch 24d among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the input port 122. ing. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 detects that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 23d and the start port 2 switch 24d, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 23d and the start port 2 switch 24d to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 450 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  A signal from the magnetic sensor 29a is directly input to the input port 122, and signals from the front frame opening detection switch (SW) 4e and the glass frame opening detection switch (SW) 5d are directly input to the input port 123. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the payout control device 410 is also input to the input port 123.

  The front frame opening detection SW 4e detects that the front frame 4 is opened. The front frame opening detection SW 4 e is set to ON when the front frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and is set to OFF when the front frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

  The glass frame open detection SW 5d detects that the glass frame 5 has been opened. The glass frame opening detection SW 5 d is set to ON when the glass frame 5 is released from the front frame 4, and is set to OFF when the glass frame 5 is closed to the front frame 4.

  The data held in the input port 123 can be read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. The same applies to the input ports 122 and 123.

  The CPU unit 110 of the game control device 100 includes a game microcomputer 111, an inverting circuit 112, and a crystal oscillator 113.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU 111a, a ROM 111b, a RAM 111c, and an individual ID register 111d, and executes various programs such as a big win lottery by executing a program stored in the ROM 111b based on a signal input through the input unit 120. Execute the process. Through the output unit 130, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51, a second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52, and a special figure 1 hold display. Part 53, special figure 2 hold display part 54, universal figure display part (general figure display) 55, universal figure reservation display part 56, game state display part 57, open pattern (number of rounds) display part 58 at the time of big hit and launch A collective display device 50 composed of a special figure / general-use LED board or the like provided with a mode instruction display unit 59, a general electric solenoid 24b, a lower prize winning solenoid 27c, an upper prize winning solenoid 28c, an effect control device 150, And a control signal is transmitted to the payout control apparatus 410, and the gaming machine 1 is comprehensively controlled. The gaming microcomputer 111 selects a port for inputting or outputting a signal by chip select.

  The ROM 111b is a non-volatile storage medium and stores programs, data, and the like for game control.

  The RAM 111c is a volatile storage medium and is used as a work area for temporarily storing information (for example, random number values) necessary for game control.

  The inverting circuit 112 inverts the logical value of the signal (the signal from the start port 1 switch 23d and the start port 2 switch 24d) input via the proximity I / F 121 and outputs the inverted value to the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The crystal oscillator 113 is configured as an operating clock source of a hard random number for performing timer interrupt, system clock signal, jackpot lottery and the like.

  The output unit 130 of the game control apparatus 100 includes ports 131a to 131e, buffers 132a and 132b, drivers 133a to 133d, and a photocoupler 134.

  The ports 131a to 131e receive signals input via the data bus 140.

  The buffers 132a and 132b temporarily hold signals input via the data bus 140 and the ports 131a and 131b.

  The drivers 133a to 133d generate various drive signals from the signals input via the ports 131c to 131e and output them to each device.

  The photocoupler 134 is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 195, and removes noise from various input / output signals and shapes the waveforms of the various signals. Information is transmitted and received between the photocoupler 134 and the inspection device 195 by serial communication.

  Information output from the CPU unit 110 by parallel communication is transmitted to the payout control device 410 via the port 131a. Specifically, a 4-bit data signal and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating the validity / invalidity of the data are output. Since there is no need to secure one-way communication for the payout control device 410, a control signal is directly transmitted from the port 131a to the payout control board of the payout control device 410.

  Further, the payout control device 410 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control device 420. The launch control device 420 can drive the launch device and launch a game ball into the game area 22 only when a launch permission signal is input.

  The payout control device 410 discharges the winning ball from the payout unit (not shown) based on the prize ball command signal from the game control device 100, or the payout unit based on the lending request signal from the card unit (not shown). Or renting a ball. As described above, the payout control device 410 outputs a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball shortage switch signal, and an overflow switch signal to the game control device 100 when a failure such as a broken ball or a failure occurs.

  The payout abnormality status signal is a signal output when the game ball is not paid out normally. The payout chute ball switch signal is a signal that is output when there is a shortage of game balls before payout. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (see FIG. 1). Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 150 by parallel communication.

  Subcommands are input to the effect control device 150 via the buffer 132 a of the output unit 130. By having the buffer 132a, it is possible to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 150, thereby ensuring one-way communication. The subcommands transmitted to the effect control device 150 include effect control command signals such as a change start command, a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, and an error designation command.

  A signal output from the CPU unit 110 is input to the lower large winning port solenoid 27c, the upper large winning port solenoid 28c, and the general electric solenoid 24b via the port 131b and the driver 133a. The lower large prize opening solenoid 27c opens and closes the opening plate (not shown) of the lower fluctuation winning apparatus 27 by back and forth movement, and the upper large prize opening solenoid 28c rotates the movable member 28a (see FIG. 11) of the upper fluctuation winning apparatus 28. Then, the ordinary electric solenoid 24b (see FIG. 20) converts the movable member 24a to the open state so that the winning of the game ball into the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is allowed.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure / common figure LED substrate and a case member for accommodating the special figure / general figure LED substrate. The anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 133b via a segment line, and the driver 133b and the port 131c are connected. The cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected to the driver 133c via a digit line, and the driver 133c and the port 131d are connected. The on / off drive signal from the driver 133b is input to the anode terminal of the LEDs of the collective display device 50, and the on / off drive signal is output from the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 to the driver 133c.

  The external information terminal 194 is provided with a pho street, and is a terminal for outputting game data such as a start signal indicating the start of the variable display game and a special signal indicating the occurrence of the big hit gaming state to the information collecting terminal device. The game data is output to the external information terminal 194 via the port 131e and the driver 133d.

  The game control device 100 is configured to be connectable to an external test test device via a relay board 193. The test firing test apparatus is an apparatus for performing a type test of the gaming machine 1 in a predetermined engine. The test firing test apparatus includes a start port 1 switch 23d, a start port 2 switch 24d, a gate switch 25a, winning port switches 26a to 26n, a lower count switch 27d, and an upper count switch 28d, and a lower large winning port solenoid 27c. Signals necessary for the trial test, such as signals output to the upper prize winning solenoid 28c and the general electric solenoid 24b, are input.

  The game control device 100 is connected to the power supply device 450 via a Schmitt circuit 124 provided in the input unit 120. The Schmitt circuit 124 is a circuit that removes fluctuation (noise) of the input signal in order to prevent the operation of the gaming machine 1 from becoming unstable when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The Schmitt circuit 124 receives a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 450.

  The power supply device 450 includes a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the DC32V voltage. 460, a backup power supply unit 465 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generation unit 480 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal.

  The backup power supply unit 465 is a power supply for backing up game data stored in the RAM 111 c of the game microcomputer 111. The game control device 100 restores the gaming state before the power failure based on the game data held in the RAM 111c after the power failure is restored.

  The control signal generator 480 monitors the input voltage (guaranteed DC 32V) of the switching regulator that generates DC 12V and DC 5V. When the detected voltage is DC17.2V to DC19V, it is determined that there is a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal is output from the control signal generator 480. The power failure monitoring signal is input to the input port 123 of the input unit 120 via the Schmitt circuit 124. After the power failure monitoring signal is output, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a reset signal. The reset signal is input to each port 131a to 131e of the gaming microcomputer 111 and the output unit 130 via the Schmitt circuit 124. When the game control device 100 receives a power failure monitoring signal, the game control device 100 performs a predetermined power failure process, and stops the operation of the CPU unit 110 after receiving a reset signal.

  The control signal generation unit 480 includes an initialization switch (not shown), and an initialization switch signal is output from the control signal generation unit 480 when the initialization switch is in an ON state when the power is turned on. The initialization switch signal is input to the input port 123 of the input unit 120 via the Schmitt circuit 124. The initialization switch signal is a signal forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM of the payout control device 410.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the input port 123, taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and treated as signals equivalent to signals from various switches. . This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt circuit 124 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130 as described above. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 193 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 193 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 193. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the input ports 122 and 123 is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

[Production control device]
FIG. 24 is a block configuration diagram showing a control system centering on the effect control device 150 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The production control device 150 shown in FIG. 24 controls the video under the control of the main control microcomputer 151 (1st CPU) 151 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 151, similarly to the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100. A video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 152 that performs the above and a VDP that performs image processing for video display on the first display 31 (including the sub display 34) in accordance with commands and data from the video control microcomputer 152 Video Display Processor) 157 and a sound source LSI 158 that reproduces various melodies and sound effects from the upper speaker 8a and the lower speaker 8b.

  PROMs (Programmable Read Only Memory) 154 and 155 storing programs executed by the CPUs are connected to the main control microcomputer 151 and the video control microcomputer 152, respectively.

  An image ROM 156 storing character images and video data is connected to the VDP 157.

  The sound source LSI 158 is connected to an audio ROM 159 that stores audio data and the like.

  The main control microcomputer 151 analyzes the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, instructs the video control microcomputer 152 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 158 about the contents of the reproduced sound. Or The main control microcomputer 151 also executes processing such as LED lighting control, various motor drive control, and production time management based on a control command from the game control device 100.

  RAMs 151 a and 152 a that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer 151 and the video control microcomputer 152 are provided in the respective chips. The RAMs 151a and 152a that provide the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Data transmission / reception is performed between the main control microcomputer 151 and the video control microcomputer 152 and between the main control microcomputer 151 and the sound source LSI 158 in a serial manner. On the other hand, data transmission / reception is performed between the main control microcomputer 151 and the VDP 157 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in the parallel system, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial system.

  The VDP 157 includes a VRAM (video RAM) 157a used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 156, a scaler 157b for enlarging and reducing images, and an LVDS. A signal conversion circuit 157c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the first display 31 by the (small amplitude signal transmission) method is provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is output from the VDP 157 to the main control microcomputer 151 in order to synchronize the image of the first display 31 and the lighting of the LEDs provided on the front frame 4 and the game board 20. In addition, the VDP 157 notifies the video control microcomputer 152 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt signals INT0-n and the video control microcomputer 152 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM 157a. A wait signal WAIT is output.

  From the video control microcomputer 152 to the main control microcomputer 151, a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 152 is operating normally and gives a command transmission timing is output.

  Between the main control microcomputer 151 and the tone generator LSI 158, an interrogation signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

  The video control microcomputer 152 uses a CPU that can perform higher-speed processing than the main control microcomputer 151. By providing the video control microcomputer 152 separately from the main control microcomputer 151 and sharing the processing, the first display 31 can display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer 151 alone. And an increase in cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where two CPUs having the same processing capability as the video control microcomputer 152 are used.

  The effect control device 150 includes an interface chip (command I / F) 153 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The production control device 150 receives the change start command, the customer waiting demonstration command, the fanfare command, the probability information command, the error designation command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 as the production control command signal via the command I / F 153. To do. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 151 of the effect control device 150 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 153 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 150 includes a panel decoration device 170 including LEDs provided on the center frame unit 210 and the game board 20, a panel decoration LED control circuit 161 for controlling the progress display unit 230, LEDs provided on the front frame 4 and the like. Frame decoration LED control circuit 162 for controlling the frame decoration device 171 including the movable accessory (the production movable unit 310, the distribution movable unit 320, the sub-display) that cooperates with the production display on the first display 31 and enhances the production effect. A frame effect motor control circuit 164 for driving and controlling a frame effect device 173 including a board effect motor / SOL (solenoid) control circuit 163 for driving and controlling the unit 340) and the board effect device 172, a protrusion drive motor for the right protrusion 19 and the like. Is provided. These control circuits (161 to 164) are connected to the main control microcomputer 151 via the address / data bus 160.

  In addition, the effect control unit 150 includes an effect operation unit SW (switch) 174 that detects that the effect operation unit 15 (see FIG. 1) has been operated, and each movable accessory is in the initial position (standby position, standby area). A switch (SW) input circuit 165 that detects position detection SWs (switches) 308, 329, and 349 that detect the presence and transmits a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 151 is provided. Further, amplifier circuits 166 and 167 including audio power amplifiers for driving the upper speaker 8a and the lower speaker 8b are provided.

  The normal power supply unit 460 of the power supply device 450 is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of voltages in order to supply a predetermined level of DC voltage to the effect control device 150 and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 150. ing. Specifically, in addition to DC 32V for driving the drive motor and solenoid, DC 12V for driving the first display 31 including a liquid crystal panel, DC 5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 153, the upper speaker 8a In addition, it is possible to generate DC 18V for driving the lower speaker 8b and NDC 24V used as a reference for these DC voltages or for lighting the power monitor lamp.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 480 of the power supply device 450 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 151, the video control microcomputer 152, the VDP 157, the tone generator LSI 158, and various control circuits (161 to 164, 166, 167). These are reset. The power supply device 450 has a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for the VDP 157 using a general-purpose port included in the video control microcomputer 152. Thereby, the cooperation of the operation | movement of the microcomputer 152 for video control and VDP157 can be improved.

  As described above, the production control device 150 functions as production control means for performing production control based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100, and performs display control for controlling display contents displayed on the first display 31. And a function as sound output control means for outputting sound effects and the like from the speaker 8.

  Next, the control by the game control device 100 will be specifically described.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 25 and 26 are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The main process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. For example, it is executed when a gaming machine is turned on to start business at a game hall or when a power failure is restored.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the game control device 100 first prohibits interruption (S2501). Next, a vector address indicating a jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs is set (S2502). Furthermore, a stack pointer is set which is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (S2503). Further, an interrupt processing mode is set (S2504).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 waits until the program of the payout control apparatus (payout board) 410 is normally started (S2505). For example, wait for 4 milliseconds. By controlling in this way, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is activated first, and the command is transmitted to the payout control device 410 before the start of the payout control device 410 is completed. It can be avoided that the command 410 is missed.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 permits access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM (S2506). Further, all output ports are set to OFF (no output) (S2507). In addition, the serial port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 111 is set not to be used (S2508). In the embodiment of the present invention, the game control device 100 performs parallel communication with the payout control device 410 and the effect control device 150, and therefore does not use a serial port.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the initialization switch signal in the power supply device 450 is set to ON (S2509). The initialization switch signal is a signal for setting whether or not to start a game in an initialized state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. For example, if the power is turned off while the store is closed, etc., and the power is turned on when the store opens the next day, the initialization switch signal is set to ON so that the game starts in the initialized state. Is done. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after a power failure, the initialization switch signal is turned off so that the game machine is not initialized in order to resume the game as close to the gaming state as possible before the power failure. Is set.

  When the initialization switch signal is set to OFF (the result of S2509 is “N”: NO), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether the data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal. (S2510 to S2513). More specifically, the power outage inspection area includes a power outage inspection area 1 and a power outage inspection area 2. The power failure inspection area 1 stores power failure inspection area check data 1, and the power failure inspection area 2 stores power failure inspection area check data 2. In the processing of S2510 and S2511, it is checked whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 1 stored in the power failure inspection area 1 is normal. Similarly, in the processing of S2512 and S2513, it is checked whether or not the power failure inspection area check data 2 stored in the power failure inspection area 2 is normal.

  When it is determined that the power failure inspection area check data in the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal (the result of S2513 is “Y”: YES), the game control apparatus 100 calculates verification data called a checksum. The checksum calculation process is executed (S2514).

  Then, the game control device 100 compares the checksum value calculated in the checksum calculation process with the checksum value calculated when the power is turned off (S2515), and determines whether these values match. Determination is made (S2516).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the initialization switch signal is set to ON (result of S2509 is “Y”), the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal (result of S2511 or S2513 is “N”). If the checksum value at power-off does not match the checksum value calculated in S2514 (the result of S2516 is “N”), the initialization processing from S2540 to S2544 in FIG. 26 is performed. Run. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  When the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value at the time of power-off (the result of S2516 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 has executed the power failure processing normally, and therefore The process for recovering to the state is executed (S2517 to S2523 in FIG. 25).

  First, the game control device 100 clears an area in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM in the embodiment) in which information for determining whether or not the information at the time of a power failure has been normally stored is stored ( initialize. Specifically, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared (S2517), and the area where the checksum is stored is cleared (S2518). Further, an area for storing error-related information and information for monitoring fraud is reset (S2519).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game state at the time of the power failure is a high probability state from the area for storing the game state in the RWM (S2520). If it is determined that the state is not the high probability state (the result of S2520 is “N”), the processing after S2523 is executed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a high probability state (the result of S2520 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 sets the high probability notification flag to ON and performs the high probability notification. Save in the flag area (S2521). Subsequently, the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display) provided in the collective display device 50 is set to ON (lighted) and saved in the segment area (S2522).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 150 (S2523). The special figure game process number is a number indicating the state of the special figure game, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM when a power failure occurs. In this way, by transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number to the effect control device 150, the game can be restarted in a state as close as possible to the time before the occurrence of the power failure.

  Here, a case where the initialization process is executed will be described. As described above, the initialization process is executed when a gaming machine that has been normally powered off is activated or when it cannot return to the state before the occurrence of a power failure.

  In the initialization process, the game control device 100 first clears all work areas before the access-prohibited area (S2540. Further, clears all stack areas after the access-prohibited area (S2541). The initial value for power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (S2542).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves an output timer initial value for outputting external information (security signal) related to RWM clear in the security signal control timer area (S2543). Then, at the end of the initialization process, a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 150 (S2544), and the processes after S2524 are executed.

  When the processing of S2523 or S2544 ends, the game control device 100 acquires the individual identification information from the individual ID register 111d in the gaming microcomputer 111 and sets it in the serial communication circuit (S2524).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (S2525).

  The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and the CTC circuit described above. The timer interrupt signal is a signal for causing the CPU 111a to generate a timer interrupt with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the divided signal. The random number update trigger signal (CTC) is supplied to the random number generation circuit based on the divided signal, and the random number generation circuit serves as a trigger for updating the random number.

  When the CTC circuit is activated, the game control device 100 performs activation setting of the random number generation circuit (S2526). Specifically, the CPU 111a executes processing such as setting a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are saved in predetermined areas of the RWM as initial values (start values) of corresponding various initial value random numbers (S2527). . Thereafter, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (S2528).

  Note that the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a of the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on, and initial values of various initial value random numbers are based on the initial value of the soft random number register. By setting a value (start value), it becomes possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to acquire illegal random numbers. The various initial value random numbers include, for example, a random number that determines a big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number), and a random number that determines a hit of a normal variation display game (per random number).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (S2529). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number generated in the random number generation circuit. That is, the jackpot random number is a hardware random number generated by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the random number per universal symbol, and the variation pattern random number are software random numbers generated by software. Note that the source of various random numbers is not limited to the above-described mode, and the big hit random number may be a software random number, or the big hit symbol random number, the universal random number, and the variation pattern random number are hardware random numbers. Also good.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 450 and read through the port and the data bus (S2530). Normally, a value of 2 or more is set as the number of checks. It is possible to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred by checking the power failure monitoring signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (S2531). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on, that is, when there is no power failure (result of S2531 is “N”), the initial value random number update processing of S2529 is executed again, and the processing from S2529 to S2531 is repeatedly executed ( Loop processing).

  In addition, by permitting an interrupt (S2528) before the initial value random number update process (S2529), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process can be preferentially executed. Become. Accordingly, since the timer interrupt process cannot be executed until the execution of the initial value random number update process is completed, it is possible to avoid a shortage of time for executing various processes included in the interrupt process.

  In the initial value random number update process (S2529), the initial value random number update process may be executed by a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. However, when the initial value random number update process is executed in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt is issued during the initial value random number update process in the main process in order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process in both processes. It is prohibited to release the interrupt after updating the initial random number. However, if the initial value random number update process is not executed in the timer interrupt process and the initial value random number update process is executed only in the main process as in this embodiment, the interrupt can be canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is no problem, and there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON (the result of S2531 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 has detected the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal has been continuously detected to be ON. It is determined whether or not the number of checks set in the processing of S2530 has been reached (S2532). When the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON is not reached the number of checks (the result of S2532 is “N”), whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON again. Is determined (S2531). That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks.

  When the number of times that the power failure monitoring signal has been set to ON has reached the number of checks (result of S2532 is “Y”), the game control device 100 regards that a power failure has occurred. Then, the process when a power failure occurs is executed (S2533 to S2539).

  In the process when a power failure occurs, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (S2533) and sets all output ports to off (S2534). Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (S2535), and further, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (S2536).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off (S2537), and saves the calculated checksum value in the checksum area of the RWM (S2538). Finally, access to the RWM is prohibited so that the contents of the RWM are not changed (S2539), and the system waits until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In this way, by saving check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating and storing the checksum at the time of power-off, the information stored in the RWM before power-off is correctly backed up. It is possible to determine when the power is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing (game control device)]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic (for example, 1 millisecond) timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the register by moving the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (S2701). In this embodiment, a Z80 microcomputer is used as the game microcomputer. The Z80 microcomputer is provided with a front register and a back register, and the processing in S2701 can be implemented by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes an input process of acquiring input signals from various sensors and switches input via the input unit 120 and reading the state of each input port (S2702). The various sensors include a start port 1 switch 23d, a start port 2 switch 24d, a gate switch 25a, count switches 27d and 28d (count sensor 216), and the like. In the input process, the input information is confirmed by performing chattering removal or the like on the input signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes output processing for transmitting output data related to game control set in various processes to the effect control device 150 and the payout control device 410 (S2703). The output data is information for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid, and the solenoids to be controlled include, for example, big prize opening solenoids (SOL) 27c and 28c, and a general electric solenoid (SOL) 24b. It is. The output process also includes a process of outputting game data to an information collection terminal device (not shown) that collects various game data of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes command transmission processing for transmitting (outputting) the command set in the transmission buffer 132 in various processes to the payout control device 410, the effect control device 150, etc. (S2704).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes random number update processing 1 for updating the jackpot symbol random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2 (S2705), and updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game. The random number update process 2 is executed (S2706). In random number update processing 1 and random number update processing 2, in order to give randomness to various random numbers, the value of a counter corresponding to various random numbers (such as a big hit random number counter, a random number counter per ordinary figure, an effect determination random number counter, etc.) is 1 Add one by one.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a winning opening switch / error monitoring process for monitoring various winning opening switches and the like, and monitoring errors such as unauthorized opening of a frame (S2707). The various winning opening switches include, for example, a starting opening 1 switch 23d, a starting opening 2 switch 24d, a gate switch 25a, winning opening switches 26a and 26b, and count switches 27d and 28d. In the prize opening switch / error monitoring process, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from these switches. As an error monitoring, the front frame 3 and the glass frame 5 are targeted for unauthorized opening.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game (S2708). Details of the special game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a general map change display game process for performing a process related to the general map change display game (S2709).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process for controlling the display contents of the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation game and various information related to the game (S2710). Specifically, the parameters for outputting the results of the special map variation display game and the general map variation display game to the segment LED (for example, the collective display device 50) are edited.

  Next, the game control device 100 checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 29a, and executes a magnet fraud monitoring process for determining whether there is an abnormality (S2711). When the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, a notification sound is output from the speaker 8 or a gaming state LED (not shown) is turned on to notify the outside. Subsequently, similarly, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 29c is checked, and a magnet error monitoring process for determining whether there is an abnormality is executed (S2712).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for editing various signals output from the external information terminal 194 (S2713), clears the interrupt request, and declares the end of the interrupt (S2714).

  Finally, the game control apparatus 100 restores the register temporarily saved in the process of S2701 (S2715), permits the interrupt and timer interrupt by the prohibited external device (S2716), and ends this process. . After this process is completed, the process returns to the main process.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special game process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the special figure game process, the game control device 100 monitors the input signal by the start port 1 switch 23d and the start port 2 switch 24d, controls the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and displays the special figure (identification pattern, identification information). This is a process for setting display.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is a game ball winning in the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 and the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 (S2801). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a signal is input from a monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 23d) among the start port 1 switch 23d and the start port 2 switch 24d. If no signal is input from the monitoring target start port switch (the result of S2801 is “N”), a branch process (S2810) described later is executed without executing the processes of S2802 to S2809.

  When a signal is input from the start switch to be monitored (the result of S2801 is “Y”), the game control device 100 checks the target special figure holding number and is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4). It is determined whether or not there is (S2802, S2803).

  If the target special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (the result of S2803 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the target special figure hold number (for example, the special figure 1 hold number) by one. (S2804).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 transmits a special figure hold number command (S2805). Specifically, a special figure hold number command (MODE) for the start port switch to be monitored is prepared, and a special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared. Then, a command setting process for setting the prepared special figure hold number command is executed.

  On the other hand, when the target special figure hold number exceeds the upper limit (the result of S2803 is “N”), the game control device 100 transmits an overflow command (S2806).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves various random numbers in the respective random number saving areas in the storage areas corresponding to the special figure holding number (S2807). The random numbers to be saved are, for example, jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. The big hit random number is a random number related to determining whether the result of the variable display game is a big hit, a small hit or a loss, and is generated in common regardless of whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is used. The jackpot symbol random number (the jackpot symbol random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2) is a random number related to the determination of the stop state of the identification information, the opening time of the big prize opening in the jackpot state, and the number of rounds. The variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are random numbers for determining a variation pattern including the execution time of a variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a pending storage prior determination process (S2808), and transmits a prior determination command (S2809). The on-hold storage prior determination process is a process in which the newly stored jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, and variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are newly determined before the variation display game is started. Specifically, before executing the variation display game, the variation pattern and result of the variation display game are determined. By executing such a hold storage advance determination process and transmitting a prior determination command indicating the result to the effect control device 150, a prefetch advance notice can be executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a branch process according to the game process number based on the special figure game sequence branch table (S2811 to S2813).

  When the game process number is “1”, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure changing process (S2811). The special figure variation process is a process for controlling the execution (progress) of the variation display game by determining a big hit, determining a small hit, setting a variation pattern, and the like. Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game process number is “2”, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit process (S2812). The small hit process is a process for controlling execution (progress) of the small hit state. Details of the small hit process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31.

  When the game process number is “3”, the game control apparatus 100 executes a big hit process (S2813). The big hit process is a process for controlling execution (progress) of the big hit state. Details of the big hit process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

  After executing the branch destination process, the game control device 100 ends this process.

[Special map processing]
Next, the special figure variation process in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure variation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The special figure fluctuation process is a process for controlling the progress of the fluctuation display game by determining a big hit, determining a small hit, setting a fluctuation pattern, and the like.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is a special figure 2 start memory (S2901). If there is a special figure 2 start memory (the result of S2901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a special figure 1 start memory in order to preferentially execute the special figure 2 variable display game. The process of S2903 is executed without executing (S2902).

  If there is no special figure 2 start memory (the result of S2901 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a special figure 1 start memory (S2902). If there is no special figure 1 start memory (the result of S2902 is “N”), since there is no special figure 2 start memory and no special figure 1 start memory, the game control device 100 executes the processes after S2920.

  When there is a special figure 2 start memory (the result of S2901 is “Y”), or when there is a special figure 1 start memory (the result of S2902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a big hit determination process (S2903). The jackpot determination process is a process for determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired at the time of starting winning and stored in the special figure start storage area is a numerical value within a predetermined range set as the jackpot determination value. . Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the upper limit value and lower limit value of the determination value with the jackpot random value. Therefore, since the determination is made without processing (for example, addition or subtraction) of the random number value, an error hardly occurs. When the value of the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value, the big hit flag is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a small hit determination process (S2904). The small hit determination process is a numerical value in a predetermined range set as the small hit determination value when the value of the big hit random number acquired at the time of winning and stored in the special chart start storage area does not match the big hit determination value. It is the process which determines whether it is. When the value of the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value, the small hit flag is set. A small hit random number may be provided separately from the big hit random number.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a stop symbol setting process (S2905). The stop symbol setting process is a process of determining a stop symbol in the special symbol variation display game based on the presence / absence of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the symbol random number. Here, the big hit stop symbol (number of rounds) when shifting from the small hit state (second special game state) to the big hit state (first special game state) is also determined.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information (S2906). The special figure information setting process in the present embodiment is a process for controlling the light emission mode of the LEDs 231 to 236 of the progress display unit 230.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process (S2907). The variation pattern setting process is a process of selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern includes a variation time and is selected using a variation pattern selection table. As the variation pattern selection table, for example, a variation pattern selection table for big hits and other than big hits (for small hits and for losing) is defined.

  Next, the game control device 100 starts the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) (S2908) and waits until a predetermined fluctuation time elapses (S2909). Result is “N”). Note that the game control device 100 transmits a variation start command to the effect control device 150 at the time of starting the variation of the special figure variation display game. The variation start command is a symbol information command indicating the type of stop symbol in the special symbol variation display game (type of big hit / small hit / loss, number of rounds in the case of big hit, gaming state after the big hit, etc.) It consists of a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern in the display game.

  When the predetermined variation time has elapsed (the result of S2909 is “Y”), the game control device 100 stops all the special symbols (identification information) of the variation display game being executed (S2910).

  Next, the game control device 100 stands by until a predetermined symbol stop display time elapses (the result of S2911 is “N”). The processes from S2908 to S2911 correspond to the start and end of the variable display game.

  When the predetermined symbol stop display time has elapsed (the result of S2911 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the variable display game is a small hit based on the presence or absence of the small hit flag. (S2912).

  When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of S2912 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the processing number of the small hit process (S2913). When the result of the variable display game is not a small hit (the result of S2912 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S2914 without executing the process of S2913.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the variable display game is a big hit based on the presence / absence of the big hit flag (S2914).

  When the result of the variable display game is a big hit (the result of S2914 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the processing number of the big hit process (S2915). When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of S2914 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S2916 without executing the process of S2915.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current game state is a specific game state (S2916). When it is not in the specific game state (the result of S2916 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the game state is the specific game state (the result of S2916 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of time-variations by −1 (S2917).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time variation is “0” (S2918). When the number of short-time fluctuations is not 0 (the result of S2918 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends this process.

  When the number of short-time fluctuations is 0 (the result of S2918 is “Y”), the predetermined number of short-time fluctuations (for example, 100) has ended, so the game control device 100 sets the start of the normal gaming state. (S2919) This process ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start memory (the result of S2902 is "N"), since there is no special figure 2 start memory and special figure 1 start memory, the game control device 100 has started the customer waiting demo state? It is determined whether or not (S2920). If the customer waiting demo state has been started (the result of S2920 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends this processing.

  If the customer waiting demo state is not started (the result of S2920 is “N”), the game control device 100 transmits a customer waiting demo command (S2921), and determines whether or not the power transmission support is in progress. (S2922). When the power transmission support is being performed (the result of S2922 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends this process.

  When the power transmission support is not being performed (the result of S2922 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the right-handed warning LED (not shown) to OFF (S2923), and ends this process.

[Small hit processing]
Next, the small hit process in the special figure game process described above will be described. 30 and 31 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the small hit process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The small hit process is a process for controlling the execution (progress) of the small hit state by setting the opening time of the upper large winning opening 28b and monitoring the remaining balls in the winning space 220.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the upper prize winning solenoid 28c to ON and rotates the movable member 28a (S3001). By turning the movable member 28a, the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the top prize winning opening 28b and the valid time (for example, 4.5 seconds) of the top winning prize opening 28b (S3002). The effective time of the upper prize winning opening 28b is an open time (1.5 seconds) because it may take time until the game ball gets caught on the movable member 28a and passes through the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216). It is set by adding a delay time (3 seconds). When a signal from the upper count switch 28d is received outside the valid time, for example, it is determined to be unauthorized, and an unauthorized winning command is transmitted to the effect control device 150 to perform unauthorized winning notification (abnormal notification).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the upper prize winning opening 28b is in the open period (S3003). As will be described later, if the remaining ball monitoring period is not in effect (the result of S3012 is “N”), and if there is a remaining ball in the winning space 220 (the result of S3019 is “N”), the remaining ball is processed. Therefore, the determination process of S3003 is executed.

  When the upper prize winning opening 28b is in the opening period (the result of S3003 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (S3004). When the opening time has elapsed (the result of S3004 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper prize winning solenoid 28c to OFF and returns the movable member 28a to the initial position (S3005). . When the opening time has not elapsed (the result of S3004 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S3006 without executing the process of S3005.

  On the other hand, when the upper prize winning opening 28b is not in the open period (the result of S3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of S3006 without executing the processing of S3004 and S3005.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the upper prize winning opening 28b is in a valid period (S3006). If it is during the effective period (the result of S3006 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the effective period has elapsed (S3007).

  If the valid period has not elapsed (the result of S3007 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the upper prize winning opening 28b (S3008). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the signal of the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) has been received.

  When the game ball passes through the upper prize winning opening 28b (the result of S3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball flag and updates the remaining ball count by +1 (S3009).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a remaining ball monitoring time (for example, 30 seconds) (S3010).

  When the game ball has not passed through the top prize winning opening 28b (the result of S3008 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of S3012 without executing the processing of S3009 and S3010. Every time a signal from the count sensor 216 is received, the processes of S3009 and S3010 are executed.

  If the valid period of the upper prize winning opening 28b has elapsed (the result of S3007 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining ball flag is set (S3011). If the remaining ball flag is set (the result of S3011 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing from S3012 onward without executing the processing from S3008 to S3010. On the other hand, when the remaining ball flag is not set (the result of S3011 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after S3022 without executing the processing from S3008 to S3021.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during the remaining ball monitoring period (S3012). If it is not during the remaining ball monitoring period (the result of S3012 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S3003. If it is during the remaining ball monitoring period (the result of S3012 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the monitoring period has elapsed (S3013).

  On the other hand, when the monitoring period has not elapsed (the result of S3013 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal area 224 (S3014). When the game ball passes through the normal area 224 (the result of S3014 is “Y”), the remaining ball count is updated by −1 (S3015).

  When the game ball does not pass through the normal area 224 (the result of S3014 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S3016 without executing the process of S3015.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 225 (S3016). When the game ball passes the specific area 225 (S3016), the remaining ball count is updated by -1 (S3017), the operation of the condition device is set, and the corresponding fanfare command is transmitted (S3018).

  When the game ball has not passed through the specific area 225 (the result of S3016 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S3019 without executing the processes of S3017 and S3018.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining ball count is “0” (S3019). If the remaining ball count is not 0 (the result of S3019 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S3003.

  On the other hand, when the monitoring time has elapsed (the result of S3013 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits a remaining ball error command (S3020). Thereby, residual sphere error notification (abnormality notification) is performed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the condition device is operating (S3021). When the condition device is not in operation (the result of S3021 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (S3022).

  When the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (the result of S3022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the time-varying variation count by −1 (S3023), and the time-varying variation count is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (S3024). If the number of short-time fluctuations is 0 (the result of S3024 is “Y”), since the prescribed number of short-time fluctuations has ended, the game control device 100 sets the start of the normal gaming state (S3025).

  When the number of short-time fluctuations is not 0 (the result of S3024 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S3026 without executing the process of S3025.

  If the current gaming state is not in the specific gaming state (the result of S3022 is “N”), the normal gaming state is continued, so that the game control device 100 executes the processing from S3023 to S3025. Instead, the process of S3026 is executed.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number of the special figure variation process (S3026), and ends this process.

  On the other hand, if the condition device is in operation (the result of S3021 is “Y”), since the occurrence of a big win is confirmed by the V winning, the game control device 100 sets the V winning flag (S3027). Various time values such as the remaining sphere monitoring timer are cleared (S3028).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number of the jackpot processing (S3029), and ends this processing.

[Big hit processing]
Next, the jackpot process in the special figure game process described above will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the procedure of jackpot processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The big hit process is a process of controlling the progress of the big hit state by determining the number of rounds, setting the opening time of the lower big prize opening 27b, and the like.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S3101). When the V winning flag is not set (the result of S3101 is “N”), that is, in the big hit by the variable display game, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 round determination table (S3102).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the generated big hit is a big hit by the special figure 1 variable display game (S3103). When it is not a big hit by the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of S3103 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 round determination table (S3104).

  If it is a big hit by the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of S3103 is "Y"), the game control device 100 uses the special figure 1 round determination table without executing the process of S3104, and in S3105 Execute the process.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot random number based on the jackpot symbol random number (S3105).

  On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set (the result of S3101 is “Y”), that is, in the case of winning the winning in the specific area 225, the game control device 100 sets the V winning round determination table. (S3106). Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines the type of jackpot (number of rounds) based on the jackpot symbol random number (S3107).

  Following the processing of S3105, the game control device 100 transmits a fanfare command corresponding to the type of jackpot (S3106).

  Next, the game control device 100 stands by until the fanfare time has elapsed (S3109). After the fanfare time has elapsed (the result of S3109 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the lower major prize opening solenoid 27c to ON (S3110), and the lower major prize opening 27b opening time (for example, 25 seconds). Is set (S3111).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a prescribed number of game balls have won the lower large winning opening 27b (S3112). If there is no specified number of winnings (the result of S3112 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the opening time (25 seconds) of the lower large winning opening 27b has elapsed (S3113).

  When the opening time (25 seconds) of the lower major winning opening 27b has not elapsed (the result of S3113 is “N”), the game control device 100 causes the specified number of game balls to move down until the opening time elapses. It is determined whether or not the big winning opening 27b has been won (S3112).

  When there is a prescribed number of winnings at the lower major winning opening 27b (result of S3112 is “Y”) or when the opening time has passed even if the prescribed number has not been reached (result of S3113 is “Y”) The control device 100 sets the lower large prize opening solenoid 27c to OFF (S3114).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the final round has ended (S3115).

  When the final round has not ended (the result of S3115 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets an interval time (for example, 2 seconds) until the next round is started, It waits until it elapses (S3117).

  After the elapse of the interval time (the result of S3117 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the round number by +1 and transmits a round number command corresponding to the round number (S3118). Thereafter, the processing from S3110 to S3118 is repeatedly executed until the final round is completed.

  On the other hand, when the final round is completed (the result of S3115 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processes from S3119 to S3129 in order to end the big hit state.

  The game control device 100 first transmits an ending command (S3119), sets a remaining ball monitoring time (for example, 2 seconds) (S3120), and waits until the remaining ball monitoring time elapses (S3121).

  After the remaining ball monitoring time has elapsed (the result of S3121 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal big hit has ended (S3122). That is, it is determined whether the generated big hit is a normal big hit or a special big hit.

  When it is a normal big hit (the result of S3122 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the start of the normal gaming state (S3123), and clears the number of short-time fluctuations to 0 (S3124). Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the right-handed recommendation LED (not shown) to OFF (S3125).

  If it is not a big hit (the result of S3122 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the start of the specific gaming state (S3126), and sets the initial value (100 times) of the short-time variation number (S3127). ). Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the right-handed recommendation LED to ON (S3128).

  Following the processing of S3125 or S3128, the game control device 100 finally sets the processing number of the special figure variation processing (S3129), and ends this processing.

[Time Chart 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the difference in the winning pattern to the top prize winning opening 28b, in particular, the normal area 224 and the specific area 225 will be described based on the time chart. FIG. 34 is a time chart when there is no winning in the upper prize winning opening 28b according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  First, each item will be described.

  “Special figure 2” indicates the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game. That is, it indicates whether the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or stopped.

  “Upper University Winning Port SOL” indicates whether the Upper University Winning Port Solenoid 28c is ON or OFF. The movable member 28a rotates while the upper prize winning opening SOL is set to ON. In this embodiment, the opening time of the upper prize winning opening SOL is set to 1.5 seconds.

  The “upper university prize opening” indicates whether the upper university prize opening 28b is valid or invalid. That is, it indicates whether the detection signal of the count sensor 216 (upper count switch 28d) is valid or invalid. In the present embodiment, the valid period of the upper prize winning opening 28b is set to 4.5 seconds after the upper prize winning opening solenoid 28c is activated.

  “Upper winning prize count sensor” indicates the signal state of the count sensor 216 (upper count switch 28d). When the passage of the game ball is detected, the count sensor 216 outputs an ON signal.

  The “specific area” indicates whether the specific area 225 is valid or invalid. In the present embodiment, the validity period of the specific area 225 is first set to 4.5 seconds after the upper prize winning solenoid 28c is activated, and the winning prize is given to the upper prize winning opening 28b during the 4.5 second validity period. If there is, the maximum is set to 30 seconds from the last winning prize. Even if the specific area switch 225a detects the passage of the game ball during a period in which the specific area 225 is invalid, no big hit occurs.

  The “specific area sensor” indicates a signal state of the specific area switch 225a. When the passage of the game ball is detected, the specific area switch 225a outputs an ON signal.

  “Normal area” indicates whether the normal area 224 is valid or invalid. In the present embodiment, it is set to 30 seconds at the maximum from the last winning to the upper large winning opening 28b.

  “Normal area sensor” indicates a signal state of the normal area switches 224c and 224d. When the passage of the game ball is detected, the normal area switches 224c and 224d output an ON signal.

  “Remaining sphere monitoring” indicates whether or not monitoring is performed on whether or not there is a remaining sphere in the winning space 220. The monitoring of the remaining ball is started when a winning is made at the upper prize winning opening 28b, and the monitoring period is set to 30 seconds at the maximum from the last winning.

  The “sorting rotating body” indicates whether or not the sorting rotating body 321 of the sorting movable unit 320 is rotating.

  The “condition device” indicates whether the condition device is operating or stopped. The condition device operates when there is a V prize.

  “Lower University Award Port SOL” indicates whether the Lower University Award Port Solenoid 27c is ON or OFF. While the lower major prize opening SOL is set to ON, the lower major prize opening 27b is opened. In the present embodiment, the lower major prize opening SOL is set to OFF when the opening time of 25 seconds elapses or when a predetermined number (10) of prizes are received in the lower major prize opening 27b.

  Next, it demonstrates along a time series.

  At time t1, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, and at time t2, all the special symbols are stopped. Since the result of the variable display game is a small hit, at time t3 when the stop symbol display time T1 has elapsed from time t2, the upper prize winning solenoid 28c is set to ON, and the upper prize winning opening 28b and the specific area 225 are Set to enabled. The specific area 225 is set to be effective at the same time as the upper prize winning opening 28b, but the normal area 224 is not set to be effective unless a winning is made to the upper prize winning opening 28b. The normal area 224 may be set to be effective simultaneously with the upper prize winning opening 28b.

  Thereafter, at time t4 when the upper prize winning opening time T2 (1.5 seconds) has elapsed from time t3, the upper prize winning solenoid 28c is set to OFF.

  Thereafter, at time t5 when the upper prize winning slot valid time T3 (4.5 seconds) has elapsed from time t3, the upper prize winning opening 28b and the specific area 225 are set invalid. Even after the upper university winning opening time T2 elapses, the upper university winning opening 28b is set to be valid for a maximum of 3 seconds, but the game ball does not win the upper university winning opening 28b within the effective period of the upper university winning opening 28b. Therefore, the specific area 225 is also set invalid at time t5.

  As described above, even when the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened, when the game ball does not win the upper prize winning opening 28b, the normal area 224 is set to be invalid, and the remaining ball monitoring is not executed.

[Time Chart 2]
FIG. 35 is a time chart in the case where a winning is made in the upper prize winning opening 28b according to the first embodiment of this invention. The time chart 5 is different from the time chart shown in FIG. 34 in that a prize is generated at the upper prize winning opening 28b.

  At time t5, which is within the valid time of the upper large winning opening 28b, a winning ball detection signal is output from the upper count switch 28d, the normal area 224 is set to be valid, and monitoring of the remaining balls is started. By detecting the signal of the upper count switch 28d, the game control device 100 increments the remaining ball count number by one.

  Thereafter, the upper prize winning opening 28b is set to be invalid at time t6 when the upper prize winning validity period T3 (4.5 seconds) has elapsed from time t3. The specific area 225 is not set to be invalid at time t6 because the valid time for 30 seconds from the occurrence of winning is set.

  Thereafter, at time t7 when the remaining sphere monitoring period T4 (30 seconds) has elapsed from time t5, monitoring of the remaining spheres is stopped, and the specific area 225 and the normal area 224 are set invalid.

  At time t7, the normal area switches 224c and 224d output a passage detection signal to the normal area 224. However, since the normal area 224 is set to be invalid, the winning is not valid. Further, since the remaining sphere count is not 0 when the remaining sphere monitoring period elapses, a remaining sphere error command is transmitted.

  As described above, since the normal area switches 224c and 224d and the specific area switch 225a serve as discharge confirmation sensors for the remaining sphere, if the remaining sphere count does not become zero during the remaining sphere monitoring period, a remaining sphere error is notified. be able to.

[Time Chart 3]
FIG. 36 is a time chart when there are a plurality of winnings at the upper prize winning opening 28b according to the first embodiment of this invention and when a V winning is generated. It differs from the time chart shown in FIG. 35 in that a game ball passes through the specific area 225 and a V prize is generated at time t7.

  At times t4 and t6, which are within the valid period of the upper prize winning opening 28b, a winning ball detection signal is output from the upper count switch 28d, and the game control device 100 updates the remaining ball count by +1 at t4 and t6. . Therefore, the remaining sphere count is 2 at time t6. Further, the remaining ball monitoring period (30 seconds) is newly set at time t6 by detecting the winning ball.

  Thereafter, at time t7, when one of the two winning balls passes through the specific area 225 and a detection signal indicating the passage of the game ball is output from the specific area switch 225a, the operation of the condition device is started. . Further, the remaining sphere count is updated by −1 and becomes 1. Also, the fanfare is started after time t7 due to the V prize. However, since the remaining ball count is not 0, the big hit state is not started at this time.

  After that, at time t9 before the remaining ball monitoring period T4 (30 seconds) elapses from time t6 when the last winning is generated, a game ball passage detection signal from the normal area switches 224c and 224d is output to the normal area 224. Thus, the remaining sphere count is updated by -1.

  When the remaining ball count becomes 0, the remaining ball monitoring is stopped, and the upper prize winning opening 28b, the specific area 225, and the normal area 224 are set invalid.

  Thereafter, at time t10 when the fanfare period T5 has elapsed from the V winning, the lower large winning opening solenoid 27c is set to ON, and the second round is started. The opening of the upper prize winning opening 28b in the small hit state from time t3 to t5 corresponds to the first round.

  As described above, when the game ball passes through the specific area 225, the big hit fanfare is started, but the lower big prize opening 27b is not opened until the remaining ball count number becomes 0, and the big hit state is not shifted. When the remaining sphere monitoring period ends in a state where the remaining sphere count is not 0, the big hit state may be generated while the remaining sphere error is generated.

[1st CPU main processing (production control device)]
Next, details of the 1st CPU main process executed by the effect control device 150 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a 1st CPU main process executed by the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 151 of the effect control device 150 according to the first embodiment of this invention. This process is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  The production control device 150 first prohibits interruption (S3701). Next, various settings are processed (S3702). Specifically, the RAM 151a which is a work area is cleared to 0, and CPU initialization processing is executed. Also, initial values necessary for executing various processes are set in the RAM 151a, and random number initialization processing is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 150 activates various interrupt timers for generating an interrupt at a predetermined timing (for example, 1 millisecond) (S3703), and permits the interrupt (S3704). Command reception interrupt processing is executed at the timing of interrupt generation.

  Here, the effect control device 150 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (S3705). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization process, and monitors whether the CPU is operating normally. If the main control microcomputer 151 does not clear the WDT even after a certain period has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes an effect button input process that detects an operation signal of the effect operation unit 15 by the player and performs a process according to the detected signal (S3706). Next, a game control command analysis process for analyzing the game control command received from the game control device 100 is executed (S3707).

  Next, the production control device 150 executes test mode processing (S3708). In the test mode process, an inspection command is received at the time of inspection at the time of shipment from the factory, and LED lighting or the like is inspected. Therefore, the test mode process is executed when the CPU is inspected at the time of factory shipment.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a 1st scene control process for controlling a scene (display content) to be displayed on the first display 31 based on the control command analyzed in the game control command analysis process (S3707) ( S3709).

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a gaming machine error monitoring process for monitoring occurrence of an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 (S3710). In addition to the abnormality relating to the effect control device 150, when a command for instructing error notification is received from the game control device 100, a predetermined process such as notification of an alarm sound is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes effect command editing processing for editing a command transmitted to the video control microcomputer (VDP) 157 (S3711). Next, the production control device 150 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 8 (S3712).

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a decoration control process for controlling decoration devices such as LEDs (panel decoration device 170, frame decoration device 171) (S3713), and further, A motor / SOL control process for controlling effect devices (board effect device 172, frame effect device 173) such as movable illumination is executed (S3714).

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a random number update process for updating the random number (S3715), and returns to the process of S3705. Thereafter, the processing from S3705 to S3715 is repeated.

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process in the 1st main process described above will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the 1st scene control process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The production control device 150 first determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the testing mode (S3801). In the case of the in-test mode (the result of S3801 is “Y”), it is not necessary to actually perform the effect control, so the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When the gaming machine 1 is not in the test mode (the result of S3801 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the scene change command transmitted from the game control device 100 has been received (S3802). ). Specifically, it is determined whether a command such as a power-on command, a power failure recovery command, a customer waiting demo command, a variation pattern command, a symbol stop command, a fanfare command, an interval command, an ending command, or the like has been received.

  When the scene change command has not been received (the result of S3802 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the processing after step S3807 without executing a new command setting or the like.

  When the scene change command has been received (the result of S3802 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 acquires the current gaming state to be updated (S3803), and whether or not a valid command has been received. Is determined (S3804). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change destination scene matches the current gaming state.

  If a valid command has not been received (the result of S3804 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the processing from step S3807 without setting a new command.

  When a valid command is received (the result of S3804 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 saves the received command in a predetermined area of the memory (RAM) (S3805) and sets the effect request flag. (S3806). The effect request flag is a flag indicating that it is time to change the scene, and in the changing process (S3811) described later, processing according to whether or not the effect request flag is set is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a branch process according to the identifier of the received command (S3807).

  If the received command is a “power-on command”, the effect control device 150 executes a power-on process (S3808). In the power-on process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on is controlled.

  If the received command is a “power failure recovery command”, the effect control device 150 executes a power failure recovery process (S3809). In the power failure recovery process, the screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is controlled. It should be noted that no special process is executed when the customer waiting process is executed before the power failure.

  If the received command is a “customer waiting demonstration command”, the effect control device 150 executes a customer waiting process (S3810). In the customer waiting process, the screen displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last execution of the variable display game is controlled.

  If the received command is a “variation related command”, the effect control device 150 executes a changing process (S3811). In the changing process, effect control corresponding to the set changing pattern is performed.

  If the received command is a “small hit related command”, the effect control device 150 executes a small hit process (S3812). In the small hit processing, small hit effect control according to a predetermined small hit effect is performed.

  If the received command is a “big hit related command”, the effect control device 150 executes a big hit process (S3813). In the big hit process, the big hit effect control according to the type of the big hit including the fanfare effect and the ending effect is performed.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a hold number command reception process (S3814). The hold number command is a command for notifying the updated hold number. In the hold number command reception process, a hold number command transmitted at the time of starting winning a prize and at the start of fluctuation is received, and the hold memory number is updated (increased or decreased) by the hold number command.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a decoration special figure command reception process (S3815). The decorative special figure command includes information for designating a stop symbol.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a prior determination command reception process (S3816). The advance determination command includes a start opening prize effect command and a start opening prize effect symbol command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 150 when the game ball wins the start winning opening.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a probability information command reception process (S3817). The probability information command reception process is a process for setting a gaming state such as an internal probability based on the received probability information command. The probability information command includes, for example, a low accuracy / short time command, a low accuracy / no support command, and the like. In addition, when generating a probability fluctuation state in which the jackpot probability increases after the big hit state (for example, special big hit) ends, in addition to the above commands, a high accuracy / short time command, a high accuracy / no support command, etc. are also output. .

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a right-handed warning command reception process (S3818). The right-handed warning command receiving process is a process for warning the player that the player is right-handed when a detection signal is received from the gate switch 25a during the normal gaming state. The right-handed detection may be detected not by the gate switch 25a but by a separate detection sensor on the right-handed flow path, or by another sensor (such as a count switch). Thereafter, the effect control device 150 ends this process.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process in the first scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a customer waiting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in an energy saving mode state in which the luminance is lowered according to the first embodiment of the present invention, where (A) is a demonstration screen waiting for a customer in the energy saving mode, and (B). It is a figure which shows the menu screen of an energy saving mode.

  The production control device 150 first determines whether or not the customer waiting demo condition is satisfied (S3901). The customer waiting demo condition is satisfied, for example, when a certain period of time elapses after the variable display game ends. When the customer waiting demo condition is satisfied (the result of S3901 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes a demo screen display process (S3902), and ends this process.

  In the demo screen display process, 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo command, while displaying the customer waiting demo screen, the panel and frame LEDs (the frame decorating device 170, the panel decorating device 170), the first display 31 and the second display. The energy saving mode for reducing the luminance of the display 34 or the like is set. In the energy saving mode, as shown in FIG. 40A, for example, the luminance of the backlight is reduced to suppress the power consumption.

  When the customer waiting demo condition is not satisfied (the result of S3901 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether the menu display condition is satisfied (S3903). The menu display condition is satisfied, for example, by operating the effect operation unit 15 or the like. If the menu display condition is satisfied (the result of S3903 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the menu screen display process (S3904), and ends this process. It should be noted that 30 seconds may have elapsed since the end of the variable display game as the menu display condition.

  Also in the menu screen display process (S3904), the effect control device 150 sets the energy saving mode for reducing the brightness of the panel and frame LEDs, the first display 31, the second display 34, and the like while displaying the menu screen. . In the energy saving mode, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), for example, the luminance of the backlight is reduced to suppress the power consumption.

  If the menu display condition is not satisfied (the result of S3903 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not a moving image browsing operation has been executed (S3905). The moving image browsing operation is, for example, a V winning scene playback operation. When there is a moving image browsing operation (the result of S3905 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes a moving image browsing process (S3906), and ends this process.

  The moving image browsing process is a process of reproducing a moving image (photographed data) taken by the camera module 248, and the angle can be switched such as switching to a moving image taken by another camera module.

  When the moving image browsing operation is not executed (the result of S3905 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether an image processing operation is executed (S3907). When the image processing operation is executed (the result of S3907 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the image processing processing (S3908), and ends this processing.

  In the image processing process, a still image (screenshot, captured image) extracted from a moving image (photographed data) is selected in a screen shot process performed in a moving image browsing process described later, and an effect and an icon are added to the selected still image. It is a process to give decorations such as. Further, a three-dimensional image may be created using shots from a plurality of angles.

  When the image processing operation is not executed (the result of S3907 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

[Video viewing process]
Next, the details of the moving image browsing process in the above-described customer waiting process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the moving image browsing process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  This process branches from the process executed by the player's operation. Based on the player's operation, the effect control device 150 executes any one of the processes from S4102 to S4110, and ends the process after completing each process.

  Among these, the screen shot process of S4108 is the moving image being played back when the screen shot operation is performed via the rendering operation unit 15 during the reproduction of the moving image (shooting data) shot by the camera module 248, for example. In this process, a still image is extracted from (photographed data) and stored up to a maximum of 5 images. If there are 5 or more screen shots, the oldest image is discarded.

  The angle changing process is a process of switching the reproduced moving image (shooting data) to a moving image (shooting data) shot at a different angle. A moving image with a different angle may be reproduced at the same timing by dividing the display screen, or may be reproduced from the beginning.

[Reproduction processing]
Next, details of the reproduction process in the above-described moving image browsing process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the reproduction process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 150 first reproduces the selected moving image selected by the operation of the effect operation unit 15 in the moving image selection process of S4102 (S4201). Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether there is magnetic error or vibration error information associated with the selected moving image (S4202).

  When there is a magnetic error or vibration error information associated with the selected moving image (the result of S4202 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the reproduction position of the moving image is an error occurrence timing. Determination is made (S4203).

  When there is no magnetic error or vibration error information associated with the selected moving image (result of S4202 is “N”), and when the reproduction position of the moving image is not at the error occurrence timing (result of S4203 is “N”). ), The production control device 150 ends this process.

  If the playback position of the moving image is the occurrence timing of the magnetic error or the vibration error (the result of S4203 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 synthesizes the error occurrence suggestion image with the moving image being played back (S4204). By displaying an image suggesting the occurrence of a magnetic error or vibration error on the moving image being reproduced, it is possible to confirm whether or not an illegal act has occurred.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is provided with a terminal (interface) for connecting a portable terminal and a storage medium owned by the player, and the captured moving image and the processed (decorated) still image are stored in the storage terminal and the storage medium. You may be able to do it.

[Video shooting process]
Next, details of the moving image shooting process in the above-described small hit process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the moving image shooting process according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a list of stored moving image information according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed the count sensor 216 (S4301). When the game ball has not passed through the count sensor 216 (the result of S4301 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When the game ball passes through the count sensor 216 (the result of S4301 is “Y”), the game ball rolls in the winning space 220. Therefore, the effect control device 150 includes all the cameras included in the game machine 1. Moving image shooting is started in the module 248 (the left camera module 248a and the right camera module 248b) (S4302). During camera shooting, the brightness of the space illumination LEDs 247a and 247b provided on the area partitioning member 242 may be increased as compared with that during non-shooting.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed as the moving image shooting time (S4303). If the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of S4303 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the small hit state has ended (S4304).

  If the small hit state has not ended (the result of S4304 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 150 executes moving image shooting until the small hit state ends or a predetermined time (10 seconds) elapses. .

  When the predetermined time has passed (result of S4303 is “Y”) or when the small hit is finished (result of S4304 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 ends the video shooting ( S4305).

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the specific area 225 (S4306). When a V prize is generated (the result of S4306 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 stores video information such as time, shooting video, and magnetic error / vibration error information in association with the shot video ( S4307).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the stored video is displayed in the video selection menu, for example, shooting time (time when the video was taken), 1 camera video, 2 camera video, V prize information (presence / absence of V prize), error information ( 5 items are displayed as a list together with items of magnetic error information and vibration error information. Videos older than 5 are discarded, but the number of saved videos may be more than 5. Note that one turtle video is a video shot by the left camera module 248a, and two turtle video is a video shot by the right camera module 248b.

  Next, the effect control device 150 discards the captured moving image a predetermined number of times (five times) (S4308), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, when there is no V prize (the result of S4306 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether a magnetic error or a vibration error has occurred (S4309). If a magnetic error or vibration error has occurred (the result of S4309 is “Y”), the processing after S4307 is executed. If a V prize does not occur even if a magnetic error or a vibration error occurs, the current moving image may be discarded. Further, the moving image and error history in which a magnetic error or vibration error has occurred may be stored without being discarded for the day on which the error has occurred.

  If no magnetic error or vibration error has occurred (the result of S4309 is “N”), the effect control device 150 discards the current captured video (S4310), and ends this process.

  In the error history shown in FIG. 44, the shooting time may be a shooting start time or a shooting end time. A numerical value such as “1-2” in the 1-cam video and the 2-cam video indicates the tag information.

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process in the first scene process described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the changing process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether there is an effect request flag (S4501). In the process of S4501, if the scene change is the first time, various information for executing the effect is set, and if the scene change is not the first time, whether or not the display effect state is changed by the timer. It is a process which determines.

  First, the processing from S4502 to S4513 executed when the scene change is the first time will be described.

  If there is an effect request flag (result of S4501 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 clears the push button information (S4502). The push button information is an operation detection signal output from the effect operation unit SW (switch) 174 provided in the effect operation unit 15.

  Next, the effect control device 150 sets a movable body request (S4504), and executes a variable effect pattern setting process (S4504).

  Next, the production control device 150 executes display notice setting processing (S4505). The processing from S4505 to S4508 is whether or not there is a possibility that a big hit state may occur corresponding to the winning (whether or not big win) of the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern, or the production pattern. Is a process of setting the content (effect mode) of the display notice effect that suggests.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes display operation setting processing (S4506). The display unit operation setting process is a process for setting the up / down operation of the second display unit 34 and the forward / backward movement / return operation.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes an accessory operation setting process (S4507). The accessory operation setting process is a process of setting the rotation operation of the effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 and the operation of other movable accessories.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes light guide plate effect setting processing (S4508). The light guide plate effect setting process is a process of setting the light emission effect mode of the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a random number seed initialization process that initializes a seed value of a random number that determines the effect information so as not to cause an effect (S4509).

  Next, the production control device 150 manages the execution timing and display time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display in the variable display game and the display of the effect character, corresponding to the variation pattern set in S4504. A scene sequence table is set (S4510), and a variable time setting process is executed (S4511).

  Next, the production control device 150 sets the first scene and the scene update timer (S4512), and since the setting corresponding to the scene change command is completed, the production request flag is cleared (S4513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  From here, the process of S4514 to S4519 performed when the scene change is the second or later will be described.

  On the other hand, when there is no effect request flag (result of S4501 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the scene update timer is “0” (S4514).

  When the scene update timer is 0 (result of S4514 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 sets the next scene data (S4515). When the scene update timer is not 0 (the result of S4514 is “N”), the effect control device 150 does not set the next scene data.

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes a display notice execution process for executing the display notice effect set in the display notice setting process in S4505 (S4516), and the display effect set in the display operation setting process in S4506. A display effect execution process is executed (S4517).

  Next, the effect control device 150 executes an accessory action effect execution process for executing the accessory action effect set in the accessory action setting process of S4507 (S4518), and is set in the light guide plate effect setting process of S4508. The light guide plate effect execution process for executing the light guide plate effect is executed, and this process is terminated. In the processing from S4516 to S4519, the presentation operation corresponding to the progress state (scene) of the special figure variation display game is sequentially executed with the passage of time.

[Display unit setting process]
Next, details of the display device operation setting process in the above-described changing process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of display operation setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. 47 to 50 are diagrams showing an operation mode of the second display 34. FIG.

  The display unit operation setting process is a process for setting the up / down operation of the second display unit 34 and the forward / backward movement / return operation.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the result of the running variable display game is a small hit (S4601). When it is a small hit (the result of S4601 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When it is not a small hit (the result of S4601 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the variation display game is being executed according to the specific variation pattern (S4602). The specific variation pattern is a reach that is not at least a normal variation, such as a highly reliable reach. If the specific variation pattern is not being executed (the result of S4602 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  The fluctuation patterns include a normal fluctuation pattern in which no reach occurs, a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach occurs, a long reach fluctuation pattern in which a long reach occurs, an SP reach fluctuation pattern in which a special reach occurs, a normal fluctuation pattern, The reliability that is a special result mode is set in the order of the normal reach variation pattern, the long reach variation pattern, and the SP reach variation pattern. When a specific variation pattern such as a long reach variation pattern or an SP reach variation pattern is being executed (the result of S4602 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 is a big hit when the result of the variation display game being executed is a big hit. It is determined whether or not (S4603).

  When the result of the variable display game being executed is a big hit (the result of S4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the descending action execution lottery process 1 in which the operation rate of the second indicator 34 is high. (S4604).

  When the result of the running variable display game is not a big hit (the result of S4603 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the descending action execution lottery process 2 in which the operation rate of the second display 34 is low. (S4605).

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the second display 34 performs the descending operation (S4606). That is, it is determined whether or not an operation for lowering the second display 34 has been set in the process of S4604 or S4605. When the descending operation is not executed (the result of S4606 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When the second indicator 34 performs the descending operation (the result of S4606 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes an operation timing determination process (S4607). For example, the second indicator 34 operates at any one timing or at a plurality of timings at the start of fluctuation, at the time of reach development, or during reach, but at a plurality of timings as the fluctuation pattern has a higher expected value that is a big hit. A lifting operation is performed.

  Next, the effect control device 150 includes a display area or a second display (including a display region included in the movement trajectory of the second display (sub-display) 34 in the main display screen 32 of the first display (main display) 31. It is determined whether or not a specific notice effect for displaying a specific notice effect image is being executed by the sub display device 34 (S4608).

  When the specific notice effect is being executed (the result of S4608 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the front / rear motion mode determination process (S4609). The front / rear operation mode determination process is an operation mode in which the sub display screen 35 (front member 350) of the second display 34 moves forward, and a plurality of the front / rear operation mode determination processes are prepared as shown in FIG.

  When the specific notice effect is not executed (the result of S4608 is “N”), the effect control device 150 sets no execution of the front-rear operation (S4610).

  Finally, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined effect operation (S4611), and ends this process.

[Front-back operation mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating the vertical movement and the back-and-forth operation of the sub display unit 340 including the second display (sub display device) 34 according to the first embodiment of this invention. (A) And (B) shows a 1st back-and-forth operation mode, (C) And (D) is a figure showing the 2nd back-and-forth operation mode.

  First, the first back-and-forth operation mode will be described. In the first back-and-forth operation mode, the front member 350 (second display 34) and the damping member 360 are moved after the sub display unit 340 is lowered to the set position (the lower limit position or the front of the display position of the specific notice effect image). Is a mode in which the forward and backward movement is executed.

  (A) shows a state in which the sub display unit 340 is lowered from the initial position (upper limit position, standby position, standby area). The front-back member 350 and the damping member 360 are not moved back and forth during the lowering operation.

  (B) shows a state in which the front member 350 and the damping member 360 are moved down to the position where the sub display unit 340 is set (the lower limit position or the operation position or the effect area in front of the display position of the specific notice effect image). It shows the state where the forward and backward movement is executed. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 51 as a second modification of the present embodiment, the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 may be reversed.

  Next, the second back-and-forth operation mode will be described. The second back-and-forth operation mode is a mode in which the sub-display unit 340 performs the back-and-forth motion while descending.

  (C) shows a state in which the sub display unit 340 is lowered and the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 are moving back and forth.

  (D) is a state in which the sub-display unit 340 is lowered to the set position (the lower limit position or the operation position or effect area in front of the display position of the specific notice effect image), and the front / rear operation has reached the maximum movement position. Is shown.

  Thus, the production effect is enhanced by providing a plurality of operation modes for the up and down movement and the back and forth movement of the second display 34. In particular, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by executing the operation mode according to the difference in the game state and the level of expectation.

  In this embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, the initial position (upper limit position) is returned in a common manner. The common mode is, for example, that the sub display unit 340 is raised after the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 are returned to the display base member 341.

  In addition, since the 1st front-and-rear movement mode is easier to recognize the forward movement of the second indicator 34 than the second back-and-forth movement mode, only the first back-and-forth movement mode may be used. Only the operation mode may be used.

[Sub screen display example]
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the first back-and-forth operation mode according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the screen effects on the main display screen 32 and the sub display screen 35 are combined. (A) shows production example 1, (B) shows production example 2, (C) and (D) are diagrams showing a common production example that follows production examples 1 and 2.

  First, Production Example 1 will be described in the order of FIGS. 48 (A), (C), and (D).

  (A) shows a state in which the notice effect image 390 is displayed small on the sub display screen 35. Since it is before the 2nd indicator 34 moves ahead, in order to enlarge and display the notice effect image 390 later, it is controlled so that the notice effect image 390 is displayed small. A sub background image 394 is displayed in a region outside the region where the notice effect image 390 is displayed on the sub display screen 35. Three downward arrows displayed on the main display screen 32 indicate that the decoration special figure variation display game is being executed and the decoration special symbol (identification information) is being varied.

  (C) shows a state where the sub display unit 340 is lowered to the lower limit position in front of the main display screen 32. Since the back-and-forth movement has not started yet, the notice effect image 390 remains small. A main background image 393 is displayed in a region outside the region where the notice effect image 390 is displayed on the sub display screen 35. Since the main display screen 32 is shielded by the sub display unit 340 when the sub display unit 340 is lowered, the screen display of the shielded portion may be continued or may not be displayed.

  When the sub display unit 340 is lowered as the second back-and-forth operation mode, the notice effect image 390 is enlarged according to the forward movement amount of the sub display screen 35.

  (D) shows a state in which the notice effect image 390 is displayed in large size in accordance with the movement of the sub display screen 35 forward. Because the perspective effect of moving the sub display screen 35 forward appears to the player, the notice effect image 390 itself is enlarged and displayed, so that the sub display screen 35 is moved forward. be able to. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Note that the image enlarged as the sub display screen 35 moves forward is not only the notice effect image 390, but also a symbol image such as a decorative special symbol (identification information), a pseudo-ream (restart) symbol, or the first start. You may include the hold display image etc. which show the memory | storage number of memory | storage and 2nd starting memory | storage.

In addition, the second display 34 may be a 3D stereoscopic display using binocular parallax, and stereoscopic display may be performed while enlarging the notice effect when moving forward, and the forward movement is emphasized by the perspective effect and the 3D effect. be able to. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Next, Production Example 2 will be described in the order of FIGS. 48 (B), (C), and (D).

  (B) shows a state in which the game-related image 391 is displayed on the sub display screen 35 and the notice effect image 390 is displayed small on the main display screen 32. A sub background image 394 is displayed in an area outside the area where the game related image 391 is displayed on the sub display screen 35. Note that the game-related image 391 is, for example, an image that displays an effect image and a model name.

  When the sub display unit 340 is lowered to the front of the notice effect image 390, the notice effect image 390 is displayed on the sub display screen 35. Therefore, the notice effect image 390 is displayed on the main display screen 32 until the sub display unit 340 is lowered. It is displayed small.

  In (C), an image of a portion that is overlapped and hidden from the time when the sub display unit 340 overlaps the front of the main display screen 32 is displayed on the sub display screen 35. Although the decorative special symbol during the variable display may be displayed on the sub display screen 35, it is preferable not to display the special decorative symbol on the sub display screen 35 in order to prevent the display on the sub display screen 35 from becoming difficult to recognize. Alternatively, the display image of the main display screen 32 may be displayed on the sub display screen 35 after descending to the set lowering position.

  Even when the sub display unit 340 overlaps the front of the main display screen 32, the main display screen 32 continues to display the notice effect image 390, the special decoration pattern, and the main background image.

  In (D), the notice effect image 390 is enlarged and displayed according to the amount of forward movement of the sub display screen 35 as in the case of effect example 1.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the image displayed on the sub display screen 35 is enlarged according to the amount of movement forward, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by emphasizing that the screen moves forward. it can.

[Example of restoring the sub display unit]
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an effect example when the sub display unit 340 according to the first embodiment of the present invention returns to the initial position (standby position, standby area). (A) shows the state in which the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 are moving back and forth, and (B) and (C) are examples of return effects when the notice effect image 390 indirectly suggests reliability. (D) and (E) are diagrams showing an example of a return effect when a notice effect image 390 directly suggests reliability.

  (A) has shown the state which the sub display screen 35 is moving ahead. As described above, the notice effect image 390 is enlarged and displayed on the sub display screen 35. In addition, the main background image 393 is displayed in an area outside the area where the notice effect image 390 is displayed on the sub display screen 35.

  From here, the return pattern differs according to the reliability with which the result of the running variable display game is a big hit. First, the case where the reliability is indirectly suggested will be described with reference to (B) and (C).

  (B) shows a state in which the sub display screen 35 has returned to the display base member 341 and the notice effect image 390 is displayed small. The notice effect image 390 that has been enlarged according to the rearward movement amount of the sub display screen 35 is displayed gradually smaller.

  (C) shows a state in which the sub display unit 340 is raised to the initial position and the game related image 391 is displayed on the sub display screen 35. Although the notice effect image 390 is not displayed on the main display screen 32 when the sub display unit 340 is returned, it may be displayed as it is.

  Next, the case where the reliability is directly suggested will be described using (D) and (E).

  (D) shows a state in which the sub display screen 35 has returned to the display base member 341 and the preview effect image 390 has been enlarged. Originally, the notice effect image 390 is gradually reduced from the enlarged state as the sub display screen 35 moves rearward. However, when the reliability is directly suggested, the notice effect image 390 is enlarged. Move backwards as it is. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the player.

  (E) shows a state in which the sub display unit 340 is raised to the initial position and the notice effect image 390 is still enlarged. Also in (D), the preview effect image 390 is enlarged and displayed, and the background screen of the sub display screen 35 gradually shifts from the main background image 393 to the sub background image 394 while the sub display unit 340 is raised. To do.

  As described above, the return mode of the sub display unit 340 can directly or indirectly suggest the reliability that the result of the running variable display game is a big hit. In particular, when the degree of reliability is directly suggested, the notice effect image remains enlarged even when the sub display screen 35 moves rearward, and the player can be surprised.

[Modification of front-rear operation mode]
Next, a modified example of the front-rear operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating the front-rear operation mode of the first display 31 and the second display 34 of a modification of the front-rear operation mode of the first embodiment of the present invention, and (A) and (B) The figure which shows the state which the 1st indicator 31 slides back, (C) And (D) is a figure which shows the state which the 1st indicator 31 rotates back centering on a lower end.

  In the embodiment described so far, the first display 31 does not operate when the second display 34 moves back and forth. On the other hand, in the modified example of the front-back operation mode, the first display 31 (display unit 30) moves backward in accordance with the front-back operation of the second display 34.

  When the second indicator 34 moves back and forth, the front glass frame 5 and the rear first indicator 31 regulate the operation width. Therefore, if the positions of the glass frame 5 and the first display 31 can be changed, the amount of the second display 34 to move back and forth can be further increased. In this respect, the first display 31 has a marginal space at the rear, and thus can move backward.

  (A) and (C) show a state in which the second indicator 34 has been lowered from the initial position to the set lowered position.

  (B) shows a state in which the second indicator 34 and the damping member 360 are moved in the front-rear direction, and the first indicator 31 is slid rearward in accordance with the forward-backward movement.

  (D) shows that the second display 34 and the vibration damping member 360 move in the front-rear direction, and the first display 31 rotates backward about the lower end of the first display 31 in accordance with the back-and-forth movement. Shows the state.

  The distance between the display base member 341 and the first display unit 31 is larger than that in (A) because the first display unit 31 slides or rotates backward. Therefore, the damping member 360 can move further rearward, and similarly, the second indicator 34 can also move greatly forward.

(Effect of modified example of front / rear operation mode)
As described above, according to the modification example of the back-and-forth operation mode, the second display 34 is moved back and forth more greatly by moving the first display 31 backward in accordance with the back-and-forth movement of the second display 34. Can be made. Note that when the first display 31 is rotated, the first display 31 may be rotated about the lower end as an axis, may be rotated about the upper end as an axis, or may be rotated about the other end as an axis.

[Modification of sub display unit]
Next, a modification of the sub display unit 340 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a configuration of a front member (front member) 350 and a vibration damping member (rear member) 360 of a modification of the sub display unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the second indicator 34 is disposed in place of the vibration damping member 360 and a convex lens unit 356 is disposed in place of the front member 350, and (C) and (D) are vibration damping members. It is a figure which shows the state which replaced with 360 and has arrange | positioned the 2nd indicator 34 and replaced with the front surface member 350, and has arrange | positioned the light-guide plate unit 357. FIG. Note that a display base member 341 or a mechanism capable of moving the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 back and forth is provided between the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360. To do.

  In the embodiment described so far, the second indicator 34 is disposed on the front member 350, and the damping member 360 is not provided with a display function. On the other hand, in the modification of the sub display unit, the second display 34 is provided instead of the vibration damping member 360, and the front member 350 enlarges an image displayed by the second display 34 or emits light. Are displayed in layers.

  (A) shows a state in which the vibration control member 360 is provided with the second indicator 34, and the front member 350 is provided with the convex lens unit 356, which are not moved back and forth.

  (B) shows a state in which the front image member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 move back and forth, and the effect image displayed by the second display 34 is enlarged and displayed by the convex lens unit 356.

  Thus, even if there is no change in the size of the image displayed on the second display 34, the size of the image visually recognized by the player by the convex lens unit 356 is increased or decreased according to the back and forth movement. The control load on the device 150 can be reduced.

  The focal length of the convex lens included in the convex lens unit 356 is designed to be larger than the maximum separation distance between the convex lens unit 356 and the second display 34.

  (C) shows a state in which the vibration control member 360 is provided with the second indicator 34 and the front member 350 is provided with the light guide plate unit 357, which are not moved back and forth. At the end of the light guide plate unit 357, an LED 359 that irradiates light from the end face of the light guide plate 358 is provided.

  (D) shows a state in which the front image member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 move back and forth, and the effect image displayed by the second display 34 and the pattern that appears on the light guide plate 358 are displayed on the light guide plate unit 357. Show.

  By making the light emitting pattern (light emitting area) provided on the light guide plate 358 emit light, it is possible to restrict the visual recognition around the effect screen or improve the effect. The second display 34 and the light guide plate 358 produce an effective effect when the light guide plate emits light in a separated state or when different light is emitted before and after the separation.

  The light guide plate unit 357 may be provided with a plurality of light guide plates 358 so that the shape and color of the light emission pattern of each light guide plate 358 are different, and the light guide plate 358 that emits light may be selectively changed. The front member 350 may be a unit including both the light guide plate 358 and a convex lens.

  Further, when the front member 350 and the vibration damping member 360 are moved back and forth, disposing the motor 346 shown in FIG. 7 in the display base member 341 becomes an obstacle to projecting the display image of the second display 34 forward. . Therefore, each guide rod 362 may be driven by a linear motor (not shown). Further, the guide rod 362 itself may be driven back and forth as a solenoid.

(Effect of modification of sub display unit)
As described above, according to the modification of the sub display unit, the image displayed on the second display 34 located on the back is enlarged by the convex lens unit 356 located on the front. Therefore, the size of the image visually recognized by the player by the convex lens unit 356 is increased or decreased according to the back and forth movement, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the image on the second display 34 is provided to the player in a large or small manner without relying on image control, the control load on the effect control device 150 can be reduced.

  In addition, the image displayed on the second display 34 located on the back is displayed superimposed on the light emission effect by the light guide plate unit 357 located on the front. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce an image of the second display 34, and it is possible to restrict a part of the second display 34 from being visually recognized.

[Functional action setting process]
Next, operation control of the effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the accessory operation setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the result of the running variable display game is a small hit (second special result mode) (S5201). If it is a small hit (the result of S5201 is “Y”), this process ends.

  When it is not a small hit (the result of S5201 is “N”, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not a specific variation pattern (for example, a long reach variation pattern or an SP reach variation pattern) is being executed ( (S5202) If the specific variation pattern is not being executed (the result of S5202 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When the specific variation pattern is being executed (the result of S5202 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the result of the variation display game being executed is a big hit (first special result mode). Determination is made (S5203).

  In the case of a big win (the result of S5203 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the appearance operation execution lottery process 1 in which the effect movable member 311 performs a rotation operation and a light emission operation at a high rate (S5204). .

  When the big hit is not made (the result of S5203 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the appearance action execution lottery process 2 in which the effect movable member 311 performs the rotation operation and the light emission operation at a low rate (S5205). .

  The processing from S5203 to S5205 is a lottery for the appearance operation of the production movable member 311. The production movable member 311 appears with a higher probability in the case of a big hit than a miss (rotates ahead of the main display screen 32). Move). In the case of deviation, when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the appearance operation is executed at a predetermined ratio according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to perform the appearance operation of the effect movable member 311 (S5206). When executing the appearance operation (the result of S5206 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes an operation timing determination process (S5207). The turning operation timing of the production movable member 311 is one timing or a plurality of timings at the start of variation, at the time of reach development, or during reach. The variation pattern with a higher expectation level that is a big hit is rotated at a plurality of timings. A dynamic action is performed.

  When the appearance operation is not executed (the result of S5206 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the process of S5208 without executing the process of S5207.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the result of the running variable display game is a big hit (S5208).

  In the case of a big win (the result of S5208 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the movement operation execution lottery process 1 in which the distribution rotator 321 rotates and emits light at a high rate (S5209). ).

  When the big hit is not made (the result of S5208 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the appearance action execution lottery process 2 in which the proportion of the sorting rotator 321 rotating and emitting light is low (S5210). ).

  The processing from S5208 to S5210 is a lottery for the appearance operation of the sorting rotator 321, and the sorting rotator 321 appears with higher probability in the case of a big hit than a miss (in front of the main display screen 32). Rotate). In the case of deviation, when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the appearance operation is executed at a predetermined ratio according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to perform the movement operation of the sorting rotator 321 (S5211). When executing the movement operation (result of S5211 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes an operation timing determination process (S5212). The movement operation timing of the sorting rotator 321 is also one timing or a plurality of timings at the start of fluctuation, at the time of reach development, or during reach, and the timing of the movement is increased at a plurality of timings as the fluctuation pattern has a higher expectation level as a big hit. A dynamic action is performed.

  When the moving operation is not executed (the result of S5211 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the processing of S5213 without executing the operation timing determination processing (S5212).

  Next, the production control device 150 sets execution of the decided production operation (S5213), and ends this processing.

  The distribution rotator 321 does not rotate during the specific game in which the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened and the game balls are distributed, and rotates during the variable display game in which the game balls are not distributed. Note that the moving operation of the sorting rotator 321 may be executed in a gaming state in which the upper prize winning opening 28b is not opened.

  Further, when the target moving from the winning space 220 to the front of the main display screen 32 is not the sorting rotator 321 but a dedicated movable effect member, the moving operation is executed in any gaming state. May be.

[Light guide plate effect setting processing]
Next, operation control of the light guide plate unit 250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of light guide plate effect setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a light emission mode selection table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the light emission mode selection table 1, (B) shows the light emission mode selection table 2, and (C () Shows the light emission mode selection table 3, and (D) shows the light emission mode selection table 4.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the right and left actors operate (S5301). The left and right roles refer to the production movable unit 310 (production movable member 311) and the distribution movable unit 320 (distribution rotation body 321), the left combination is the production movable member 311 and the right combination is the distribution rotation body 321. It is.

  When the left and right actors operate (the result of S5301 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 1 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S5302). Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S5309), and ends this process.

  When the left and right combination does not operate (the result of S5301 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the left combination (effect movable member 311) operates (S5303).

  When the left accessory operates (the result of S5303 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 2 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S5304). Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S5309), and ends this process.

  When the left accessory does not operate (the result of S5303 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the right accessory (sorting rotating body 321) operates (S5305).

  When the right accessory operates (the result of S5305 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 3 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S5306). Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S5309), and ends this process.

  When the right accessory does not operate (the result of S5305 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to execute a specific variation pattern (for example, a long reach variation pattern or an SP reach variation pattern). (S5307).

  When the specific variation pattern is executed (the result of S5307 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 4 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S5308). Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S5309), and ends this process.

  When the specific effect pattern is not executed (result of S5307 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  Next, an effect pattern in the effect space 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 71. The effect space 201 is a space in which the effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 can be rotated, a space in which the sub display unit 340 can be moved up and down and back and forth, and a light guide plate unit 250 is provided so that the light guide plate can emit light. Includes space.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing effect pattern 1 according to the first embodiment of this invention. The three downward arrows indicate that the decoration special figure change display game is being executed and all the special decoration symbols are changing. In addition, the distribution rotating body 321 that is always rotating is rotating clockwise in the winning space 220.

  Of the light emitting region 252a of the rear light guide plate 252, only the “CHANCE” portion emits light. By causing the light emitting area 252a located in front of the second display 34 located at the initial position (standby position, standby area) to emit light, it is possible to improve the effect of the display effect produced by the second display 34. In addition, by changing the light emission pattern according to the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit, for example, the light emission of only the “CHANCE” portion and the light emission of only the “super hot” portion, the production effect is further enhanced .

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing effect pattern 2 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The light emitting area 251a of the front light guide plate 251 emits light, and a radial pattern emerges, and an effect image and a design image are displayed in a circular non-light emitting area 251b.

  Since the area corresponding to the effect image or the design image does not emit light but the surrounding area emits light, the light emission of the light guide plate can be used as an effect of the display effect, and the effect is improved. In the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 251 emits light radially, but portions other than the effect movable member 311 may emit light entirely, or the luminance may be partially different. In addition, by changing the direction and intensity of light incident from the end, the light emitting region is changed by causing some LEDs to emit light instead of causing all LEDs of the front light guide plate LEDs 257 to emit light. You may make it make it.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing effect pattern 3 according to the first embodiment of this invention. It should be noted that the effect pattern 3 and subsequent steps are also executed, for example, during the development to reach or during the reach, and the decoration special symbols of the decoration special figure variation display game being executed are reduced and displayed on the upper right of the main display screen 32.

  Of the light emitting area 252 a of the rear light guide plate 252, only the “CHANCE” portion emits light, and the sorting movable unit 320 is rotated to the center of the effect space 201. Further, the sorting rotator 321 emits light while rotating. The distribution movable unit 320 may be stationary at the center of the effect space 201, or may reciprocate between the effect space 201 and the winning space 220.

  By moving the sorting rotator 321 from the winning space 220 to the effect space 201 during the variable display game in which the small hit state is not executed (during the period when the two kinds of games are not executed), the sorting rotator 321 is moved. Two functions (distribution function and production function) can be provided. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved while suppressing the manufacturing cost. Further, if the rotation mode and the light emission mode are made different between the case where the game is arranged in the winning space 220 and the case where it is arranged in the production space, the production effect is improved.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing effect pattern 4 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The light emitting area 251a of the front light guide plate 251 emits light, and the sorting movable unit 320 is rotated to the center of the effect space 201. Further, the sorting rotator 321 emits light while rotating. Since the sorting rotator 321 is located at the center of the circular non-light-emitting region, a sense of unity is provided.

  Further, since the periphery of the sorting rotating body 321 emits light radially, it can be used as an effect that produces the turning operation of the sorting movable unit 320, and the effect of the production is improved. In the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 251 emits light radially, but portions other than the effect movable member 311 may emit light entirely, or the luminance may be partially different. Further, the light emitting area may be changed.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating the effect pattern 5 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The object region (light emitting region) 252b of the rear light guide plate 252 emits light, and the sorting movable unit 320 is rotated to the center of the effect space 201.

  Since the light emitting area adjacent to the rotating rotator 321 after rotation is caused to emit light, it can be visually recognized as if an object integrated with the allocating rotator 321 is formed, and the production effect is improved. Since light is emitted so that the outer edge of the sorting rotator 321 is wrapped by the light emitting region 252b of the rear light guide plate 252 close to the sorting rotator 321, the sense of unity with the sorting rotator 321 is increased.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating the effect pattern 6 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In addition to the effect pattern 6, the “CHANCE” portion of the light emitting region 252a of the rear light guide plate 252 emits light in front of the second display 34. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation rather than the pattern 6.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 7 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 is rotated to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311 and the pattern region 252c of the rear light guide plate 252 emit light.

  Since the pattern area 252c of the rear light guide plate 252 corresponding to the light emitting portion 312 of the effect movable member 311 after rotation is caused to emit light, the effect movable member 311 can be viewed as if a pattern is formed. The effect is improved. Further, since the rear light guide plate 252 near the effect movable member 311 is caused to emit light so as to be continuous with the light emitting portion of the effect movable member 311, the sense of unity with the effect movable member 311 is improved.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 8 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 is rotated to the center of the effect space 201, and only the “CHANCE” portion of the light emitting portion 312 and the character region 252a of the rear light guide plate 252 that the effect movable member 311 includes. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation rather than the pattern 7.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 9 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 rotates to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 and the character region 252a and the pattern region 252c of the rear light guide plate 252 that are included in the effect movable member 311 emit light. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation rather than the pattern 8.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating the effect pattern 10 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 rotates to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311 and the light emitting area 251a of the front light guide plate 251 emit light.

  Since the non-light emitting area 251b and the effect movable member 311 after the rotation provide a sense of unity in shape, the effect of the effect can be improved. Moreover, since the area | region of the front side light-guide plate 251 corresponding to the support arm 314 light-emits, visual recognition of the support arm 314 is controlled, the support arm 314 becomes inconspicuous, and the effect can be raised. In addition, although the radial light emission area | region 251a is light-emitting, you may light-emitted the part other than the production movable member 311 entirely.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 11 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 rotates to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311 and the object region 252b of the rear light guide plate 252 emit light.

  Since the light emitting area adjacent to the effect movable member 311 after the rotation is caused to emit light, it can be visually recognized as if an object integral with the effect movable member 311 is formed, and the effect effect is improved.

  In addition, the sense of unity with the effect movable member 311 is increased by providing a pattern similar to the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311 in the light emitting region 252b. Further, since the rear light guide plate 252 close to the effect movable member 311 is caused to emit light so as to be continuous with the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311, the sense of unity with the effect movable member 311 is improved.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 12 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 rotates to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311, the character region 252a (“CHANCE” portion) of the rear light guide plate 252 and the object region 252b emit light. ing. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation more than the performance pattern 11.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 13 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 rotates to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311, the character region 252a (the “super hot” portion) of the rear light guide plate 252, and the object region 252b emit light. doing. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation different from the effect pattern 12.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 14 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 rotate to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311, the distribution rotating body 321, and the light emitting area 251a of the front light guide plate 251 emit light. doing.

  The production effect can be drastically improved by the combined operation of the production movable member 311 and the distribution rotating body 321. The uniting operation may be such that one of them rotates first and then the other starts to rotate, or both of them start the rotation simultaneously and combine. Note that the coalescing operation only needs to look as if they are coalesced, and may be a state in which the effect movable member 311 and the sorting rotator 321 are close to each other without being in contact with each other.

  Since the surroundings of the production movable member 311 and the sorting rotator 321 that have performed the combined operation are emitted radially, the light emitting area functions as an effect, and the production effect of the combined operation of the production movable member 311 and the sorting rotator 321 is improved.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 15 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 rotate to the center of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311, the distribution rotating body 321, the object region 252b of the rear light guide plate 252, and The pattern area 252c emits light.

  Since the object region 252b emits light, the visual recognition of the support arm 322 of the sorting rotator 321 is restricted and becomes inconspicuous, so that the effect can be raised.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the effect pattern 16 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The production movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 rotate to the center of the production space 201 (operation position, production region), and the light emitting unit 312, the distribution rotator 321, and the rear guide included in the production movable member 311. The character area 252a, the object area 252b, and the pattern area 252c of the light plate 252 emit light. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation more than the performance pattern 15.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the effect pattern 17 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 rotate to the central portion of the effect space 201, and the light emitting unit 312 provided in the effect movable member 311, the distribution rotating body 321, the light emitting area 251a of the front light guide plate 251, and the rear The object region 252b and the pattern region 252c of the side light guide plate 252 emit light.

  Since the radial light emitting area 251a and the object area 252b emit light, the visual recognition of the support arm 314 of the effect movable unit 310 and the support arm 322 of the distribution movable unit 320 is restricted and becomes inconspicuous, so that the effect can be raised. .

  Moreover, since the effect by the movable accessory and the light emitting area is executed over the entire area of the effect space 201, it is possible to give the player the maximum expectation.

  The production pattern 1 to the production pattern 17 are exemplary and do not limit the present embodiment, and the supplementary items described below are added or applied to all the production patterns 1 to 17. Is possible.

  For example, when the distribution rotator 321 is rotated from the winning space 220 to the effect space 201, the rotation mode may be changed, or the light emission mode may be changed in addition to the rotation mode.

  Further, for example, the aspect of rotating from the winning space 220 to the effect space 201 may be an effect member that does not affect the operation of the game ball, instead of the sorting rotator 321.

  Further, for example, when the radial light emitting region 251a is caused to emit light, the first display 31 or the second display 34 may perform display effects such as effects in a portion corresponding to the non-light emitting region 251b. You may perform the display effect which further emphasizes the part corresponding to the light emission area | region 251a.

  Further, for example, when the radial light emitting region 251a emits light, the character region 252a is not lighted for avoiding incomprehension, but the portion of the radial light emitting region 251a that overlaps the second display 34 is not covered. The character region 252a may be made to emit light by setting as a light emitting region.

  Further, for example, in the case where the “super hot” portion of the character region 252 a of the rear light guide plate 252 is caused to emit light, the second display 34 is within a range in which the “super hot” does not deviate from the frame of the second display 34. May be swung up and down, and the character region 252a may be caused to emit light in association with the operation of the second display 34.

  In addition, for example, the first display 31 produces a turning action of the production movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320 as an image, and a gaze production that gives the player the illusion that the movable accessory has acted. May be executed.

  Further, for example, the maximum movable position of the distribution movable unit 320 is set to the left, and the distribution movable unit 320 rotates beyond the center of the production space 201 to the production movable unit 310 side, and then An effect may be executed in which the effect movable unit 310 rotates to push back the distribution movable unit 320.

  In addition, for example, a light-emitting effect such as a step-up notice may be performed by increasing the number of light-emitting regions (light-emitting areas) that emit light according to the progress of the variable display game. Note that the step-up notice may be performed during execution of one variable display game, or may be performed over a plurality of variable display games depending on the prefetch determination result.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, by combining the light emitting effects by the plurality of movable actors and the light guide plate unit 250, a large number of effect patterns are provided to give the player a stepwise expectation. Can be given.

  In addition, since the light emission effect by the light guide plate unit 250 and the operation effect by the movable accessory bring a sense of unity, it is possible to provide the player with a fantastic impression, freshness, and an unexpected effect. It can enhance interest.

  Next, the rendering operation of the rendering member 287 provided in the winning device 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74.

[Hold count command reception processing]
FIG. 72 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure of the hold number command reception process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not a hold number command has been received (S7201). If the hold number command has not been received (the result of S7201 is “N”), the processing after S7205 is performed. Run.

  When the hold number command is received (the result of S7201 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the received hold number command is a command based on the special figure 1 start winning (S7202). ).

  If the command is a special figure 1 start prize (result of S7202 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the effect operation of the left effect member 287 (S7203).

  If the command is not a special figure 1 start prize (the result of S7202 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the effect operation of the right effect member 287 (S7204).

  In the present embodiment, for example, the effect operation of the left effect member 287 is executed when winning the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, and the effect operation of the right effect member 287 is executed when winning the special figure 2 start winning opening 24. .

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not an overflow command has been received (S7205). If an overflow command has not been received (the result of S7205 is “N”), the processing from S7209 is executed.

  When the overflow command is received (the result of S7205 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 next determines whether or not the received command is due to the overflow of the special figure 1 start opening (S7206). .

  In the case of a command due to overflow of the special figure 1 start opening (the result of S7206 is "Y"), the effect control device 150 executes the effect operation of the left effect member 287 (S7207), and ends this process.

  If it is not a command due to overflow of the special figure 1 start opening (the result of S7206 is "N"), the effect control device 150 executes the effect operation of the right effect member 287 (S7208), and executes the processes after S7209. .

  It should be noted that the effect member 287 may be operated in connection with the execution of the variable display game regardless of the winning at the start opening. Further, the effect member 287 may be operated only when the start memory increases without overflowing, or the effect member 287 may be operated according to the pre-read result of the start memory.

  Next, the effect control device 150 is based on the prior determination command transmitted from the game control device 100, and the hold display image (first start memory or second start) displayed on the main display screen 32 of the first display 31. A prefetch hold notice process for executing a prefetch hold notice for changing the display number of the stored image) to a display mode different from the normal one is executed (S7208), and this process ends.

[Left-hand channel]
FIG. 73 is a front view of the lower portion of the game board 20 showing a path through which the game ball flows down by left-handed according to the first embodiment of this invention.

  In the lower part of the game board 20, for example, a winning device 280, a general winning port 26, a lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27, a guiding portion 90, a pair of life nails 91, a jumping nail 92, and a plurality of road nails 93 are arranged. Is done.

  The winning device 280 is provided with a special figure 1 start winning opening 23 and a special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, and a pair of projecting portions for accommodating the effect member 287 at positions slightly apart on the left and right of the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24. 283 is disposed.

  Generally, the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment is left-handed in the normal gaming state. When left-handed, the movable member 24a is not released because the game ball cannot be passed through the normal start gate 25.

  A part of the game ball that has flowed down the left side of the center frame unit 210 flows down from between the road nail 93 and the road nail 93 (W1) to be planted in a row, and the general winning opening 26 is provided. The area or the path rolling on the left guide shelf 284 flows down.

  In addition, a part of the game ball flows down from between the nail 93 and the jumping nail 92 (W2). Further, a part of the game ball abuts on the splash nail 92 and jumps to the upper right, flows down between the pair of life nails 91 (W3), and wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23.

  When the game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, the motor 291 (see FIG. 21) is driven, and the left effect member 287 operates. When the left effect member 287 is operated, it may be operated every time a winning occurs, or the left effect member 287 is provided with an operation period and a non-operation period, and a game ball to the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 is provided. A fixed period after the end of the operation period based on the winnings may be set as the non-operation period. Note that once an operation period occurs, no new operation period occurs even if a game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 before the subsequent non-operation period ends.

(Right channel)
FIG. 74 is a front view of the lower part of the game board 20 showing a path through which the game ball flows down by right-handing according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  In the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, in general, the game machine is right-handed in the specific game state and the special game state. When the player hits the right side, the game ball can be passed through the normal start gate 25, so that the movable member 24a is opened based on the passage of the game ball to the normal start gate 25.

  The game ball that flows down by left-handed hits the top of the nail 93 and can enter the special figure 1 start winning port 23, but the game ball that flows down by right-handed hits the downstream of the special figure 1 start-winning port 23. Therefore, the possibility of not winning or winning the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 is extremely low.

  The guiding portion 90 protrudes from the game board 20 toward the glass frame 5 (front), and can guide the game ball toward the downward fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27. The lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 also protrudes from the game board 20 toward the glass frame 5 (front), and an open / close plate (not shown) that forms the upper surface of the lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 during the special game state. ) Retreats from the projecting state (closed state) that closes the lower major winning opening 27b to the retracted state (closed state) that opens the lower major winning opening 27b, so that the game ball can win the lower major winning opening 27b. Become.

  Next, W4 to W7 on the game area 22 will be described. Since W4 between the guiding portion 90 and the lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 and W5 between the lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 and the right protruding portion 283 are wider than the ball diameter, the game ball is It is possible to flow downward.

  In addition, W6 between the right protruding portion 283 and the general winning opening (other hole) 26, and W7 between the movable member 24a in the opened state and the right protruding portion 283 are also wider than the spherical diameter. A game ball can flow downward.

  In FIG. 74, the left and right guide shelves 284 have the same height, but the left and right heights may be different.

  When a game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, the motor 291 (see FIG. 21) is driven, and the right effect member 287 operates. When the right effect member 287 is operated, it may be operated every time a winning occurs, or the right effect member 287 is provided with an operation period and a non-operation period, and a game ball to the special drawing 2 start winning opening 24 is provided. A fixed period after the end of the operation period based on the winnings may be set as the non-operation period. Note that once the operation period occurs, no new operation period occurs even if the game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 before the subsequent non-operation period ends.

  Further, the left and right effect members 287 may be operated by winning a prize at one start winning opening. Alternatively, the left effect member 287 may be operated each time a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls win the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, or the right effect member 287 may be operated for a predetermined number (for example, Each time four (4) game balls win the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, they may be operated. Further, the number of winnings for operating the left effect member 287 may be different from the number of winnings for operating the right effect member 287.

  The left effect member 287 is operated each time the game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, while the right effect member 287 has a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls to receive the special figure 2 start prize. You may make it operate | move every time it wins to the opening | mouth 24. FIG. Further, the left effect member 287 is operated each time a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls win the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, while the right effect member 287 is operated by the special figure 2 start prize. You may make it operate | move every time it wins to the opening | mouth 24. FIG.

  Further, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 26 (one of the three general winning openings 26 or three general winning openings) located on the left side of the game board, the left effect member 287 is operated. When the game ball wins the general winning opening (other hole) 26 located on the right side of the game board, the right effect member 287 may be operated.

(Effects of the first embodiment)
As described above, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the distribution rotator 321 (distribution member) that distributes (changes in the flow direction) the destination (the course and the traveling direction) of the game ball. Is rotated to the center of the effect space 201 during the variable display game and used for the effect. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced while suppressing the manufacturing cost. In addition, the production movable member 311 having a portion that can be combined with the distribution rotator 321 is also rotated to the center of the production space 201, so that the merging production of the distribution rotator 321 and the production movable member 311 is possible. It becomes. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub display unit 340 can be moved not only up and down, but also back and forth. Can be increased. In particular, since the image displayed on the second display 34 is enlarged as the second display 34 is moved forward, the fact that the second display 34 is moving forward can be emphasized, and the game is interesting. Can be increased. In addition, the degree of reliability of the game can be enhanced because the degree of reliability that the running variable display game is in the special result mode can be directly or indirectly suggested by the return mode of the sub display unit 340.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the light guide plate unit 250 emits light at a predetermined timing, so that the movable accessory (the production movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320) positioned behind the light guide plate unit 250 can emit light. Visual recognition of parts other than the production part such as the support arm can be restricted. Therefore, the interest of the game can be raised.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, an arbitrary light emitting area among the light emitting areas of the light guide plate unit 250 is linked with the operation of the movable accessory (the effect movable unit 310 and the distribution movable unit 320). By making it emit light, it is possible to provide fantastic productions, novel productions, and productions with impact (a production rich in interest). Moreover, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the operation mode of the movable accessory, the light emission mode, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate unit 250, and various expectation (impression) can be given to the player by the difference in the production pattern combining these. it can.

  In addition, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the effect member 287 that performs the effect operation is arranged in the vicinity of the start winning opening where the player's line of sight is frequently collected (gazed by the player). Since the production member 287 performs the operation production in conjunction with the winning of the game ball at the winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, when the effect member 287 executes the operation effect, it is possible to notify (inform) the player that the game ball has won the winning opening. In particular, when the effect member 287 is caused to execute an operation effect by winning a game ball in the general winning opening 26 away from the player's line of sight, the effect becomes remarkable.

  In addition, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the winning space 220 is captured as a moving image at a specific timing, and the captured moving image is stored when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to play back (reproduce and display) the appearance of the V winning, and to give an additional privilege to the player who has achieved the V winning. In addition, a still image obtained by capturing (screen shot) a stored moving image can be decorated. Therefore, for example, a still image can be left at the player's hand as a memorial together with characters such as “Consecutive 10 times V winning!” And can also be displayed at the game hall.

  Further, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the state in the winning space 220 when the magnetism sensor 29a senses (detects) magnetism or the vibration sensor 29c senses (detects) vibration is reproduced and displayed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to confirm in detail whether the occurrence of the V prize is based on an illegal act or what kind of illegal act.

[Variation of winning equipment]
Next, a modified example of the winning device 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75A to 80.

[Variation 1 of the winning device]
FIG. 75A is a simplified diagram of the winning device 280 showing the operation of the right effect member 287 due to winning in the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 of Modification 1 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 75B is a simplified diagram of the winning device 280 showing the operation of the left effect member 287 due to winning in the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 of Modification 1 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  In the embodiment described so far, the effect member 287 is supplied with driving force by the motor 291. On the other hand, in Modification Example 1 of the effect member according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the effect member 287 is supplied with driving force when the game ball pushes down one end of the link arm member 295.

  The link arm member 295 includes a ball receiving portion 296 with which a game ball abuts, a bearing portion (shaft mounting portion) 297, and a pressing portion 298 that abuts on the effect member 287. The left and right link arm members 295 have the same configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 75A, the game balls won in the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 flow down the winning ball flow path 23e and flow down to the collective flow path 303a. Here, since the ball receiving portion 296 of the right link arm member 295 is located at the exit of the winning ball flow passage 23e, the game balls flowing down from the winning ball flow passage 23e to the collective flow passage 303a pass through the ball receiving portion 296. Press down. When the ball receiving portion 296 is pushed down, the right link arm member 295 pushes up the pressing portion 298 with the bearing portion (bearing portion) 297 as a fulcrum, and moves the right effect member 287 in contact with the pressing portion 298 upward. lift. Thereafter, the right performance member 287 returns to the support shaft portion 294 due to its own weight.

  The winning ball channels 23e and 24e, the link arm member 295, and the collective channel 303a are provided on the back side of the base member 281.

  When the game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, the left effect member 287 is lifted upward as shown in FIG. 75B.

  Note that, by opening only the right movable member 24a of the pair of movable members 24a, the game ball flowing down from the left side may be prevented from winning the special figure 2 start winning opening 24.

  Further, the link arm member 295 may be provided between the general winning opening 26 and the general winning collective flow path (not shown), and the effect member 287 may be operated by winning the general winning opening 26.

(Effect of Modification 1 of the winning device)
As described above, according to the first modification of the winning device, the effect member 287 is operated using the kinetic energy of the game ball without using the motor 291, so that electrical control becomes unnecessary. Moreover, the structure is simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the effect member 287 operates immediately after winning a prize, the player can intuitively grasp the operational relationship between the prize and the effect member 287. Further, since the effect member 287 moves up and down comically when the link arm member 295 is pushed up, a warm effect can be provided to the player.

[Variation 2 of the winning device]
FIG. 76A is a simplified diagram of the winning device 280 in a state where the special figure 2 start winning port 24 of the variation 2 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention is not opened. FIG. 76B is a simplified diagram of the winning device 280 in a state where the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 of the variation 2 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention is opened.

  In the form described so far, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 can be won by expanding the movable member 24a. On the other hand, in the second modification of the effect member according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 can be won by opening the movable door member 24f forward.

  In this modification, in the state where the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is opened, the interval between the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 and the guide shelf 284 is less than one game ball. As described above, a pair of protrusions 283 are formed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76B, in the state where the movable door member 24f is open, all the game balls flowing down from the guide shelf 284 to the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 win the special figure 2 start winning opening 24. can do.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76A, in a state where the movable door member 24f is closed, the game ball flowing down from the guide shelf 284 passes through the front surface of the movable door member 24f and flows down to the out port 39.

  Note that the left and right guide shelves 284 may have different heights, and the left and right guide shelves 284 may have different inclinations.

(Effect of Modification 2 of the winning device)
As described above, according to the variation 2 of the winning device, the distance between the guide shelf portion 284 and the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 is less than one game ball, so the member provided as the general electric device is reversed. Instead of the pair of movable members 24a expanding in the shape of “C”, a movable door member 24f that opens and closes forward and backward can be provided.

  In addition, by forming the right and left guide shelves 284 with different heights and inclinations, the left-handed special figure 2 sense of time given to the player and the right-handed special figure are given. 2 The feeling of time required for winning a prize at the start winning opening 24 becomes different, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Variation 3 of the winning device]
FIG. 77 shows an abbreviation of the guiding portion 90 and the attacker 27, in which a lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 is disposed between the pair of projecting portions 283 of the third modification of the winning device of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a simplified diagram of a winning device 280 in which a special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is disposed at an intermediate portion.

  In the embodiment described so far, two effect members 287 are provided. On the other hand, in the modification 3 of the winning device of the first embodiment of the present invention, three effect members 287 are provided.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 77, the attacker 27 is disposed between the pair of projecting portions 283, and the movable member 24 a of the general electric device is disposed at a substantially intermediate portion between the attacker 27 and the guiding portion 90. . The distance between the projecting portion 283 and the lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 is less than one game ball.

  Further, a third protrusion 283 is formed immediately above the movable member 24a so that the game ball cannot be won in the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 when the movable member 24a is in the closed state. The movable member 24a and the protruding portion 283 directly above the movable member 24a are disposed on the base member 281b, and a guide shelf 284 is formed above the protruding portion 283 directly above the movable member 24a. The production member 287 is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new impression that has never existed before.

  By arranging the lower portion of the game board 20 as shown in FIG. 76, each production member 287 has each prize opening (Special Figure 1 start prize opening 23, Special Figure 2 start prize opening 24, general prize opening 26, bottom It is possible to operate in association with winning of the big winning opening 27b). Therefore, since the associated effect member 287 operates every time a prize is won at each winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, each effect member 287, for example, in advance during a single variable display game or over a plurality of variable display games, is informed in advance of a change notification based on the determination results of various random numbers at the start of the variable display game. It is also possible to notify that the expectation that the variable display game will be a special result mode is high by performing a pre-reading notice based on a prior determination of various random values when the game ball is won at the start winning opening. Further, during the specific gaming state, the specific performance member 287 may operate intermittently or continuously.

(Effect of Modification 3 of the winning device)
As described above, according to the third modification of the prize winning device, the protrusion 283 accommodates the effect member 287 is provided immediately above the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, so that the protrusion 283 becomes the special figure 2 start winning opening 24. It is possible to regulate the flow of the game ball to and to give a new impression to the player.

  In addition, since the three effect members 287 operate in association with winnings at any start opening, the effect of the effect is improved and the game is more interesting than the case where two effect members 287 are provided. Can be increased.

[Variation 4 of the winning device]
In FIG. 78, the special FIG. 1 start winning port 23, the special figure 2 starting winning port 24, and the lower large winning port 27b of Modification 4 of the winning device of the first embodiment of the present invention are integrally provided. It is a simplified diagram of the winning device 280.

  In the embodiment described so far, the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, and the lower large winning opening 27b are not integrally arranged. On the other hand, in the modified example 4 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the special figure 1 starting winning port 23, the special figure 2 starting winning port 24, and the lower large winning port 27b are integrally disposed. Is done.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 78, a special figure 2 start winning opening 24 having a movable door member 24f is disposed immediately below the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, and directly below the special figure 2 start winning opening 24. The lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 is provided. Therefore, the frequency at which the player's line of sight and consciousness gather at the winning device 280 is increased, and the frequency at which the operation of the effect member 287 is visually recognized by the player is also increased.

  The height of the guiding shelf 284 may be a height that can be guided not only to the lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 but also to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24.

  In addition, each effect member 287 may be operated corresponding to a winning opening, or may be operated in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, for example, regardless of winning.

(Effect of Modification 4 of the winning device)
As described above, according to the modified example 4 of the winning device, the lower fluctuation winning device (attacker) 27 having the special figure 1 starting winning port 23, the special figure 2 starting winning port 24, and the lower large winning port 27b is integrally formed. Arranged. Therefore, the frequency at which the player's line of sight and consciousness gather at the winning device 280 is increased, and the frequency at which the operation of the effect member 287 is visually recognized by the player is increased, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Variation 5 of the winning device]
FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the winning device 280 of the fifth modified example of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention when viewed from the front upper side. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the protruding portion 283 of the protruding portion 283 of Modification 5 of the winning device according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the player's viewpoint.

  In the form described so far, the guide shelf 284 has been formed of an opaque member. On the other hand, in the variation 5 of the winning device of the first embodiment of the present invention, the surrounding wall portion 285 constituting the front wall, the bottom wall, and the side wall of the protruding portion 283 is formed of an opaque member, By forming the guide shelf 284 that constitutes the upper wall of the projecting portion 283 from a transparent material to be a transparent window portion, the entire effect member 287 accommodated in the projecting portion 283 from the oblique upper side as a player's viewpoint To be visible.

  In the present modification, the guide shelf 284 is formed of a transparent member to form a transparent window, and as shown in FIG. 80, the player simply turns his line of sight on the effect member 287 in the protrusion 283. Can be visually recognized. In particular, the player's line of sight easily gathers at the lower large winning opening 27b during the special gaming state and at the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 during the specific gaming state. The frequency of visual recognition is increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, when the effect member 287 operates so as to jump forward from the rear protruding portion 288, it can be visually recognized from the moment the effect member 287 jumps out, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Effect of Modification 5 of the winning device]
As described above, according to the modified example 5 of the winning device, the guide shelf 284 is formed of a transparent member, so that the player can visually recognize the entire production member 287, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be increased.

[Other production examples]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, other examples of effects will be described.

[Other production examples 1]
FIG. 81 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an effect example in which the rotation operation of the sorting movable unit 320 of the other effect example 1 of the first embodiment of the present invention is linked to the symbol variation of the variation display game. is there.

  (A) is waiting at the initial position where the distribution movable unit 320 faces the winning space 220 (dividing the back of the winning space), and the left decorative special symbol 61 and the right decorative special symbol 62 are temporarily stopped. Indicates the state.

  In (B), the special pattern 63 of the inner decoration continues to change, the sorting movable unit 320 rotates counterclockwise (leftward), and the position (operation position) slightly to the right of the center of the effect space 201 , The state of moving to the production area).

  In (C), the rotation of the sorting rotator 321 becomes a high-speed rotation, and the right decorative special symbol 62 that has been temporarily stopped re-varies (slip fluctuation) in conjunction with the high-speed rotation of the sorting rotator 321. Indicates the started state. In addition, the distribution movable unit 320 may stop the rotation in the vicinity of the symbol to be changed again, and the distribution rotating body 321 may produce an effect such that the decoration special symbol is changed again.

  (D) returns to the initial position (standby position, standby area) where the distribution movable unit 320 faces the winning space 220 (divides the back of the winning space), and the right decorative special symbol 62 temporarily stops again. The state in which the degree of expectation that the variation display game becomes a special result mode is improved (the state where reach has occurred) than before the re-variation. The sorting rotator 321 rotates clockwise from the high-speed rotation state at a reduced rotation speed.

  Note that the decorative special symbol that is temporarily stopped for the second time due to re-variation (slip variation) may be the same decorative special symbol as before the re-variation.

  Moreover, the mode which the distribution movable unit 320 rotates to near the inside decoration special symbol 63, and the inside decoration special symbol 63 changes again may be sufficient.

  In this way, the interest of the game can be enhanced by changing the special symbol again in conjunction with the rotation operation of the sorting movable unit 320 and the high-speed rotation of the sorting rotating body 321.

(Other effects of production example 1)
As described above, according to the other effect example 1, the sorting movable unit 320 is rotated to the vicinity of the temporarily stopped decorative special symbol, and the rotation speed of the sorting rotating body 321 is increased, and the temporary stopping is performed. The decorative special design is starting to change again (slip change). Therefore, an expectation can be given to a player by performing an effect different from the usual effect mode.

[Other production examples 2]
FIG. 82 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an effect example in which the rotation operation of the sorting movable unit 320 of the other effect example 2 of the first embodiment of the present invention is linked to the symbol variation during pseudo continuous variation. It is.

  (A) is waiting at the initial position where the distribution movable unit 320 faces the winning space 220 (dividing the back of the winning space), and the left decorative special symbol 61, the middle decorative special symbol 63, and the right decorative special symbol. 62 shows a temporarily stopped state. The variation display game here is executing a so-called pseudo-continuous variation pattern that simulates a plurality of (decoration) variation display games.

  (B) shows a state in which the sorting movable unit 320 is rotating from the initial position facing the winning space 220 (dividing the inner portion of the winning space) to the center of the effect space 201.

  (C) shows a state in which the rotation of the sorting rotator 321 becomes a high speed, and all the decorative special symbols that have been temporarily stopped have started to change again in conjunction with the high-speed rotation of the sorting rotator 321.

  (D) shows a state where the allocation movable unit 320 returns to the initial position facing the winning space 220 (dividing the inner portion of the winning space) and all the special decoration symbols continue to change again.

  (A) to (D) are set as one quasi-continuous execution operation, and the effects (A) to (D) are repeated according to the number of quasi-continuations to be executed.

  Note that the emission color of the sorting rotator 321 may be changed according to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous.

(Effects of other production example 2)
As described above, according to the other production example 2, the distribution movable unit 320 rotates to the center of the production space 201, and the rotation speed of the distribution rotator 321 is increased and temporarily stopped. All ornamental special designs are starting to change again. Therefore, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation and enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit state (first special game state), the variable display game is more likely to become a special result mode (first special result mode) than the normal game state (a big hit state is likely to occur). (Probability fluctuation state) is not generated, but after the big hit state is finished, normal gaming state (low probability state), short time state (low probability state + general power support state) or probability change state (high probability state + general power support state) ) May be generated, and the up variation winning device 28 is opened in a specific (one or more) round in the big hit state, and the game ball that has won the up variation winning device 28 is in a specific area. A probability variation state may be generated when passing through 225, and a normal gaming state or a short time state may be generated when not passing through. Further, the probability variation state (probability variation state) may be continued until the next big hit state (first special game state) occurs, or when a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It is good also as what is complete | finished at the time, and is good also as what is complete | finished when a predetermined fall lottery is won.

(Second Embodiment)
[Right protruding part (game production device)]
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 117. Note that configurations not specifically described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 83 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. The right protruding portion 500 disposed on the right side of the glass frame 5 is different from the right protruding portion 19 (see FIG. 1) of the first embodiment. The right protruding portion 500 includes a game effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game, and may be referred to as a frame side effect unit. The right protrusion 500 includes an effect base member 501 and a transparent cover member 530 that covers the effect base member 501.

  FIG. 84A is a front view of the effect base member 501 in the standing state as viewed from the player side. FIG. 84 (B) is a front view of the transparent cover member 530 in the standing state as viewed from the player side. The effect base member 501 is rotatably attached to the base (main body) of the glass frame 5 by an upper shaft mounting portion 503a and a lower shaft mounting portion 503b that function as bearings, and is supported from above and below (axially mounted). ). The rotation axis direction of the effect base member 501 is the vertical direction. The right protruding portion 500 is in an upright state (standing position) and a tilted state (tilted position) on the front surface of the main body (base) of the glass frame 5 by the upper shaft mounting portion 503a and the lower shaft mounting portion 503b of the effect base member 501. Can be converted to

  The state conversion by the rotation of the right protrusion 500 may be performed manually, or after the power is turned on, the tilted state is converted to the standing state by the driving force of the drive source (such as the protrusion driving motor) of the frame effect device 173. Alternatively, state conversion may be performed as an effect of a variable display game.

  The effect base member 501 has two upper and lower projecting portions 505 that project in a mountain shape toward the front (player side) in a standing state, and a recessed portion 510 that is recessed rearward relative to the projecting portion 505. Have The protruding portion 505 is opaque and includes a plurality of linear light emitting portions 506 having a linear shape at the front end. The linear light emitting unit 506 is composed of an LED and a linear lens, and has a mountain shape provided over both sides of the top portion 507 of the protruding portion 505. The linear light emitting unit 506 constitutes a game effect device that produces effects according to the progress of the game. The linear light emitting unit 506 is positioned in front of the light guide plate (the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252) and the transparent plate 5a in a standing state.

  The concave portion 510 is provided with a movable member 513 that is guided by a guide groove (guide groove) 514 and is movable in the vertical direction. The movable member 513 can be moved by a drive source 515 such as an electric motor. The drive source 515 is included in the frame effect device 173 and is driven and controlled by the effect control device 150 via the frame effect motor control circuit 164. The movable member 513 can emit light from a lens portion provided on the front surface by an LED provided inside. In addition, on the front surface of the concave portion 510, a plurality of light emitting portions including LEDs and rectangular lenses are provided as level light emitting portions 517. The movable member 513 and the level light emitting unit 517 also constitute a game effect device that produces effects according to the progress of the game.

  The LED as the light emission source of the linear light emitting unit 506, the movable member 513, and the level light emitting unit 517 is included in the frame decoration device 171. The effect control device 150 controls the light emission mode of the linear light emitting unit 506, the movable member 513, and the level light emitting unit 517 via the frame decoration LED control circuit 162 that controls the frame decoration device 171. The production control device 150 causes the linear light emitting unit 506 or the level light emitting unit 517 to operate in a predetermined manner and the movable member 513 to operate in a predetermined manner, and the linear light emitting unit 506 or the level light emitting unit 517. It is possible to execute the second operation effect that causes the unit 517 to emit light in a predetermined manner. Thereby, the variation of production can be increased.

  The transparent cover member 530 conforms in shape to the two upper and lower protrusions 505 and is fitted and attached to the effect base member 501 (see FIG. 85). For this reason, the transparent cover member 530 has a shape protruding in a mountain shape toward the front (player side) in the standing state. The top portion 532 of the transparent cover member 530 is disposed so as to overlap the top portion 507 of the protruding portion 505 in the front-rear direction.

  85 (A) and 85 (B) are front views as seen from the player side showing the standing state and the tilted state (folded state) of the right side protruding portion 500, respectively. 85 (C) and 85 (D) are upper end views showing the standing state and the tilted state of the right side protruding portion 500, respectively.

  The right-side protrusion 500 is tilted by rotating and folding the right-side protrusion 500 in the standing state in the direction of the arrow in FIG. In the tilted state (folded state) of FIG. 85 (B), the side light emitting portion 519 that is the side surface of the effect base member 501 of the right protruding portion 500 faces the player side. In the planar side light emitting portion 519, the manufacturer name / model name of the gaming machine 1 can be displayed by the LED or the lens so as to emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 85C and 85D, the effect base member 501 has an arcuate portion 520 on the rear side in the standing state (right side in the tilted state). The arcuate portion 520 conforms in shape with the arcuate guide portion 521 provided on the side of the main body (base) of the glass frame 5 so that the right protrusion 500 can be smoothly rotated to the upright state or the tilted state. Yes. The arc-shaped part 520 is covered with the arc-shaped guide part 521 in the standing state and cannot be visually recognized from the front, but a part not covered with the arc-shaped guide part 521 is visible from the front in the tilted state.

  In addition, the effect base member 501 has a contact portion 522 that protrudes from the arc-shaped portion 520 to the right in the horizontal direction in the standing state. The abutting portion 522 abuts on the support portion 523 of the glass frame 5 and stops the rotation of the right protruding portion 500 from the tilted state (tilted position) to the standing state (standing position). In the upright state of the right protruding portion 500, the contact portion 522 is substantially in contact with the support portion 523 of the glass frame 5. The support portion 523 of the glass frame 5 is a side portion that connects the upper portion 5b and the lower portion 5c of the main body of the glass frame 5.

  As shown in FIG. 85C, in the standing state, the side light emitting portion 519 is a side end of the right protruding portion 500, but is substantially the same as the right side surface of the glass frame 5 (as a result, the right side surface of the outer frame 2 and the opening and closing frame 3). Since it is arranged so as to be flush with each other on the same plane, the right protruding portion 500 is inside the outline (outer edge) of the gaming machine 1 even during rotation. Also, as shown in FIG. 85D, in the tilted state, the side light emitting portion 519 is the front end of the right protruding portion 500, but is arranged so as to be flush with the front end of the cover 8c of the upper speaker 8a on the same plane. Therefore, the right-side protruding portion 500 in a tilted state is less likely to be damaged when the gaming machine 1 is transported or installed. In the tilted state of the right protruding portion 500, the upper plate unit 12 protrudes to the front most.

  86 (A) and 86 (B) are modified examples of the right side protruding portion 500, (A) is a front view of the effect base member 501 in the standing state as seen from the player side, and (B) is in the standing state. It is the front view which looked at the transparent cover member 530 from the player side. In this modification, the level light emitting portion 517 is not provided, and the positions of the movable member 513 and the guide groove 514 are shifted downward from FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B). Further, the linear light emitting unit 506 is connected to one main light emitting unit 525 on the right side. The main light emitting portion 525 is provided across the protruding portion 505 and the recessed portion 510.

[Front structure]
Next, the front structure 200 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the game board 20 according to the second embodiment. Similarly to the second embodiment, the armor portion 211a is provided at the upper portion of the front structure 200 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board, so that the game ball is inside the center frame unit 210 from the game area 22 (ie, the first frame). 1 display (main display device) 31 is controlled so as not to fall (inflow) on the front surface.

  The upper part of the armor part 211a (entrance restricting wall) is an inclined shelf part 540 having a mountain shape or a substantially arc shape as a whole. The inclined shelf portion 540 has an inclined surface such that the upper surface descends left and right from the top at the center, and guides the game ball to the left or right side of the center frame unit 210 (front structure 200) along the inclination. The inclined shelf part 540 includes a first shelf part 541 (an upper left part of the armor part 211a) that inclines so as to descend to the left from the top part of the armor part 211a, and a first incline so as to descend to the right from the top part of the armor part 211a. It has two shelves 542 (upper right part of the armor part 211a).

  The first shelf 541 rolls the game ball dropped on the upper surface toward the first flow path 544. The first flow path 544 is a left portion of the game area 22 where a game ball launched with a weak firing force (left-handed firing force, weak firing speed) flows down, It is formed so as to be sandwiched between left portions of the guide rails 22a (partition members). The second shelf 542 rolls the game ball dropped on the upper surface toward the second flow path 545. The second flow path 545 is a right part of the game area 22 where a game ball fired with a strong firing force (right-handed firing force, strong firing speed) flows down, It is formed by being sandwiched between the right side portions of the guide rail 22a. The variable winning portion (the lower variable winning device 27 or the upper variable winning device 28) is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path 545 can win (win). Therefore, the second shelf 542 rolls the game ball that has reached the upper surface toward the upstream of the variable winning portion.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the inclined shelf portion 540 of the armor portion 211a has a ball introduction portion 554 capable of introducing a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the second shelf portion 542 into the ball passage 552. Have The ball introduction unit 554 introduces a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined shelf 540 so that the player does not flow downstream of the ball introduction unit 554 when the player tries to execute the surplus counting method. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined shelf 540 is excluded from the winning candidates for the variable winning portion, and the surplus counting method becomes difficult. The surplus counting method is such that the starting game ball is dropped on the upper surface of the inclined shelf portion 540 and fired with a weak launching force so as not to roll, and the subsequent game ball is not dropped on the upper surface of the inclined shelf portion 540. This is a batting method in which the game balls are awarded beyond the prescribed number for the opening of one unit (for example, one round) in the variable winning portion by narrowing the flow interval of a plurality of game balls by launching with a strong launch force. . The ball channel 552 (ball guide unit) allows the game sphere introduced from the ball introduction unit 554 to flow down and be led out to a position not winning the variable winning unit or a warp channel (game ball). ) To the upper surface of the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 of the stage part 240). Here, the ball flow path 552 (ball guide portion) will be described as an out-ball flow path for discharging game balls out of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the front structure 200 according to the second embodiment. The light guide plate unit 250 is provided with a cutout portion 250b having a shape corresponding to the ball introduction portion 554 in addition to the cutout portion 250a having a shape corresponding to the upward fluctuation winning device 28. The notch portion 250b is provided to allow the game ball to pass from the ball introduction portion 554 to the ball flow channel 552, particularly when the ball flow channel 552 is provided behind the plurality of light guide plates of the light guide plate unit 250. The LED substrates 254 and 255 of the light guide plate unit 250 are divided into a plurality of left and right substrates by notches.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the ball introducing portion 554 of the inclined shelf portion 540 according to the second embodiment. The ball introduction part 554 of the inclined shelf part 540 is composed of a recessed part 554a that is recessed downward from a part of the upper surface of the second shelf part 542, and a part of the upper surface of the second shelf part 542 is recessed downward. It is formed in the form. The sphere introduction part 554 is provided with a communication port 556 that communicates with the sphere channel 552 corresponding to the end (right end) on the second channel 545 side. The bottom portion 562 of the sphere introduction portion 554 is inclined downward toward the communication port 556 located at the right end (downstream end) of the sphere introduction portion 554 over the entire region. The communication port 556 is opened at the flange portion 212, but may be opened at the bottom portion 562 of the ball introduction portion 554. Here, the communication port 556 is an out port for leading a game ball to the outside of the game area 22. Further, a ball sensor may be provided at the communication port 556, and the number of game balls passing through the communication port 556 during the big hit round may be counted.

  In addition, a front decorative plate 558 and a buffer member 560 are attached to the ball introducing portion 554 from the front. The buffer member 560 is provided at the right end (downstream end) on the second flow path 545 side in the recess 554a, and is made of a soft elastic material such as rubber or urethane. The buffer member 560 softens the impact that the game ball that has flowed into the ball introduction portion 554 and descended the bottom portion 562 onto the right end (downstream end) of the recess portion 554a, and prevents the armor portion 211a from being damaged. The upper end portion of the buffer member 560 is set at a position higher than the upper end of the armor portion 211 a located adjacent to the buffer member 560 and located downstream. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping out from the recess portion 554a of the ball introduction portion 554 to the inclined shelf portion 540 on the second flow path 545 side.

  The front decorative plate 558 (decorative member) is transparent overall, but has a decoration on the front surface, making it difficult to visually recognize the communication port 556 from the front. The front decoration plate 558 sandwiches the buffer member 560 with the flange portion 212. Note that the front decoration plate 558 may be formed integrally with the armor portion 211a.

  FIG. 90 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the ball introduction portion 554 of the game board 20 according to the second embodiment. The substantially circular guide rail 22a (partition member) becomes the outer edge of the game area 22 and partitions the game area 22, but the upper right part of the armor portion 211a and the upper right part of the guide rail 22a (partition member) are substantially the same shape (offset shape). ), And are arranged to face each other with their positions shifted. Thereby, a narrow narrow channel 563 is formed between the upper right portion of the armor portion 211a and the upper right portion of the guide rail 22a. The width of the narrow channel 563 (for example, W1-W5 in FIG. 90) is an interval (for example, the diameter of the game ball is 11 millimeters (millimeters)) that one game ball can pass but two cannot pass. In contrast, the width of the narrow channel 563 is set to 15 mm. As a result, simultaneous winning in the variable winning portion by the surplus counting method becomes difficult. And the 2nd shelf part 542 of the inclination shelf part 540 of the armor part 211a opposes the upper side part 564 which is an upper part of the guide rail 22a, and is arrange | positioned under the upper side part 564. FIG. An interval between the second shelf portion 542 and the upper side portion 564 (for example, W1 and W2 in FIG. 90) is also set to an interval where one game ball can pass but not two.

  Of the narrow channels 563, a channel between the second shelf 542 and the upper side 564 (left side of a first shoulder 568 of a guide rail 22a described later) is referred to as an upper channel (upstream channel) 563a. The other part (right side of a first shoulder 568 of a guide rail 22a described later) is called a right channel (downstream channel) 563b. The right channel 563b may be included in a part of the second channel 545 described above.

  The depth X of the recess 554a constituting the sphere introduction part 554 is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 12 mm). Further, the interval Y between the upper side portion 564 of the guide rail 22a and the bottom portion 562 (that is, the deepest portion) of the hollow portion 554a is set to a width (for example, 27 mm) wider than twice the diameter of the game ball. The recessed portion 554a is located closer to the second flow path 545 in the second shelf portion 542, and has a lateral width (for example, 46 mm) that exceeds twice the diameter of the game ball. Also, the communication port 556 has a lateral width larger than twice the diameter of the sphere (for example, 23 mm). Therefore, no clogging or ball clogging occurs at the recess 554a or the communication port 556.

  FIG. 91 is an enlarged front view showing a game ball flowing down in the upper part of the game area 22 by hitting right. In the upper flow path 563a of the narrow flow paths 563, the hit ball (the game ball having a high speed) that has moved while being in contact with the guide rail 22a along the guide rail 22a (partition member) hits the buffer member 566. The second flow path 545 (the right flow path 563b) flows down.

  The buffer member 566 is located between the first shoulder portion 568 and the bent portion 572 of the guide rail 22a and is attached to the guide rail 22a or formed as a part of the guide rail 22a. The guide rail 22a has a first shoulder portion 568 and a second shoulder portion 570 that protrude outward from the upstream side in the upper right portion, and is recessed inwardly between the first shoulder portion 568 and the second shoulder portion 570. It has a bent portion 572. The buffer member 566 is made of a soft elastic material such as rubber or urethane, and softens the impact of the game ball that has passed through the first shoulder 568 on the guide rail 22a, thereby preventing the guide rail 22a from being damaged.

  Of the narrow channel 563, in the upper channel 563a, a game ball separated from the guide rail 22a (partition member), or a weakly hit ball rolling on the upper surface of the second shelf 542 (inclined shelf 540) of the armor portion 211a (A game ball having a low speed) enters the ball introduction portion 554, collides with the buffer member 560, and flows into the communication port 556. Note that the game ball that has flowed into the communication port 556 (here, the out port) is discharged out of the game board via the ball channel 552. The spherical flow path 552 is set so as to pass behind the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252), but may be transparent so that the inside can be visually recognized. You may make it pass in front of.

  FIG. 92 is an enlarged front view showing a state in which a plurality of game balls flow down in the upper part of the game area 22 by hitting right. In the surplus counting method, a weak hit ball (slow game ball) is followed by a strong hit ball (fast game ball) to narrow the flow interval between multiple game balls (strong hit ball and weak hit ball). There is a case. As shown in FIG. 92, as a weak hit ball, a strong hit that has moved in contact with the guide rail 22 a against a game ball that is separated from the guide rail 22 a or a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined shelf 540. A sphere may collide. In this case, both the weak hit ball and the strong hit game ball may enter the ball introducing portion 554. As described above, the width of the ball introducing portion 554 and the width of the communication port 556 are the same as those of the game ball. Since it is more than twice the diameter, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that ball clogging occurs.

  In addition, at least the weak hit ball of the weak hit ball and the strong hit ball is removed from the inclined shelf portion 540 by the ball introducing portion 554, and therefore, the game ball exceeding the count upper limit with respect to the lower or upper fluctuation winning devices 27 and 28 is placed. The surplus counting method for winning a prize becomes difficult. In addition, since the weak hit ball enters the ball introduction part 554 (departs from the movement trajectory of the strong hit ball) and flows into the communication port 556 (here, the outlet), the subsequent hit ball (strong hit) In some cases, the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the weakly hit ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered due to the occurrence of ball clogging or ball play.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a modification in which the spherical channel 552 is used as a warp channel. That is, in the above description, the case where the communication port 556 is used as an out port and the spherical channel 552 is an out ball channel has been described. However, the spherical channel 552 is used as a warp channel, and the communication port 556 is a warp flow. It may be the entrance to the road.

  A communication port 556 serving as an inlet to the warp channel opens to a bottom portion 562 at the downstream end of the ball introduction portion 554. The spherical flow path 552 as a warp flow path is transparent, and is provided along the armor part 211a beside the armor part 211a. Here, the game ball is guided to the stage unit 240 by passing through the front (front side) of the light guide plate. However, the ball flow path 552 may guide the game ball to the stage unit 240 through the rear (rear side) of the light guide plate. The ball outlet 552a of the ball flow path 552 is set at a position where the game ball that comes out of the ball outlet 552a does not win the variable winning portion (the lower variable winning device 27 or the upper variable winning device 28). Here, in particular, the ball outlet 552a is disposed on the right end of the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 so that the game ball flows into the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 of the stage unit 240. The game balls derived from the bowl-shaped rolling part 243 to the game area are set so as not to win the variable winning part.

〔Light guide plate〕
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a light guide plate (front light guide plate 251 and rear light guide plate 252) according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 94A is a diagram showing a light emitting region (light emission pattern) of the front light guide plate 251. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a light emitting region (light emitting pattern) of the rear light guide plate 252.

  Similarly to FIG. 9, the light guide plate is disposed so as to cover the entire area of the opening (display window) 211 b with the end face facing the rear of the frame portion 211, and the light emitting region (light emitting pattern) is a light source (LED The main display screen 32 can be seen through in a normal state where light is not emitted by the light guide plate light emitting member. Therefore, the presence of the light guide plate can be made difficult to recognize, and the player can be surprised when the light emission effect of the light guide plate is performed.

  Similarly to FIG. 18, the LED substrate 254 (mounting substrate) is disposed at the edge of the light guide plate with the front and back facing forward and backward behind the frame portion 211. An LED 256 (frame light emitting member) for causing the frame portion 211 to emit light is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 254, and an LED 257 (light guide plate light emitting member) for causing the light guide plate to emit light is mounted on the back surface of the LED substrate 254. By mounting the frame light emitting member on the front side of one substrate and the light guide plate light emitting member on the rear side, components can be omitted, and the light from the LED 256 and the light from the LED 257 are hardly mixed.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the front light guide plate 251 has a plurality of linear light emitting areas 251c that emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern and a graphic light emitting area 251d having a predetermined graphic shape as the game progresses. It is formed. These light emitting areas are, for example, light scattering areas formed on the back surface of the front light guide plate 251 by laser uneven processing or a printed film. The figure light emitting area 251d has a non-light emitting area 251e inside. In the rear light guide plate 252 of FIG. 94 (B), a light emitting region (character region) 252a and light emitting regions 252b and 252c on which patterns emerge are formed as in the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the light emission pattern (that is, the shape of the light emission region) of the front light guide plate 251 is changed from that of the first embodiment, but the front side provided with the radial light emission pattern of FIG. A light guide plate provided with a linear light emission pattern as shown in FIG. 94 (A) may be disposed in front of the light guide plate 251 as an intermediate light guide plate. Moreover, the arrangement | positioning order before and behind when providing two or more light-guide plates may be what kind of form.

  FIG. 95 is a partial front view showing the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 95, in the gaming machine 1, the right side protruding portion 500 (frame side portion effect unit) and the light guide plate (front light guide plate 251 and rear light guide plate 252) are arranged side by side (the space is spaced). Or may be in a state where there is no space between them). The right flow path 563b (ball passage) is formed in the game board 20 so as to be positioned between the linear light emitting portion 506 (game effect device) of the right protruding portion 500 and the light guide plate. However, each linear light emission part 506 of the right side protrusion part 500 and the linear light emission area | region 251c of the front side light-guide plate 251 corresponding to this are arrange | positioned in the state which was located in a line with continuous. That is, one linear light emitting region 251c is located on an extension line in the longitudinal direction of one linear light emitting unit 506. Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting portion 506 has a mountain shape in which the protrusion amount decreases as it moves away from the center in the left-right direction, the sense of unity (continuity) between the linear light-emitting portion 506 and the linear light-emitting region 251c is emphasized. Can do.

  FIG. 96 is a partial front view showing Modification 1 of the gaming machine 1 of FIG. In this example, in the armor portion 211a of the center frame unit 210, an armor light emitting portion 575 is provided between the linear light emitting portion 506 and the linear light emitting region 251c. For example, the armor light emitting unit 575 can be configured by embedding LEDs in the armor unit 211a. Since the linear light emitting portion 506 of the right protrusion 500, the armor light emitting portion 575 of the armor portion 211a, and the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251 are continuously arranged in a straight line, the linear light emitting portion 506 and the line A sense of unity with the light-emitting region 251c increases.

  FIG. 97 is a partial front view showing a second modification to the gaming machine 1 of FIG. The transparent plate 5a of the glass frame 5 is a transparent member unit that is unitized in a state where two transparent members (transparent plates) are arranged on the front and rear sides. In this example, the transparent plate 5a is replaced with a front transparent member (acrylic). The rear transparent member (tempered glass) is used. Then, using the front transparent member as a light guide plate, the front transparent member is provided with a light emitting region (light emitting pattern) 576 that connects the linear light emitting portion 506 and the linear light emitting region 251c and complements them. The light emitting region 576 of the transparent plate 5a is formed by uneven processing, a printed film, or the like, similar to the light emitting regions 252a, 252b, 252c and the linear light emitting region 251c described above. And the light emission area | region 576 of the transparent plate 5a light-emits with the light irradiated from LED provided in the glass frame 5. FIG.

  In this way, the linear light emitting portion 506 of the right protruding portion 500, the light emitting region 576 of the transparent plate 5a, and the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251 are arranged in a straight line. The light emitting area 576 is arranged in front of the right channel 563b as a supplementary effect part, and complements the related effect executed in relation to the linear light emitting part 506 (game effect device) and the light guide plate. Therefore, while the linear light-emitting portion 506 and the linear light-emitting region 251c appear to be continuous, a stereoscopic effect in the front-rear direction can be given, and the effect of production is enhanced.

  FIG. 98 is a partial front view showing a third modification to the gaming machine 1 of FIG. In this example, both the armor light-emitting part 575 of the armor part 211a of Modification 1 and the light-emitting area 576 of the transparent plate 5a of Modification 2 are provided between the linear light-emitting part 506 and the linear light-emitting area 251c. Therefore, while the linear light-emitting portion 506 and the linear light-emitting region 251c appear to be continuous, a stereoscopic effect in the front-rear direction can be given, and the effect of production is enhanced.

  FIG. 99 is a partial front view showing Modification 4 to the gaming machine 1 of FIG. In this example, the game board body is made of a transparent material made of resin (for example, an acrylic plate), and in addition to the armor light emitting part 575 of the armor part 211a of the modification 1 between the linear light emitting part 506 and the linear light emitting region 251c. Thus, a rear light emitting unit 577 is provided behind the right channel 563b. The linear light emitting unit 506, the armor light emitting unit 575, the rear light emitting unit 577, and the linear light emitting region 251c are arranged in a straight line. As a supplementary production unit, a rear light emitting unit 577 is arranged behind the right channel 563b and supplements a related production executed in association with the linear light emitting unit 506 (game production device) and the light guide plate. Visual recognition of the game ball flowing down the right channel 563b is not hindered, and the linear light emitting portion 506 and the linear light emitting region 251c appear to be continuous.

  As described above, in the modified examples of FIGS. 96 to 99, the supplementary effect parts (light emission region 576, rear light emission part 577, etc.) are arranged in front of or behind the right channel 563b, and the game effect device and the light guide plate And the related effects executed in association with each other.

[Fluctuation processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the changing process according to the second embodiment of this invention. The processing from S9001 to S9006 is the same as the processing from S4501 to S4506 of the changing processing of the first embodiment, and the processing from S9010 to S9020 is S4509 of the changing processing of the first embodiment. To S4519, the description is omitted.

  In S9005-S9009, the effect control device 150 sets the content of the notice effect (effect mode) corresponding to the result (big hit / loss) of the special figure change display game and the change effect pattern, but in S9007 and S9008, The accessory action setting process (FIG. 101) and the light guide plate effect setting process (FIG. 103) different from S4507 and S4508 of the first embodiment are executed. In S9009, a destination notice effect setting process (FIG. 111) described later is executed. Furthermore, in S9021, a destination notice effect execution process for executing the set destination notice effect is performed.

[Functional action setting process]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an accessory operation setting process (S9007 in FIG. 100) according to the second embodiment of this invention.

  The effect control device 150 first performs a left actor action determination process for determining the action of the effect movable member 311 (particularly the rotation action (moving action) and the light emission action) as the left accessory (S9101). In the left character action determination process, whether or not the left character (the production movable member 311) is to be operated is determined by lottery with the action probability selected from the selection table of FIG. 102 (left character action probability, winning rate of lottery). To do. Also, here, depending on the result of the big hit / loss of the special figure fluctuation display game and the expectation (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the rotation position (position of the movement destination) of the left actor is also May be determined. For example, the rotation position (movement destination position) of the left actor is determined such that the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure variation display game is, the larger the left actor rotates (moves). . The process of S9101 constitutes a destination determination unit.

  The action probabilities in the selection table in FIG. 102 are set based on the result (big hit / loss) of the current special figure fluctuation display game (the fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation. Is selected from the result of this special figure fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern of the variation is set in S9004, and the result of the special diagram variation display game is, for example, a variation start command (a symbol information command indicating a stop symbol in the special diagram variation display game, a variation in the special diagram variation display game) For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a pattern).

  The higher the expectation that will be a big hit (special result), the higher the probability that the left actor will move. Also, if this special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the left actor will be compared to the case of a loss. The operation probability is high. In the example of FIG. 102, the variation patterns include a normal variation pattern (variation pattern without reach), a normal reach variation pattern, a long reach variation pattern, an SP1 reach variation pattern, an SP2 reach variation pattern, and an SP3 reach variation pattern. The reliability or expectation that is a big hit (special result) increases.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to perform the operation of the left accessory (S9102). When the operation of the left accessory is not executed (the result of S9102 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9104.

  When performing the action of the left accessory (the result of S9102 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 performs the operation timing determination process (S9103) for determining the operation timing of the left accessory, and then the process of S9104 Proceed to Here, the turning action timing of the left accessory is one or a plurality of timings at the start of fluctuation, at the time of SP reach development, and at the final phase of the fluctuation, and is a fluctuation pattern having a high expectation level as a big hit. The rotation operation is executed at a plurality of timings.

  Next, the effect control device 150 performs a right accessory operation determination process for determining the operation (particularly the rotation operation (movement operation) and the light emission operation) of the sorting rotator 321 as the right accessory (S9104). In the right actor action determination process, whether or not to operate the right actor (sorting rotating body 321) with the action probability action probability selected from the selection table in FIG. 102 (right actor action probability, winning rate of lottery). Determined by lottery. The higher the expectation that will be a big hit, the higher the right actor action probability, and the special figure fluctuation display game this time will have a higher right action action probability than the out-of-game. Become. Here, the rotation position (moving destination position) of the right actor is also determined according to the result of the big hit / loss of the special figure fluctuation display game and the expectation (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure fluctuation display game. It's okay. For example, the rotation position (movement destination position) of the right actor is determined such that the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot of the special figure variation display game is, the larger the right actor rotates (moves). . The process of S9104 constitutes a destination determination unit.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to perform the action of the right accessory (S9105). When the action of the right accessory is not executed (the result of S9105 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9107.

  When executing the action of the right accessory (the result of S9105 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 performs the operation timing determination process (S9106) for determining the operation timing of the right accessory, and then the process of S9107 Proceed to Here, the moving action timing of the right accessory is one timing or a plurality of timings at the start of variation, at the time of SP reach development, and at the final phase of the variation, and the variation pattern having a higher expectation level that is a big hit. The moving operation is executed at a plurality of timings.

  Next, the production control device 150 performs a frame accessory operation determination process for determining the operation of the right protrusion 500 as a frame accessory (S9107). Here, the operation of the frame accessory is, in particular, the moving operation of the movable member 513 and the light emitting operations of the linear light emitting unit 506 and the level light emitting unit 517. In the frame accessory operation determination process, whether or not to operate the frame accessory (right side protruding portion 500) is determined by lottery with the operation probability selected from the selection table in FIG. 102 (frame accessory operation probability, winning rate of lottery). To do. The higher the expectation that will be a big hit, the higher the probability that the frame actor will move. In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game of this time is a big hit, it will be a frame accessory movement compared to the case of a loss. The probability is high.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to perform the operation of the frame accessory (S9108). When the operation of the frame accessory is not executed (the result of S9108 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9111.

  When executing the operation of the frame accessory (the result of S9108 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines the movement operation timing of the movable member 513 of the frame accessory, the linear light emitting unit 506, and the level light emitting unit 517. An operation timing determination process (S9109) for determining the light emission operation timing is performed. Subsequently, an operation mode determination process for determining the light emission operation mode of the linear light emitting unit 506 and the level light emitting unit 517, the movement mode of the movable member 513, and the like is performed (S9110), and then the process proceeds to S9111. As will be described later, the light emission operation modes include forward interlock light emission, operation interlock light emission, and reverse interlock light emission. Here, the movement operation timing or the light emission operation timing is one timing or a plurality of timings at the start of variation, at the time of SP reach development, and at the final phase of the variation, and the variation pattern having a high expectation level that is a big hit. The moving operation is executed at a plurality of timings. Next, the production control device 150 sets execution of the production operations of the left combination, right combination, and frame combination determined in S9101 to S9110 (for example, sets an execution flag) (S9111).

  The effect control device 150 performs the accessory action effect by the left accessory, the right accessory, and the frame accessory during the variable display game based on the operation timing and the operation mode set in the accessory operation setting process. This is executed in the operation effect execution process (S9019). Further, in a frame accessory such as a motor 315 that rotates the left accessory, a motor 330 that rotates the right accessory, a drive source 515 of the movable member 513, and the like, a board effect device 172, a frame effect device 173, etc. The decoration device (frame decoration device 171) including the LED of the linear light emission unit 506, the level light emission unit 517, and the movable member 513 is controlled (S3713, S3714).

[Light guide plate effect setting processing]
Next, operation control of the light guide plate unit 250 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure of light guide plate effect setting processing (S9008 in FIG. 100) according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a light emission mode selection table according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the light emission mode selection table 1, (B) shows the light emission mode selection table 2, and (C () Is a light emission mode selection table 3, (D) is a light emission mode selection table 4, and (E) is a light emission mode selection table 5. Lottery is performed at the selection rate (%) (distribution rate) shown in each of these light emission mode selection tables, and the light emission modes of the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 can be determined (selected).

  The configuration of the front light guide plate 251 of the second embodiment (FIG. 94A) is different from the configuration of the front light guide plate 251 of the first embodiment (FIG. 19A), but FIG. (A), (B), (C), and (E) respectively show the radial region emission of the radial emission region 251a of FIGS. 54 (A), (B), (C), and (D), and the graphic emission region of the graphic emission region 251d. It is replaced with light emission.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the left and right actors operate (S9201). When the left and right actors operate (the result of S9201 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 1 shown in FIG. A mode is determined (S9202). For example, the light emission mode in which only the graphic light emitting region 251d emits light is selected with a probability of 30%. Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (for example, sets an execution flag) (S9211), and ends this process.

  When the left and right combination does not operate (the result of S9201 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the left combination (effect movable member 311) operates (S9203).

  When the left accessory operates (the result of S9203 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 2 shown in FIG. A mode is determined (S9204). For example, a light emission mode in which only the graphic light emitting region 251d emits light is selected with a probability of 7%. Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S9211), and ends this process.

  When the left accessory does not operate (the result of S9203 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the right accessory (sorting rotating body 321) operates (S9205).

  When the right accessory operates (the result of S9205 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 3 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S9206). For example, the light emission mode in which only the graphic light emitting region 251d emits light is selected with a probability of 10%. Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S9211), and ends this process.

  When the right combination does not operate (the result of S9205 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the frame combination (right protruding portion 500) operates (S9207).

  When the frame accessory operates (the result of S9207 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 4 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S9208). In the example of the light emission mode selection table 4, the linear light emission region 251c is set to emit 100%. Accordingly, when the frame accessory operates, the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251 is always set to a predetermined value corresponding to any one of the forward interlocking light emission, the operation interlocking light emission, and the reverse interlocking light emission determined in S9110. It emits light at the timing. Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S9211), and ends this process.

  When the frame accessory does not operate (the result of S9207 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not to execute a specific variation pattern (for example, a long reach variation pattern or an SP reach variation pattern). (S9209).

  When executing the specific variation pattern (the result of S9209 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 emits light from the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 from the light emission mode selection table 5 shown in FIG. An aspect is determined (S9210). For example, a light emission mode in which only the graphic light emitting region 251d emits light is selected with a probability of 3%. Thereafter, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the determined light emission effect (S9211), and ends this process.

  When the specific effect pattern is not executed (the result of S9209 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  The effect control device 150 executes the light guide plate effect by the front light guide plate 251 and the rear light guide plate 252 in the light guide plate effect execution process (S9020) based on the light emission mode set in the light guide plate effect setting process. A decoration device (panel decoration device 170) such as a light guide plate light-emitting member (ie, LED 256-258) is controlled (S3713).

  Note that the accessory action setting process (S9007) in FIG. 101 and the accessory action effect execution process (S9019) in FIG. 100 execute an action effect that operates the right protrusion 500 (game effect device) in a predetermined manner. This constitutes an operation effect execution means capable of The light guide plate effect setting process (S9008) in FIG. 103 and the light guide plate effect execution process (S9020) in FIG. 100 are capable of executing a light emission effect execution unit that can emit a light emission pattern of the light guide plate in a predetermined manner. Configure. The operation mode determination process (S9110) in FIG. 101 and the processes in S9207 and S9208 in FIG. 103 are related effects (forward-linked light emission (first related effect)) and operations mutually related to the operation effect execution means and the light emission effect execution means. Related effect execution means capable of executing linked light emission, reverse linked light emission (second related effect, etc.) is configured.

[Example of lighting effect]
Next, referring to FIG. 105 to FIG. 110, forward interlocking light emission, operation interlocking light emission, which is performed in cooperation (interlocking) by the frame accessory (that is, the right protrusion 500) and the light guide plate (particularly the front light guide plate 251), A light emission effect example related to reverse interlocking light emission will be described. In this example of the light emission effect, an effect is provided across the game effect device provided on the glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 5 (particularly, the linear light emission part 506 of the right protrusion 500) and the light guide plate provided on the game board 20. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting performance. In addition, since the light emission pattern of the front light guide plate 251 arranged closest to the light guide plate emits light, the distance in the front-rear direction between the game effect device and the light emission pattern of the light guide plate is shortened, and the effect of the game effect device. The relevance of the light guide plate is increased.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a light emission effect example 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention in chronological order. Light emission effect example 1 relates to operation-linked light emission. In the operation-linked light emission of this example, the movable member 513 of the frame accessory operates (moves) so as to interlock with the linear light emitting portion 506, the level light emitting portion 517, and the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251. Therefore, the production effect is enhanced and the interest of the game is improved. First, in (A), the level light emission part 517 of a frame accessory lights up sequentially from the bottom. In (B), the movable member 513 of the frame accessory emits light and moves from the lower initial position to the upper operation position. Next, in (C), the linear light emitting unit 506 serving as a frame accessory emits light, and the level light emitting unit 517 is turned off. Then, in (D), while the linear light emission area | region 251c (linear light emission pattern) of the front side light-guide plate 251 light-emits, the movable member 513 of a frame accessory moves to the downward initial position, and is extinguished.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the effect control device 150 controls the panel decoration device 170 (LED 256-258 of the light guide plate) via the panel decoration LED control circuit 161, and sets the linear light emitting region 251c (linear light emitting pattern). Make it emit light. As shown in FIG. 24, the effect control device 150 controls the frame decoration device 171 (the linear light emitting unit 506 of the frame accessory, the level light emitting unit 517, and the LED of the movable member 513) via the frame decoration LED control circuit 162. Then, the linear light emitting unit 506, the level light emitting unit 517, and the movable member 513 are caused to emit light.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a light emission effect example 2 according to the second embodiment of this invention in chronological order. Light emission effect example 2 relates to forward interlocking light emission. In the forward interlocking light emission of this example, light is emitted so that the linear light emitting portion 506 of the frame accessory and the linear light emitting area 251c of the front light guide plate 251 are interlocked, so that the production effect is enhanced and the interest of the game is improved. First, in (A), the linear light-emitting portion 506 of the frame accessory emits light. Next, in (B), the linear light emitting region 251c (linear light emitting pattern) of the front light guide plate 251 emits light after the linear light emitting portion 506 serving as a frame accessory. Subsequently, in (C), the linear light emitting portion 506 of the frame accessory is turned off.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a light-emitting effect example 3 according to the second embodiment of the present invention in chronological order. Light emission effect example 3 relates to reverse interlocking light emission. In the reverse interlocking light emission of this example, the linear light emitting portion 506 of the frame accessory and the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251 emit light so that they are interlocked in the reverse order to the forward interlocking light emission, so that the production effect is achieved. Increasing the interest of the game. First, in (A), the linear light emission area | region 251c (linear light emission pattern) of the front side light-guide plate 251 light-emits. Next, in (B), the linear light emitting part 506 serving as a frame accessory emits light after the linear light emitting region 251c. Subsequently, in (C), the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251 is turned off.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a light-emitting effect example 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention in chronological order. The light emission effect example 4 is an effect that associates the forward interlocking light emission and the re-variation of the special decoration pattern (for example, a scene in which the normal reach failure shifts to the long reach effect or the SP reach effect). Since the decorative special symbol (medium symbol) temporarily stopped at the portion corresponding to the tip portion of the linear light emitting region 251c is re-varied in the above, the production effect is enhanced and the interest of the game is improved. In the light emission effect example 1-3 described above, a light emission effect (operation-linked light emission, forward-linked light emission, and reverse-linked light emission) is performed while the decoration special symbol on the main display screen 32 is changing. During the temporary stop of the special symbol (or in accordance with the temporary stop), forward interlocking light emission is performed.

  First, in FIG. 108 (A), after the reach has occurred, the linear light-emitting portion 506 of the frame accessory emits light after the middle symbol of the decorative special symbol has come off and temporarily stopped at the symbol. Note that the linear light emitting unit 506 may emit light along with the light emission of the linear light emitting unit 506 or the level light emitting unit 517 and the operation of the movable member 513. The reach here stops at the decorative special symbol that can generate a special result mode (big hit) for some of the decorative special symbols (here, the left symbol “1” and the right symbol “1”). However, the decoration special symbol (medium symbol) that stops last is in a state of fluctuation.

  Next, in FIG. 108 (B), the linear light emitting area 251c (linear light emitting pattern) of the front light guide plate 251 emits light after the linear light emitting portion 506, destroying the middle symbol on the main display screen 32. Such an effect (effect of starting re-variation) is performed. Subsequently, in FIG. 108 (C), the medium symbol that has been temporarily stopped changes again. Once the special symbol variation display game is dismissed, the middle symbols revariate, so that the player can be expected to win the special symbol variation display game.

  One linear light emitting region 251c is provided corresponding to each symbol, and the symbol corresponding to the emitted linear light emitting region 251c is changed again (in other words, the linear light emitting region corresponding to the symbol to be changed again). 251c may emit light). In addition, as a quasi-continuous effect that simulates multiple special-figure display games, the intermediate symbol temporarily stops multiple times during a single special-figure display game, and reappears every time it is temporarily stopped as described above. (Direction of re-variation start) may be performed. In this case, the temporarily stopped middle symbol may be a dedicated pseudo-continuous symbol that is not stopped and displayed in a normal variable display game.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a light-emitting effect example 5 of the second embodiment of the present invention in chronological order. Light emission effect example 5 is an effect that associates the reverse interlocking light emission with the character effect on the main display screen 32, and the character effect is performed together with the reverse interlocking light emission. Thereby, the production effect is enhanced and the interest of the game is improved.

  First, in FIG. 109 (A), after the transition of the development effect to SP reach, the variation of the decorative special symbol moves to the sub display screen 35 of the second display 34, and the main of the first display (main display device) 31 is changed. On the display screen 32, a display effect in which the effect character operates is performed. Next, in FIG. 109 (B), the linear light emitting region 251c of the front light guide plate 251 emits light corresponding to the effect character and its action (effect). Subsequently, in FIG. 109 (C), the linear light-emitting portion 506 serving as the frame accessory emits light after the linear light-emitting region 251c.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a light emission effect example 6 according to the second embodiment of the present invention in chronological order. The light emission effect example 6 is an effect that associates the operation of the effect operation unit 15 (effect button), the forward interlocking light emission, and the re-variation of the special decoration pattern. The decoration special symbol is re-varied on the screen 32 or the like. Thereby, the production effect is enhanced and the interest of the game is improved.

  First, in FIG. 110 (A), after the occurrence of reach, an operation promotion image (operation promotion display) that prompts the player to operate the effect operation unit 15 is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily disengaged at the off symbol. Here, the operation promotion image is displayed on the sub display screen 35 of the second display 34, but may be displayed on the main display screen 32 of the first display 31. In addition, the operation promotion image includes, for example, a graphic imitating the character display of “PUSH” and the effect operation unit 15. In step S9004, it is possible to set a variation effect pattern so that an operation promotion image is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped after the occurrence of reach.

  When the effect operation unit 15 is operated within the operation effective period after the display of the operation promotion image is started, the effect control device 150 causes the linear light emitting unit 506 to emit light in FIG. 110 (B). The linear light emitting unit 506 may emit light with the light emission of the level light emitting unit 517 and the operation of the movable member 513. The operation of the effect operation unit 15 is detected by an effect button input process (S3706).

  Next, in FIG. 110C, the linear light emitting area 251 c (linear light emitting pattern) of the front light guide plate 251 emits light after the linear light emitting portion 506, and the middle symbol is destroyed on the main display screen 32. Such an effect (effect of starting re-variation) is performed. Subsequently, in FIG. 110 (D), the medium symbol that has been temporarily stopped changes again.

  Note that, in the light emission effect example 6, even when the operation of the effect operation unit 15 is not performed within the operation effective period, the linear light emitting unit 506 or the linear light emitting region 251c may be caused to emit light, or the linear light emitting unit 506 and the linear light emitting unit 506 The middle symbol may be changed again without the light emission of the light emitting region 251c.

  Moreover, it is possible to combine some of the effects of the above-described light emission effects Example 1-6 or not to perform some effects. For example, in the light emission effect example 6, instead of the forward linked light emission, the operation linked light emission and the reverse linked light emission of the light emission effect example 1 may be performed. For example, in the light emission effect example 6, instead of the forward interlocking light emission, the reverse interlocking light emission of the light emission effect example 3 may be performed so that the decoration special symbol is not changed again. In this case, the effect operation unit 15 Performs reverse interlocking flash when there is an operation. Further, for example, in the light emission effect example 6, instead of the forward interlocking light emission, the character effect of the light emission effect example 5 and the reverse interlocking light emission may be performed so as not to perform the re-variation of the decorative special symbol. When the production operation unit 15 is operated, the character production and the reverse interlocking light emission are performed.

  When the armor light emitting portion 575, the light emitting region 576 of the transparent plate 5a, and the rear light emitting portion 577 are provided as in the above-described modified example 1-4 (FIGS. 96 to 99), linear light emission is performed in the forward interlocking light emission. Following the unit 506, the armor light emitting unit 575, the light emitting region 576, and the rear light emitting unit 577 each emit light, and then the linear light emitting region 251c emits light. In the reverse interlocking light emission, after the linear light emitting region 251c, the armor light emitting unit 575, the light emitting region 576, and the rear light emitting unit 577 each emit light, and then the linear light emitting unit 506 emits light. The effect control device 150 can control the light emission of the LEDs of the armor light emitting unit 575, the light emitting region 576, and the rear light emitting unit 577 included in the panel decoration device 170 via the panel decoration LED control circuit 161.

[Destination notice effect setting process]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a procedure of destination notice effect setting processing (S9009 in FIG. 100) according to the second embodiment of this invention. In the destination announcement effect setting process, the destination of the left accessory (effect movable member 311), the right accessory (distribution rotating body 321), and the sub display device (second display device) 34 as the effect members, It is possible to set a destination notice effect that is displayed on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31 (first display) with a destination notice image to give a notice. Note that the destination notice effect not only has a function of notifying the destination of the production member, but also provides a function of a notice of movement for notifying that the production member moves or which production member of the plurality of production members moves. It can be said that it has a function of moving object notice.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the left accessory operates, that is, whether or not to execute a movement effect (S9301). Whether or not the left accessory will operate has already been determined in the determination in S9102 of the accessory operation setting process of FIG. When the left actor works (the result of S9301 is “Y”), the process proceeds to S9304.

  When the left accessory does not operate (the result of S9301 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether the right accessory operates, that is, whether to execute the moving effect (S9302). Whether or not the right accessory operates is already determined in the determination in S9105 of the accessory operation setting process of FIG. When the right actor operates (the result of S9302 is “Y”), the process proceeds to S9304.

  When the right accessory does not operate (the result of S9302 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the sub display device 34 operates (here, the descending operation), that is, whether or not to execute the moving effect. Is determined (S9303). Whether or not the sub display device 34 (second display device) operates has already been determined in the determination in S4606 of the display device operation setting process of FIG. When it is determined that the sub display device 34 does not operate (the result of S9303 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9316 described later.

  When any of the left accessory, the right accessory, and the sub display device 34 operates (the result of any of S9301, S9302, and S9303 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 displays the destination notice effect. It is determined whether to execute or not (S9304, S9305). For example, whether or not to execute the destination notice effect may be determined by lottery, or may be determined according to the degree of expectation of the variation (effect) pattern set in S9004. The destination notice effect may be executed when the expectation of the variation pattern is high. When the destination notice effect is not executed (the result of S9305 is “Y”), the current process is terminated.

  When the destination notice effect is executed (the result of S9305 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 moves any one of the operating left accessory, right accessory, and sub display device 34. It is determined as an advance notice target (S9306). For example, the notice target may be determined by lottery. Here, it is also possible to determine all the operating objects that operate among the left actor, the right actor, and the sub display device 34 as the subject of the notice, and perform the destination notice for all the action objects. Further, the number of objects to be notified may be determined, a part of the moving object may be determined as the object to be notified, and the moving destination may be notified to a part of the operating object.

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the advance notice of the destination notice is the sub display device 34 (S9307). When the advance notice target is the sub display device 34 (the result of S9307 is “Y”), the process proceeds to S9314 described later. When the advance notice target is not the sub display device 34 (the result of S9307 is “N”), a normal advance notice pattern is set according to the destination of the action object (the advance notice object) (S9308). That is, a first notice effect is displayed in which a notice image is displayed on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31 in an area corresponding to the position of the movement target of the notice object. Thereby, it becomes easy to understand to which position the moving object (effect member) moves.

  For example, as the destination notice, a destination notice image indicating the action object is displayed in correspondence with the action object (production member) in the area corresponding to the position of the move destination. The destination notice image is an image simulating at least a part of the shape of the action object to be noticed, such as an image representing the outline (outer shape) of the action object. If it does in this way, it will become easy to understand which operation object (effect member) the notice effect is intended.

  Next, the production control device 150 determines whether or not the advance notice of the destination notice is a right accessory (S9309). When the advance notice of the destination notice is not the right role (the result of S9309 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9319. When the advance notice target of the destination notice is the right role (the result of S9309 is “Y”), the presence / absence of contradictory notice (contradictory notice effect) is determined and determined (S9310, S9311). Here, for example, it is determined by lottery so that a contradiction notice occurs with a lottery probability (winning probability) of 10%. Next, when there is no contradiction notice (the result of S9311 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9319.

  When there is a contradiction notice (the result of S9311 is “Y”), the production control device 150 replaces the contradiction notice pattern different from the actual movement destination of the action object (notice object) with the normal notice pattern. (S9312). That is, the second notice effect is displayed in which the notice image is displayed on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31 in an area corresponding to a position different from the actual movement destination of the action object (notice object) to be noticed.

  On the other hand, when the notice target is the sub display device 34 (the result of S9307 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines and determines whether or not there is a notice of the display content of the sub display screen 35 (display content notice). (S9313, S9314). The display content notice is a notice on the main display screen 32 of the display contents displayed on the sub display screen 35. Here, for example, the determination is made by lottery so that the display content of the sub display screen 35 is notified with a lottery probability (winning probability) of 20%. Note that the notice of the display content of the sub display screen 35 may be generated with higher probability in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  When there is no display content advance notice (display content advance notice) (result of S9314 is “N”), the effect control device 150 sets a normal advance notice pattern according to the destination of the sub display device 34 that is the advance notice object. (S9308). When there is a display content advance notice (display content advance notice) (the result of S9314 is “Y”), a special advance notice pattern including a destination of the sub display device 34 and a display content advance notice is set (S9315).

  When it is determined that the sub display device 34 does not operate (the result of S9303 is “N”), none of the left accessory, the right accessory, and the sub display device 34 operate. In this case, Then, it is determined and determined whether or not to execute the gase move destination notice effect (S9316, S9317). The gaze destination announcement effect is a destination announcement effect that is executed on the main display screen 32 even when none of the left accessory, the right accessory, and the sub display device 34 operates and the movement effect is not executed. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to execute the gasse move destination notice effect.

  When executing a gasse movement destination notice effect (the result of S9317 is “Y”), a gasse notice pattern to be executed is determined from a plurality of notice patterns. If the gase move destination notice effect is not executed (the result of S9317 is “N”), the current process is terminated.

  Finally, the effect control device 150 sets execution of the destination notice effect (for example, sets an execution flag) with the notice pattern set in S9308, S9312, or S9315, S9318 (S9319). It should be noted that in S9319, an operation valid period for accepting an operation input for operating a motion object to be notified (notice object) after execution of the destination notification effect (may be during execution of the destination notification effect). May be set to display an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the effect operation unit 15 (effect button) during the operation effective period. In addition, when the production operation unit 15 is operated, the operation promotion image may be set to disappear even during the operation effective period.

  In the above-described destination notice effect setting process of FIG. 111, the contradiction notice is generated only for the right accessory. However, the contradiction notice is also generated for the left accessory and the sub display device 34. Also good. In addition, the contradiction notice is generated regardless of whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. However, the contradiction notice may be generated only when the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or miss. Good.

  FIG. 112 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the destination notice effect. This example shows a case where an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the effect operation unit 15 (effect button) is displayed. (A) is a timing chart when there is no operation of the production operation unit 15, and (B) is a timing chart when there is an operation of the production operation unit 15.

  In FIG. 112 (A), the destination notice effect set in S9319 is executed while the special figure change display game is being executed (during change). The operation valid period starts at or after the execution of the destination notice effect. The operation valid period is, for example, 3 seconds at the maximum. Note that after the execution of the destination notice effect, at least after the start of execution and after the end of execution. An operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the effect operation unit 15 (effect button) is displayed during the operation valid period. And if there is no operation of the production | presentation operation part 15 during the operation effective period, the notice object of a moving destination notice will be among the left combination, the right combination, and the sub-display device 34 with the expiration of the operation effective period (time up). The action (moving effect) of the action object is started (S9018, S9019).

  In FIG. 112 (B), the destination notice effect set in S9319 is executed while the special figure change display game is being executed (fluctuated), and the operation effective period starts after the destination notice effect is executed. And if there is operation of the production | presentation operation part 15 (production | presentation button) during the operation effective period, the display of an operation promotion image will be complete | finished earlier than the normal operation effective period (for example, 3 seconds) will be complete | finished, At the timing when the 15 operation is performed (the effect button is ON), the accessory operation (movement effect) of the operation object subject to the advance notice of the destination is started (S9018, S9019). In addition, since the timing when the operation of the accessory (the left accessory, the right accessory, and the sub display device 34) stops is determined in advance, the operation period of the accessory becomes longer as the presentation operation unit 15 is operated earlier. Although set, the operation may be performed for a certain period.

[Destination notice example 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, description will be given of a destination notice effect (move destination notice effect example 1) in a case where the notice target is the right accessory (sorting rotating body 321). With the destination announcement effect, the position of the destination is notified before the execution of the movement effect for the right role as the production member, so the progress of the game can be grasped (recognized) in advance, and the interest of the game can be improved. . It should be noted that the higher the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure variation display game, the greater the movement (rotation) of the right accessory (the sorting rotator 321).

  FIG. 113 shows, in chronological order, a destination notice effect (movement destination notice effect example 1-1) when the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure variation display game is medium to large. Here, the destination notice effect is performed after the occurrence of reach, but may be performed before the occurrence of reach.

  In FIG. 113 (A), the main display device 31 (first display) is displayed as the destination notice effect in the region corresponding to the first predetermined position where the right accessory (the sorting rotator 321) moves (rotates) to the maximum. The image (background image, symbol image, effect image, etc.) on which the destination notice image is displayed behind is displayed in a semi-transparent display on the main display screen 32. In addition, a light emission pattern (light emission region) is formed on the light guide plate (the front light guide plate 251 or the rear light guide plate 252) for displaying the destination notice image (indicating the destination of the moving object to be noticed). It is also possible to execute a destination notice effect by causing the light emission pattern to emit light.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 113 (B), an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 15 (effect button) is displayed on the sub display screen 35 of the sub display device 34 (second display). The operation promotion image may be displayed not on the sub display screen 35 but on the main display screen 32. Here, the operation promotion image is displayed after displaying the destination notice image, but may be displayed simultaneously with the destination notice image.

  Next, in FIG. 113 (C), the effect operation unit 15 is operated within the operation effective period, and the operation promotion image disappears after changing. When the effect operation unit 15 is operated, the action (movement) of the right accessory starts and the movement effect is executed. FIG. 113 (C) shows a case where the destination notice effect is a normal notice pattern (first notice effect), and the right accessory (distributed rotating body 321) moves to the first predetermined position corresponding to the destination notice. (Turn).

  If there is no operation of the effect operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, the operation promotion image disappears without change after the operation effective period elapses, and the movement (movement) of the right accessory starts and moves. Is executed. The destination notice image may be erased at a stage before the display of the operation promotion image, may be erased in accordance with the operation of the effect operation unit 15 or the movement of the right accessory, or the right accessory May be erased along with the return operation to return to the original position (initial position before movement). Thereafter, in FIG. 113 (D), the variable display of the decorative special symbol is reduced and moved to the end side of the main display screen 32, and the SP reach effect is developed.

  Instead of the case where the destination notice effect is a normal notice pattern as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the destination notice effect is a gaze destination notice effect (gase pattern) as shown in FIGS. 114 (A)-(C). In the case of a contradictory notice effect (contradiction pattern) or an expected up pattern, a moving effect may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (A), when the destination notice effect is a gasset destination notice effect (gasse pattern), even if the effect operation unit 15 is operated, the right accessory does not move, and the right accessory Is different from the notice. Thereafter, the effect on the main display screen 32 develops into a normal reach effect or a long reach effect. Since the destination announcement effect is executed even in the case where the movement effect is not executed in the Gase destination notification effect, the player is selected when the movement effect is performed at the position indicated by the destination notification in the normal notice pattern. Can be pleased.

  As shown in FIG. 114B, when the destination notice effect is a contradiction notice effect (contradiction pattern, second notice effect), the right actor moves, but moves to the position where the destination notice image is displayed. The return operation is performed without returning to the original position (initial position before the movement). In addition, you may perform the effect that the right design stopped in the reach state slips with the contradiction notice effect. Thereafter, the effect on the main display screen 32 develops into a normal reach effect or a long reach effect. At the time of FIG. 114 (B), the destination notice image disappears, but the movement until the right actor return operation starts so that it is easy to grasp that the notice and the actual action are inconsistent. A prior notice image may be displayed. In the contradictory notice effect, the interest is improved because a position different from the destination of the right actor (effect member) is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (C), when the destination announcement effect is an expected up pattern, the destination announcement is performed only for the right role. In the movement effect, the right role (distribution) is used as the direction member. Both the rotating body 321) and the left accessory (production movable member 311) move. Since more production members move than the number of destination notices (the number of destination notice images), the player can be surprised. Thereafter, the effect on the main display screen 32 develops into an SP reach effect.

  In addition, when the destination notice effect is an expected up pattern, an ambiguous notice effect may be performed whether the right role moves or the left role moves. That is, the destination notice image is not an image imitating the shape of at least a part of the right actor or the left actor, for example, by displaying text information such as “something moves toward the center of the screen”. It may be difficult to understand which operation object (production member) the production is intended for. In addition, a destination notice image may be displayed in an area corresponding to the middle of the position of the right actor's destination and the location of the left actor's destination. Since it is not possible to clearly grasp which effect member of the right hand or left hand moves, it is possible to improve the effect when the movement effect is actually performed.

  FIG. 115 shows, in chronological order, the destination notice effect (the destination notice effect example 1-2) when the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot of the special figure variation display game is medium. Here, the destination notice effect is performed after the occurrence of reach, but may be performed before the occurrence of reach.

  115 (A)-(C) are the same as FIGS. 113 (A)-(C), but the position where the right accessory (sorting rotating body 321) moves (turns) is the first predetermined value. It is a second predetermined position different from the position, and the movement (rotation) of the right accessory is smaller than in FIGS. 113 (A) to (C). Then, in the area corresponding to the second predetermined position, as a destination notice effect, an image (background image, image) in which the destination notice image is displayed backward on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31 (first display). The design image, the effect image, etc.) are displayed in a translucent display that can be seen through. 115 (D) following FIG. 115 (A)-(C), an effect is produced in which the right symbol slips and the variation starts (revaries).

  In addition, instead of the case where the destination notice effect is the normal notice pattern as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the destination notice effect is the gaze destination notice effect (gasse like FIG. 114 (A)-(C). Pattern), contradictory notice effect (contradiction pattern), and movement effect in the case of an expected up pattern may be performed.

[Destination advance notice example 2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, description will be given of a destination notice effect (move destination notice effect example 2) in the case where the subject of notice is a left accessory (effect movable member 311). With the destination notification effect, the position of the destination is notified about the left role as the effect member before the execution of the movement effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure variation display game, the greater the left role (the effect movable member 311) may move (turn).

  FIG. 116 shows, in chronological order, the destination notice effect when the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure variation display game is medium to large. Here, the destination notice effect is performed after the occurrence of reach, but may be performed before the occurrence of reach.

  In FIG. 116 (A), the main display device 31 (first display) is displayed as the destination notice effect in the region corresponding to the predetermined position (destination) where the left accessory (effect movable member 311) moves (rotates) to the maximum. The image (background image, symbol image, effect image, etc.) on which the destination notice image is displayed behind is displayed in a semi-transparent display on the main display screen 32. In addition, a light emission pattern (light emission region) is formed on the light guide plate (the front light guide plate 251 or the rear light guide plate 252) for displaying the destination notice image (indicating the destination of the moving object to be noticed). It is also possible to execute a destination notice effect by causing the light emission pattern to emit light.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 116 (B), an operation promotion image (operation suggestion image) that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 15 (effect button) is displayed on the sub display screen 35 of the sub display device 34 (second display). The The operation promotion image may be displayed not on the sub display screen 35 but on the main display screen 32. Here, the operation promotion image is displayed after displaying the destination notice image, but may be displayed simultaneously with the destination notice image.

  Next, in FIG. 116 (C), the effect operation unit 15 is operated within the operation effective period, and disappears after the operation promotion image is changed. When the effect operation unit 15 is operated, the operation (movement) of the left accessory starts and the movement effect is executed. FIG. 116C shows a case where the destination notice effect is a normal notice pattern, and the left accessory (effect movable member 311) moves (turns) to a predetermined position.

  If there is no operation of the effect operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, the operation promotion image disappears without change after the operation effective period elapses, and the operation (movement) of the left actor starts and moves. Is executed. The destination notice image may be erased at a stage before the display of the operation promotion image, may be erased in accordance with the operation of the effect operation unit 15 or the movement of the left accessory, or the left accessory May be erased along with the return operation to return to the original position (initial position before movement).

  Instead of the case where the destination notice effect is a normal notice pattern (FIG. 116 (C)), the destination notice effect is a gaze destination notice effect (gasse pattern), a contradictory notice effect (contradiction pattern), or an expected up pattern. In some cases, a moving effect may be performed.

[Destination notice example 3]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, description will be made on a destination notice effect (destination notice effect example 3) when the notice target is the sub display device 34 (second display). With the destination notice effect, the sub display device 34 as the effect member gives a notice of the position of the destination before execution of the move effect, so that the progress of the game can be grasped (recognized) in advance and the interest of the game is improved. it can. In addition, the sub display device 34 (second display) may move more as the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit of the special figure variation display game is larger.

  FIG. 117 shows the destination notice effect of the sub display device 34 in time series. Here, the destination notice effect is performed after the occurrence of reach, but may be performed before the occurrence of reach.

  In FIG. 117 (A), the main display device 31 (first display) has a main display as a destination notice effect in a region corresponding to a predetermined position (movement destination) where the sub display device 34 (second display) moves. An image (background image, symbol image, effect image, etc.) on which the destination image is displayed behind is displayed on the display screen 32 in a translucent display. Here, the outline of the sub display device 34 is displayed as the destination notice image. However, corresponding to the case where the result of S9314 is “N”, the display content displayed on the sub display screen 35 of the sub display device 34 is not notified. In addition, a light emission pattern (light emission region) is formed on the light guide plate (the front light guide plate 251 or the rear light guide plate 252) for displaying the destination notice image (indicating the destination of the moving object to be noticed). It is also possible to execute a destination notice effect by causing the light emission pattern to emit light.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 117 (B), an operation promotion image (operation suggestion image) that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 15 (effect button) is displayed on the main display screen 32. Here, the operation promotion image is displayed after displaying the destination notice image, but may be displayed simultaneously with the destination notice image. Further, the operation promotion image (operation suggestion image) may be displayed on the sub display screen 35 instead of the main display screen 32.

  Next, in FIG. 117 (C), there is an operation of the effect operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, and the operation promotion image disappears after changing. When the effect operation unit 15 is operated, the operation (movement) of the sub display device 34 is started and the movement effect is executed. On the sub display screen 35, a cut-in effect is performed, and as a display content, a cut-in effect image for notifying (notifying) the expectation level (reliability) that is a big hit is displayed.

  If there is no operation of the production operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, the operation promotion image disappears without change after the operation effective period elapses, and the operation (movement) of the sub display device 34 starts and moves. Production is performed. The destination preview image may be deleted before the operation promotion image is displayed, may be deleted in accordance with the operation of the effect operation unit 15 or the movement of the sub display device 34, or the sub display. You may make it erase | eliminate with the return operation | movement which the apparatus 34 returns to the original position (initial position before a movement).

  117A to 117C show a case where the destination notice effect is a normal notice pattern, and the sub display device 34 (second display) moves to a predetermined position corresponding to the destination notice. However, instead of the case where the destination notice effect is a normal notice pattern (FIG. 117 (C)), the destination notice effect is a gaze destination notice effect (gasse pattern), contradictory notice effect (contradiction pattern), and expected up pattern. A movement effect in the case of

  117 (D) and 117 (E), a destination notice effect may be performed instead of FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B). In FIG. 117 (D), the destination notice image displayed in the area corresponding to the destination of the sub display device 34 corresponds to the case where the result of S9314 is “Y”, and the sub display screen of the sub display device 34. Including a notice of display content displayed at 35. The display content here is a cut-in effect image that is displayed on the sub display screen 35 in FIG. 117 (C) and for notifying the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit. In the second embodiment, the destination notice image is displayed in a semi-transparent display, but may be displayed in an opaque manner, or may be displayed between a background image and a design image. In addition to the destination notice image, an image or information for notifying the movement timing of the effect member to be noticed may be included in the destination notice image or displayed separately from the destination notice image. Anyway.

(Effect of the second embodiment)
According to the second embodiment, the production member produces or suggests (notices) that the variable display game has a special result. The effect member is, for example, a left accessory (effect movable member 311), a right accessory (distribution rotating body 321), or a sub display device (second display) 34. The movement effect means (for example, the processes of S9006, S9007, S9018, and S9019) executes a movement effect that moves the effect member to a predetermined position during the execution of the variable display game. The notice effect unit (for example, the processing of S9009 and 9021) executes a destination notice effect for notifying the position of the destination of the effect member before execution of the movement effect by the movement effect unit. Therefore, since the novel notice effect of notifying the position of the destination of the effect member is executed, it is possible to grasp (recognize) the progress of the game and effectively improve the interest of the game.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect execution determining means (for example, the processing of S9101 and S9104) determines whether or not to execute the movement effect by the movement effect means based on the result of the variable display game. Therefore, since the moving effect is performed in consideration of the result of the variable display game, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect member (for example, the sorting rotator 321) is movable to a plurality of positions. The movement destination determination means (for example, the processing of S9101 and S9104) or the effect execution determination means determines the position of the movement destination of the effect member in the movement effect based on whether or not the variable display game has a special result. The notice effect unit gives a notice of the position of the destination determined by the destination determination unit in the destination notice effect (see FIGS. 113 and 115). Accordingly, since the position of the destination of the effect member determined based on the result of the variable display game is notified, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for a special result.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect member moves in front of the main display device 31 on which the decorative special figure variation display game is executed. The notice effect means moves by displaying an effect image (destination notice image) indicating the effect member in an area corresponding to the position of the effect member's destination in the display unit (main display screen 32) of the main display device 31. Perform the advance notice effect. Therefore, the destination notice effect is easy to understand to which position the effect member moves.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect image (destination advance notice image) is an image simulating at least a part of the shape of the effect member. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand which effect member is targeted for the destination notice effect.

  According to the second embodiment, the notice effecting means notifies the first notice effect (ordinary notice pattern effect) for notifying the position of the destination of the effect member and the position different from the destination of the effect member. 2 Preliminary effect (effect of contradictory notice pattern) is selectively executed. Therefore, the interest of the destination notice effect is improved by generating a case where the position of the noticed destination and the actual position of the production member are inconsistent.

  According to the second embodiment, the notice effect unit performs the destination notice effect (gase destination notice effect) even when the movement effect is not executed by the movement effect means. Therefore, when the movement effect that the effect member moves to the position as the destination notice effect is performed, it is possible to cheer the player.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect member includes a first effect member (distribution rotating body 321) and a second effect member (effect movable member 311). The movement effect means can move one or both of the first effect member and the second effect member in the movement effect. The notice effect means can execute a destination notice effect for notifying the position of one destination even when both the first effect member and the second effect member move in the move effect (see FIG. 114C). ). Accordingly, there may be a case where a greater number of effect members move than the effect member that is the target of the destination notice effect, so that the player can be surprised and excited.

  According to the second embodiment, the movement effect means can move one of the first effect member and the second effect member in the movement effect. The notice effect means can execute a destination notice effect that is ambiguous whether the first effect member moves or the second effect member moves. Therefore, since it is impossible to clearly grasp which effect member moves, it is possible to improve the effect when the movement effect is actually performed.

  According to the second embodiment, the valid period generating means generates an operation valid period in which the operation of the effect operation unit 15 is valid. The promotion effect means executes an operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 15 during the operation effective period. The movement effect means executes the movement effect based on the operation of the effect operation unit 15 during the operation effective period. The notice effect unit performs the destination notice effect before the operation valid period occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not to operate the effect operation unit 15 after seeing the contents of the destination notice effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is a game effect device (a linear light emitting unit 506, a movable member 513, or a level light emitting unit 517 of the right protruding portion 500) capable of performing a predetermined effect relating to a game. ), A transparent light guide plate (a front light guide plate 251 and / or a rear light guide plate 252) on which a light emission pattern that emits light by light incident on the inside from the end face is formed, and the end face of the light guide plate is disposed oppositely. And light guide plate light emitting members (LEDs 257, 258). The game effect devices are arranged side by side in a state where there is no space between the light guide plate or in a state where a predetermined space is left. The operation effect execution means (for example, the processes of S9007 and S9019) can execute an operation effect that operates the game effect device in a predetermined manner. The light emission effect executing means (for example, the processes of S9008 and S9020) can execute the light emission effect of causing the light emission pattern of the light guide plate to emit light in a predetermined manner. The related effect execution means (for example, the processes of S9110, S9207, and S9208) are related effects related to the operation effect execution means and the light emission effect execution means (forward interlocking light emission, operation interlocking light emission, reverse interlocking light emission, etc.). Production) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the related effect in which the operation effect by the game effect device and the light emission effect by the light guide plate are executed, the effect of the effect is enhanced by the synergistic effect of the operation effect and the light emission effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the related effect executing means operates as a first related effect (effect such as forward-linked light emission) for executing the light emission effect so as to be linked to the operation effect, and an operation effect as linked to the light emission effect. And a second related effect (effect such as reverse interlocking light emission) can be executed. Accordingly, since it is possible to execute a related effect in which the order of the operation effect and the light emission effect is changed, variations and depths of the related effect are increased, and the effect is effectively improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the game effect device includes a light emitting unit (for example, a linear light emitting unit 506) that can emit light in a predetermined manner. The operation effect executing means causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined manner in the operation effect. Therefore, since the related effect is realized by two types of light emitting effects, that is, the game effect device and the light guide plate, it is possible to execute the related effect with a high visual effect.

  According to the second embodiment, the game effect device includes the movable member 513 that can operate in a predetermined manner. The operation effect executing means is a first operation effect that causes the light emitting unit (for example, the linear light emitting unit 506) to emit light in a predetermined mode, and causes the movable member to operate in a predetermined mode and causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined mode. 2 operation effects can be executed. Therefore, by setting a plurality of effect patterns in the operation effect, it is possible to increase variations of related effects, and it is possible to make the effect rich.

  According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is supported by a support body (outer frame 2) that detachably houses a game board 20 in which a game area 22 is formed, and is opened and closed on the front surface of the support body, A transparent member holding frame (transparent plate holding frame 5) that holds a transparent member (transparent plate 5a) that enables the game area 22 to be seen through. The game effect device is provided on the transparent member holding frame. The light guide plate (for example, the front light guide plate 251 and / or the rear light guide plate 252) is provided on the game board 20. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a related effect with high appealing power across the transparent member holding frame and the game board.

  According to the second embodiment, the game effect device (for example, the linear light emitting unit 506) is located in front of the light guide plate. A plurality of light guide plates are provided in a state where they are arranged in the front and rear direction. When executing the related effect, the light emission effect executing means causes the light emission pattern (light emission region) of the light guide plate (particularly the front light guide plate 251) arranged on the most front side among the plurality of light guide plates to emit light. Therefore, the distance in the front-rear direction between the game effect device in which the operation effect is performed and the light guide plate in which the light emission effect is performed can be reduced as much as possible, and the relation between the operation effect and the light emission effect is suppressed from being diluted. it can.

  According to the second embodiment, the light guide plate covers the entire area of the display window 211b with the end face facing the rear of the frame 211. The light emission pattern of the light guide plate is formed so that the main display device 31 can be seen through in a normal state where light is not emitted by the light source (light guide plate light emitting member). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who sees the main display device 31 to recognize the presence of the light guide plate, and to give a surprise to the player when a light emission effect or a related effect is performed.

  According to the second embodiment, the frame light emitting member (LED 256) is mounted on the surface of the mounting substrate (LED substrate 254), while the light guide plate light emitting member (LED 257) is mounted on the back surface of the mounting substrate. Therefore, the number of components can be reduced by mounting the frame light emitting member and the light guide plate light emitting member on one mounting substrate. Moreover, the light from the frame light emitting member and the light from the light guide plate light emitting member can be made difficult to mix.

  According to the second embodiment, the complementary effect section (light emitting region 576, rear light emitting section 577) is disposed in front of or behind the ball passage (right channel 563b), and between the game effect device and the light guide plate. It is possible to complement related effects executed in association with each other. Therefore, even if the ball passage is located between the game effect device and the light guide plate, the related effect can be complemented by the complementary effect unit, and the effect of the related effect can be prevented from being lowered.

  According to the second embodiment, the ball flow path 552 (ball path) serving as an out-ball flow path or a warp flow path causes the game balls introduced therein to flow down and the variable winning portion (the lower variable winning device 27 or It is possible to derive to a position that does not win the upward fluctuation winning device 28). The ball introduction part 554 introduces a game ball that rolls the upper surface of the inclined shelf part 540 toward the upstream of the variable winning part into the ball flow path 552 (ball passage). Therefore, since the surplus counting method can be suppressed, it is easy to use the game store (game room), and it is possible to provide a fair game to many players.

  According to the second embodiment, one game ball can pass between the second shelf 542 on the right side of the inclined shelf 540 and the upper side of the guide rail 22a (partition member), and two passes. Arranged at an impossible interval. The ball introduction part 554 is configured by a hollow part 554 a that is recessed downward from a part of the upper surface of the second shelf part 542. The distance between the upper side portion of the guide rail 22a and the deepest portion of the hollow portion 554a is set to a width exceeding twice the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the subsequent game ball launched toward the second flow path 545 on the right side of the game area 22 collides with the game ball that has flowed into the ball introduction portion 554. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the ball introduction part 554 from flowing into the ball flow path 552 (ball passage) or the course of the subsequent game ball from being blocked and flowing into the ball introduction part 554.

  According to the second embodiment, the recess 554a is positioned closer to the second flow path 545 in the second shelf 542, and is set to have a lateral width that exceeds twice the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the surplus counting method, and it is difficult for ball flaws to occur at the ball introduction portion.

  According to the second embodiment, the sphere introduction portion 554 is provided with a communication port 556 that communicates with the sphere channel 552 (sphere channel) corresponding to the end on the second channel 545 side. The bottom part of the hollow part 554a is inclined downward toward the communication port 556 over the entire area. Therefore, a game ball that falls on the upper surface of the second shelf 542 and rolls toward the second flow path 545 can be smoothly guided to the ball flow path 552.

  According to the second embodiment, the buffer member 560 is provided at the end of the recess 554a on the second flow path 545 side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inclined shelf portion 540 from being damaged due to the collision of the game balls.

  According to the second embodiment, the communication port 556 may be an out port for leading a game ball to the outside of the game area 22. A front decorative plate 558 (decorative member) that restricts the visual recognition of the out port is provided in front of the recess 554a. Therefore, the presence of the out mouth can be made inconspicuous, and a loss can be caused to the player who performed the surplus counting method.

(Third embodiment)
[Display device (display)]
The third embodiment relates to a display device (display device). In the first and second embodiments, the gaming machine 1 includes one main display device 31 and one sub display device 34 (first sub display device), but in the third embodiment, Sub-display devices 581 and 582 (second sub-display device and third sub-display device) and light guide plate display device 585 (light emission effect unit and light guide plate unit) are provided. Note that configurations not specifically described below may be the same as those in the first or second embodiment.

  FIG. 118 is a front view showing the arrangement of the main display device 31, the first sub display device 34, the second sub display device 581, the third sub display device 582, and the light guide plate display device 585 (light emission effect unit). . 118, the warp device 33, the stage unit 240, and the game board 20 are not shown. The center frame unit 210 is transparent. The first sub display device 34, the second sub display device 581, the third sub display device 582, and the light guide plate display device 585 are arranged in front of the main display device 31 and behind the stage unit 240 and the game board 20. Is done.

  The first sub-display device 34 is arranged on the upper side with respect to the main display device 31 at the initial position, and can perform the lowering operation and the subsequent raising operation from the initial position (that is, the normal position). The second sub display device 581 is arranged on the left side with respect to the main display device 31 in the initial position, and can perform a movement operation from the initial position to the right side and a subsequent movement operation to the left side. Note that the second sub display device 581 may be referred to as a left sub display device based on the initial position. The third sub display device 582 is arranged on the right side with respect to the main display device 31 at the initial position, and can perform a movement operation from the initial position to the left side and a subsequent movement operation to the right side. Note that the third sub display device 582 may be referred to as a right sub display device based on the initial position. The first sub display device 34, the second sub display device 581, and the third sub display device 582 constitute a display effect unit, and can each display an effect image (effect display) related to the special figure variation display game. is there.

  Similar to the operation mechanism of the first sub display device 34 of the first embodiment, the operation mechanisms (not shown) of the second sub display device 581, the third sub display device 582, and the light guide plate display device 585 are: An arm unit that supports each display device, a moving unit (included in the board effect device 172) that operates the arm unit of each display device by a driving force of a motor, and the like.

  The light guide plate display device 585 is disposed on the lower side with respect to the main display device 31 at the initial position, and can perform an ascending operation and a subsequent descending operation from the initial position. The light guide plate display device 585 is visually restricted by the stage unit 240 and the game board 20 at the initial position. The light guide plate display device 585 constitutes a light emission effect unit.

  FIG. 119 is a top view of the second sub display device 581, the third sub display device 582, and the light guide plate display device 585 looking down from above. The light guide plate display device 585 is positioned in front of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582. The second sub-display device 581 and the third sub-display device 582 are displaced forward and backward, and can perform a replacement movement operation effect that operates so as to switch their positions. In addition to the replacement movement operation, a combined operation in which the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 are arranged side by side is also possible. Since the first sub display device 34 does not move simultaneously with the second sub display device 581, the third sub display device 582, or the light guide plate display device 585, it does not have to be shifted back and forth.

  In FIG. 119A, the second sub display device 581 moves to the right and the third sub display device 582 moves to the left from the initial position (that is, the normal position), and the replacement movement operation effect is executed. Show the state. FIG. 119 (B) shows that the second sub display device 581 moves to the left from the replacement position where the positions of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 are switched from the initial position, and the third sub display device. 582 shows the state of the return operation in which it moves to the right and returns to the initial position. As a replacement movement, the position may be changed as part of the production of the decorative special figure variation display game, and the position is changed according to the change in the game state (change to normal state, general power support state, short-time state, probability change state) May be replaced.

  FIG. 120 is an exploded view of the light guide plate display device 585 (light emission effect unit). The light guide plate display device 585 includes a front case member 586, a rear case member 587, a front light guide plate 588, a rear light guide plate 589, and an LED substrate 590. The front case member 586 and the rear case member 587 accommodate the front light guide plate 588, the rear light guide plate 589, and the LED substrate 590. The front light guide plate 588 and the rear light guide plate 589 are light transmissive and transparent (may be translucent).

  The LED substrate 590 has a plurality of full-color LEDs 591 as light sources. In addition, you may comprise each full color LED by making red, blue, and green LED into 1 set. Light from the LED substrate 590 is emitted from the end surfaces of the front light guide plate 588 and the rear light guide plate 589, and emits them. The LEDs 591a in the front row irradiate light inside the front light guide plate 588 facing the lower end surface of the front light guide plate 588. The LEDs 591b in the rear row irradiate the inside of the rear light guide plate 589 with light facing the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 589.

  121A is a diagram showing a light emitting region (light emitting pattern) of the front light guide plate 588, and FIG. 121B is a diagram showing a light emitting region (light emitting pattern) of the rear light guide plate 589. FIG. These light emitting regions are, for example, light scattering regions formed on the back surface of the front light guide plate 588 or the rear light guide plate 589 by an uneven process using a laser or a printed film.

  The front light guide plate 588 is provided with one light emitting region 588a so as to spread over the entire front light guide plate. As will be described later, when the light guide plate display device 585, and thus the light emitting region 588a, overlaps with the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 that are adjacent to each other in the side-by-side state and overlap in the front-rear direction, the light emitting region 588a emits light. You may comprise.

  On the rear light guide plate 589, a left light emitting area 589a (left light emitting pattern), a central light emitting area 589b (center light emitting pattern), and a right light emitting area 589c (right light emitting pattern) are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. As will be described later, each of the left light emitting area 589a, the central light emitting area 589b, and the right light emitting area 589c emits light when it overlaps the moved second sub display device 581 or third sub display device 582 in the front-rear direction. You may comprise.

  When only one light emitting region of the rear light guide plate 589 emits light, only the LED facing the light emitting region among the LEDs 591b in the rear row may emit light. For example, when only the left light emitting region 589a emits light, only the left LED facing the left light emitting region 589a may emit light. When only the right light emitting region 589c emits light, only the right LED facing the right light emitting region 589c may emit light.

[Display unit setting process]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of display operation setting processing (S4506 in FIG. 45 or S9006 in FIG. 100) according to the third embodiment of this invention. In the display device operation setting process, an operation effect of the display device (display device) is set. For example, during the execution of the variable display game, the light emitting effect unit (light guide plate display device) is placed in front of the display effect unit (at least one of the first sub display device 34, the second sub display device 581, and the third sub display device 582). 585) can be set, and a predetermined light emission effect can be set in the light emission effect unit overlapped in front of the display effect unit. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The effect control device 150 first determines the lowering operation of the first sub-display device 34 as the lowering operation determination process, and determines whether or not to perform the lowering operation (S9401 and S9402). The descending motion determination process may be performed in the same manner as S4603-S4605 in FIG. 46 of the first embodiment, and the descending motion is executed with higher probability when the special figure variation display game is a big hit. When the lowering operation of the first sub display device 34 is not executed (the result of S9402 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9405.

  When the lowering operation of the first sub display device 34 is executed (the result of S9402 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 performs an operation timing determination process for determining the operation timing of the lowering operation of the first sub display device 34. This is performed (S9403). Then, a descent operation mode determination process for determining the descent operation mode of the first sub display device 34 is performed (S9404), and the process proceeds to S9405. As in the first embodiment, the lowering operation mode includes an operation mode without front-rear operation, a first front-rear operation mode (FIGS. 47A and 47B), and a second front-back operation mode (FIG. 47C). (D)).

  Next, the production control device 150 determines the horizontal movement operation of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 in the left-right direction as the horizontal movement operation determination process, and determines whether to execute the horizontal movement operation. (S9405, S9406). In the lateral movement operation determination process, it is determined whether or not at least one of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 is to be operated. For example, if the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is the SP reach variation pattern, it is determined to execute the lateral movement operation. When the horizontal movement operation is not executed (the result of S9406 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9409.

  When performing the lateral movement operation (the result of S9406 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines the operational timing for determining the operational timing of the lateral movement operation of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582. Processing is performed (S9407). Subsequently, a lateral movement operation mode determination process is performed to determine the lateral movement operation mode of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 in the horizontal direction (S9408). In the lateral movement operation mode determination process, the operation mode of the lateral movement operation is determined by lottery with reference to the selection rate (distribution rate) in the lateral movement operation mode determination table in FIG. For example, when the SP reach is lost, operation modes 1 to 6 described later are selected at a ratio of 35%, 25%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and 5%, respectively.

  Next, the effect control device 150 performs light guide plate operation determination processing for determining the operation (the ascending operation and the light emission operation) of the light guide plate display device 585 (light emission effect unit), and the operation of the light guide plate display device 585, that is, the light guide plate. It is determined whether or not to perform an operation (S9409, S9410). In the light guide plate operation determination process, whether or not to operate the light guide plate display device 585 is determined by lottery with the operation probability (lottery win rate) selected from the light guide plate operation determination table of FIG. 123 (B). The light guide plate operation determination process constitutes an operation effect unit capable of executing an operation effect in which the light guide plate display device 585 (light emission effect unit) is superimposed in front of the display effect unit during execution of the variable display game. When the operation of the light guide plate display device 585 is not performed (the result of S9410 is “N”), the process proceeds to S9413.

  When the operation of the light guide plate display device 585 is performed (the result of S9410 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 performs an operation timing determination process for determining the operation timing of the light guide plate display device 585 (S9411). Then, the light emission operation mode determination process which determines the light emission operation mode of the light guide plate of the light guide plate display device 585 is performed (S9412). In the light emission operation mode determination process, the light emission mode of the light guide plate display device 585 is determined by lottery with reference to the selection rate (distribution rate) of the light guide plate light emission mode determination table in FIG. In addition, the light emission operation mode determination process constitutes a light emission effect unit that can execute a predetermined light emission effect with the light guide plate display device 585 (light emission effect unit) overlapped in front of the display effect unit.

  Next, the effect control device 150 has any effect operation (execution) among the descending operation in S9402, the lateral movement operation in S9406, and the light guide plate operation (operation of the light guide plate display device 585) in S9410. It is determined whether or not (S9413). If there is no production operation (the result of S9413 is “N”), the current process is terminated. When there is an effect operation (the result of S9413 is “Y”), the execution of the effect operation determined in S9404, S9408, and S9412 is set (for example, an execution flag is set) (S9414), and the process ends.

  Note that the second sub-display device 34, the second sub-display device 581, the third sub-display device 582, and the light guide plate display device 585 set in the display operation setting process in FIG. Similarly to the destination notice effect setting process (FIG. 111) of the embodiment, the destination notice effect by the destination notice image may be performed.

  Next, the lateral movement operation mode determination table in FIG. 123 (A) will be described. In this table, “left sub” indicates the left sub display device (ie, the second sub display device 581), and “right sub” indicates the right sub display device (ie, the third sub display device 582).

  In the operation mode 1, the left sub display device moves to the left region on the left side with respect to the center of the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31, but the right sub display device does not move from the initial position. In the operation mode 2, the left sub display device moves to the central region in the region corresponding to the center of the main display screen 32, but the right sub display device does not move from the initial position. In the operation mode 3, the right sub display device moves to the right region on the right side with respect to the center of the main display screen 32, but the left sub display device does not move from the initial position. In the operation mode 4, the right sub display device moves to the central region in the region corresponding to the center of the main display screen 32, but the left sub display device does not move from the initial position.

  In the operation mode 5, both the left sub-display device and the right sub-display device move to perform a united moving operation in which they are adjacent and united in a side-by-side state. In the operation mode 6, as shown in FIG. 119, both the left sub-display device and the right sub-display device that are in the initial position move, and a replacement movement operation is performed in which the positions are switched.

  In FIG. 123 (A), when the SP reach is lost (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game is lost with the SP reach fluctuation pattern) and the SP reach big hit (ie, the special figure fluctuation display game is big hit with the SP reach fluctuation pattern). Only the movement mode of the lateral movement operation is set. However, when a lateral movement operation is executed even in a variation pattern other than the SP reach variation pattern, the selection rate (distribution rate) of the operation mode of the lateral movement operation is set in the table for the other variation pattern as well. Also good. In the table of FIG. 123A, the selection rate is set so that the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is higher when the right sub display device moves than when the left sub display device moves. Has been.

  Next, the light guide plate operation determination table in FIG. 123 (B) will be described. The light guide plate operation determination table shows the operation probability of the operation of the light guide plate display device 585 (rising operation and light emission operation) when the SP reach is off and the SP reach big hit with respect to the operation mode of the lateral movement operation (lateral movement operation mode). Determine. The operation probability of the light guide plate display device 585 is higher at the time of big hit than at the time of loss, and when the light guide plate display device 585 is operated, the player can have a big hit expectation. In the case where the lateral movement operation is executed also in a variation pattern other than the SP reach variation pattern, the operation probability of the light guide plate display device 585 may be set for the other variation patterns using the light guide plate operation determination table. Good.

  In the example of FIG. 123 (B), the operation probability of the light guide plate display device 585 is 0% for the operation modes 1, 3, and 6 of the lateral movement operation, and the light guide plate display device 585 does not operate. That is, at least one of the left sub display device (second sub display device 581) and the right sub display device (third sub display device 582) moves to the middle region only for the operation modes 2, 4, and 5 The light guide plate display device 585 is lifted to overlap at least one of the sub display device and the right sub display device and the light guide plate display device 585 in the front-rear direction.

  Next, the light guide plate light emission mode determination table in FIG. 123 (C) will be described. The light guide plate light emission mode determination table is a selection rate (distribution rate) of the light emission operation mode of the light guide plate of the light guide plate display device 585 with respect to the lateral movement operation modes 2, 4, and 5 in which the light guide plate display device 585 is lifted. ).

  In the table, in “rear center light emission”, the central light emission region 589b of the rear light guide plate 589 emits light, and in “rear left light emission”, the left light emission region 589a of the rear light guide plate 589 emits light, and “rear side light emission” “Right emission” emits light from the right light emitting region 589c of the rear light guide plate 589, and “Right rear light emission” emits light from the left light emitting region 589a and the right light emitting region 589c of the rear light guide plate 589, and “front light emission”. Then, the light emitting region 588a of the front light guide plate 588 emits light. For example, for the lateral movement operation modes 2 and 4, the central light emitting region 589b of the rear light guide plate 589 emits light at a rate of 100%.

[Display effect unit effect example 1]
FIG. 124 shows an example of presentation of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display unit 582 as a display presentation unit (display presentation unit presentation example 1) in time series. Here, on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31, a destination notice effect of the notice pattern 1 is also performed. The destination notice effect is performed before the occurrence of reach, but may be performed after the occurrence of reach.

  In FIG. 124 (A), as a destination notice effect, a destination notice image simulating the outline (contour) of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 is displayed as an image (background image, The design image, the effect image, etc.) are displayed in the center of the main display screen 32 in a semi-transparent display (preliminary pattern 1). The destination notice image can indicate the position of the destination of the second sub display device 581 or the third sub display device 582. Since the second sub-display device 581 and the third sub-display device 582 have the same or substantially the same external shape, the movement destination notice image moves relative to which sub-display device of the second sub-display device 581 and the third sub-display device 582. Cannot determine whether the advance notice is being made. Therefore, it is not known which sub display device moves until it actually moves. Further, as shown in FIG. 123A, the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is set differently when the second sub display device 581 moves and when the third sub display device 582 moves. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation as to which sub-display device moves.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 124B, an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 15 is displayed on the sub display screen 35 of the sub display device 34. Note that the destination notice image may remain displayed at this time.

  Next, in FIG. 124C, there is an operation of the effect operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, and the operation promotion image changes. When the effect operation unit 15 is operated, the second sub display device 581 (left sub display device) located on the left side moves to the center region in the right direction and the moving effect is executed (the operation mode 2 described above). The central area is an area facing the position where the destination notice image is displayed on the main display screen 32. On the screen of the second sub display device 581 after the movement, an effect (notice effect) different from the effect so far is executed. When there is no operation of the production operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, the second sub display device 581 moves after the operation effective period elapses, but may not be moved.

  In FIG. 124D instead of FIG. 124C, the third sub display device 582 (right sub display device) located on the right side moves to the left in the center region when the effect operation unit 15 is operated. A movement effect is executed (the above-described operation mode 4). On the screen of the third sub display device 582 after movement, an effect (notice effect) different from the effect so far is executed. When there is no operation of the production operation unit 15 within the operation effective period, the third sub display device 582 moves after the operation effective period elapses, but may not be moved.

  It should be noted that the destination notice effect may be a gasse destination notice effect or a contradictory notice effect. The second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 do not move in the case of the gase move destination notice effect. In the case of the contradiction notice effect, the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 move to a position different from the destination indicated in the destination notice image.

[Display effect unit effect example 2]
FIG. 125 shows a presentation example (display presentation unit presentation example 2) of the third sub display device 582 as a display presentation unit in time series. In FIG. 125 (A), as a destination notice effect, a destination notice image simulating the outer shape (outline) of the third sub-display device 582 is displayed behind (images, background images, design images, effect images, etc.). Is displayed on the right side of the main display screen 32 (notice pattern 2). In FIG. 125 (B), the third sub display device 582 (right sub display device) located on the right side moves leftward to the right region, and a moving effect is executed (the aforementioned operation mode 3). The right area is an area facing the position where the destination notice image is displayed on the main display screen 32. On the screen of the third sub display device 582 after movement, an effect (notice effect) different from the effect so far is executed.

[Display effect unit effect example 3]
FIG. 126 shows a presentation example (display presentation unit presentation example 3) of the second sub display device 581 as a display presentation unit in time series. In FIG. 126 (A), as a destination notice effect, a destination notice image simulating the outer shape (outline) of the second sub-display device 581 is displayed behind the image (background image, design image, effect image, etc.). Is displayed on the left side of the main display screen 32 (notice pattern 3). In FIG. 126 (B), the second sub display device 581 (left sub display device) located on the left side moves to the left region in the right direction to execute the movement effect (the above-described operation mode 1). The left area is an area facing the position where the destination notice image is displayed on the main display screen 32. On the screen of the second sub display device 581 after the movement, an effect (notice effect) different from the effect so far is executed.

[Display effect unit effect example 3]
FIG. 127 shows an effect example (display effect unit effect example 4) of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 as display effect units in time series. In FIG. 126 (A), as a destination notice effect, a destination notice image simulating the outer shape (contour) when the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 are combined in a side-by-side state is displayed backward. The displayed image (background image, design image, effect image, etc.) is displayed in a translucent manner, and is displayed large in the center of the main display screen 32 (notice pattern 4). In FIG. 127B, the second sub display device 581 (left sub display device) located on the left side moves to the right, and the third sub display device 582 (right sub display device) located on the right side moves to the left. An union movement effect that moves and is adjacent and united in a side-by-side state is executed (the above-described operation mode 5). The second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 are combined in an area facing the position where the destination notice image is displayed on the main display screen 32. On the screens of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 after movement, an effect (notice effect) different from the effect so far is executed.

[Light guide plate unit production example 1]
FIG. 128 shows a presentation example (light guide plate unit production example 1) of the light guide plate display device 585 as a light emission production unit (light guide plate unit) in time series.

  In FIG. 128 (A), a destination notice effect is performed as in FIG. 124 (A). Thereafter, in FIG. 128 (B), as in FIG. 124 (C), the second sub display device 581 (left sub display device) on the left side moves to the center region in the right direction, and a moving effect is executed. (Operation mode 2 described above). Next, in FIG. 128 (C), the light guide plate display device 585 located on the lower side moves upward to the center region, and is placed in front of the second sub display device 581. The movement effect of the light guide plate display device 585 may be executed by operating the effect operation unit 15 by generating an operation effective period. Then, the central light emitting region 589b (central light emitting pattern) of the rear light guide plate 589 emits light, and a light emission effect is performed in the region corresponding to the second sub display device 581.

  As another example, after FIG. 128 (A), in FIG. 128 (D), as in FIG. 124 (D), the third sub display device 582 (right sub display device) located on the right side is centered in the left direction. The movement effect is executed by moving to the area (the operation mode 4 described above). In addition, a movement effect may be performed by generating an operation effective period and operating the effect operation unit 15. Next, in FIG. 128 (E), the light guide plate display device 585 located on the lower side moves upward to the center region and is placed in front of the third sub display device 582. Then, the central light emitting region 589b (central light emitting pattern) of the rear light guide plate 589 emits light, and a light emission effect is performed in the region corresponding to the third sub display device 582.

[Light guide plate unit production example 2]
FIG. 129 shows an effect example (light guide plate unit effect example 2) of the light guide plate display device 585 as a light emission effect unit (light guide plate unit) in time series.

  In FIG. 129 (A), a destination notice effect is performed as in FIG. 127 (A). Next, in FIG. 129 (C), the combined movement effect (the above-described operation mode 5) is executed as in FIG. 127 (B). Instead of FIG. 129 (A), the destination notice effect may not be performed as shown in FIG. 129 (B). Following FIG. 129 (C), in FIG. 129 (D), the light guide plate display device 585 located on the lower side moves up to the center region, and the front of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 is moved forward. Are placed on top of each other. The movement effect of the light guide plate display device 585 may be executed by operating the effect operation unit 15 by generating an operation effective period. Then, the left light emitting region 589a and the right light emitting region 589c of the rear light guide plate 589 emit light, and light emission effects are performed in regions corresponding to the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582, respectively.

  Instead of FIG. 129 (D), as shown in FIG. 129 (E), the light guide plate display device 585 is moved up to the central region and overlapped in front of the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582. After the arrangement, the large light emitting region 588a of the front light guide plate 588 emits light, and a light emission effect is performed in a region straddling the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582.

  In the present embodiment, one of the light guide plate display device 585 and the display effect unit (the second sub display device 581 and / or the third sub display device 582) does not move, but in front of the main display screen 32. A configuration that is permanently arranged is also conceivable. In such a configuration, only the other of the light guide plate display device 585 and the display effect unit is moved, and the light guide plate display device 585 and the display effect unit are overlapped to produce an effect of causing the light emitting area of the light guide plate display device 585 to emit light. May be.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram for describing the positional relationship (union state) between the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 that have performed the union movement operation (the above-described operation mode 5). 130A and 130B, the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 are arranged side by side so as to be adjacent but do not overlap in the front-rear direction. 130C and 130D, the second sub display device 581 and the third sub display device 582 are adjacent to each other in a side-by-side state, and in some of them (specifically, a frame portion surrounding the periphery of the display region is ) It is arranged to overlap in the front and back. In the case of FIGS. 130C and 130D, the display area of the second sub display device 581 and the display area of the third sub display device 582 are closer, so that the sense of unity of both increases. In the third embodiment, the destination notice image is displayed in a semi-transparent display, but may be displayed in an opaque manner, or may be displayed between a background image and a design image. In addition to the destination notice image, an image or information for notifying the movement timing of the effect member to be noticed may be included in the destination notice image or displayed separately from the destination notice image. Anyway.

(Effect of the third embodiment)
According to the third embodiment, the light emitting effect unit (light guide plate display device 585, light guide plate unit) is a transparent light guide plate (front light guide plate 588, rear light) in which a light emission pattern is emitted by light incident inside from the end face. Side light guide plate 589) and light sources (LEDs 591a and 591b) arranged to face the end face of the light guide plate. The display effect unit (for example, the second sub display device 581 and / or the third sub display device 582) can be arranged at a position that does not overlap with the light guide plate in the front-rear direction, and can display an effect image related to the variable display game. . The motion effect means (for example, the processes of S9409 and S9018) can execute the motion effect in which the light emission effect unit (light guide plate display device 585) is superimposed in front of the display effect unit during the execution of the variable display game. The light emission effect means (for example, the processes of S9412 and S9018) can execute a predetermined light emission effect with the light emission effect unit overlapped in front of the display effect unit by the operation effect means. Therefore, the production effect by the light emission production unit (light guide plate display device 585) is enhanced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the third embodiment, the operation effect means executes the operation effect by moving at least one of the light emission effect unit (light guide plate display device 585) and the display effect unit. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a dynamic production, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the third embodiment, the main display device 31 executes a variable display game. The operation effect means executes the operation effect by moving the light emission effect unit and the display effect unit in front of the main display device 31 so that the light emission effect unit overlaps the front of the display effect unit. Accordingly, since the light emission effect unit and the display effect unit move, it is possible to obtain a dynamic operation effect. In addition, since the light emission effect unit overlaps the front of the display effect unit in front of the main display device 31, it is possible to excite the variable display game.

  According to the third embodiment, the display effect unit includes a first display effect unit (for example, the second sub display device 581) and a second display effect unit (for example, the third sub display device 582). The operation effect means includes a first operation effect in which the light emission effect unit is superimposed in front of the first display effect unit or the second display effect unit, and a light emission effect unit in which the light emission effect unit is overlapped in front of the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit. Two motion effects can be executed. Accordingly, since a plurality of operation effects with different light emission effect unit overlaps with the display effect unit can be executed, the effect of the operation effect and the light emission effect is improved.

  According to the third embodiment, the second display effect unit (for example, the third sub display device 582) can be spaced from the first display effect unit (for example, the second sub display device 581). The motion effect means moves at least one of the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit so that the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit are in a side-by-side state in the second operation effect, and the horizontal display The light emission effect unit is moved so as to overlap the front of the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit in the state. Therefore, the second operation effect is rich in changes, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  According to the third embodiment, the light emission effect means executes a light emission effect of a different mode when the first operation effect is executed and when the second operation effect is executed. Therefore, the effect of production increases and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the third embodiment, the display effect unit is a second display effect unit (e.g., third sub-display unit) that can be spaced apart from the first display effect unit (e.g., second sub-display device 581). Display device 582). The replacement effect means (the processes of S9408 and S9018) can execute a replacement effect that switches the positions of the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that the positions of the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit are switched, and the entertainment of the game is improved. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the variation pattern is an SP reach variation pattern, or that a change in gaming state occurs.

  According to the third embodiment, the main display device 31 has a display area (main display screen 32) for executing a variable display game. The first display effect unit (for example, the second sub display device 581) and the second display effect unit (for example, the third sub display device 582) are arranged on one side and the other side of the main display device 31 with the display area interposed therebetween. Can be placed respectively. Therefore, the replacement of the first display effect unit and the second display effect unit in the replacement effect can be clearly recognized, and a dynamic effect can be obtained.

  In addition, about the content of 1st Embodiment to 3rd Embodiment, based on establishment of the starting condition defined beforehand, the fluctuation | variation display game (variably displayed several identification information) is performed, and this fluctuation | variation display game is carried out. When a special result is obtained (in relation to the result of the variable display game), a gaming value can be given to the player (for example, a special gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated). It may be applied.

  In addition, during the execution of the variable display game, a movement advance notice effect (preferably executed before the destination advance notice effect) for notifying that the effect member moves is executed separately from the destination notice effect. , Even if a movement target notice effect (which is preferably executed at the same time as the destination notice effect or before the destination notice effect) is announced, which notices which effect member of the plurality of effect members moves. good. Further, the destination notice effect, the movement notice effect, and the movement target notice effect may be executed as a prior effect in a variable display game that is executed before the start memory based on the result of the start memory prior determination. good.

(Fourth embodiment)
The fourth embodiment relates to a general-purpose look-ahead notice effect for a general-purpose start memory and an effect in a state transition game for generating a big hit state from a small hit state. The gaming board 20 and the center case 60 of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are different from the gaming board 20 and the game effect constituting body 21 of the gaming machine 1 in the first to third embodiments. In addition, the structure which is not demonstrated in particular below may be the same as that of the 1st-3rd embodiment.

[Game board configuration]
With reference to FIGS. 131 and 132, a gaming board of a fourth embodiment provided in a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 131 is a front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 132 is an enlarged front view of the center case of the fourth exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Below, a different structure from the game board 20 (FIG. 2) of 1st Embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated. In addition, about the structure which fulfill | performs the function similar to the game board 20 of 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably and attaches | subjects the same code | symbol.

  In the gaming board 20 of the fourth embodiment, the arrangement of the general figure starting gate 25, the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 and the upper variation winning opening 28b provided in the gaming area 22 is the first implementation. This is different from the game board (FIG. 2). A center case 60 is disposed instead of the game effect component 21 of the first embodiment.

  A center case 60 that forms a window portion serving as a display area for the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 22 of the game board 20. Behind the window formed in the center case 60, there is a variable display device (main display device) 31 as an effect display device capable of executing an effect of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner (variable display). Has been placed.

  In the game area 22 on the left side of the center case 60, a normal start gate 25 is provided. Further, on the left side of the frame 601 of the center case 60, a special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is disposed so as to be openable so as to face the gaming area 22, and an upper large winning opening 28b is adjacent to the lower side so as to be opened. An up-variable winning device 28 is disposed so that it can be opened.

  The special figure 2 start winning opening 24 includes a movable member 24a of a movable wing piece that can be converted from a closed state in which game balls cannot flow into an open state in which game balls can easily flow in. The movable member 24a is configured so that the rotating shaft portion 28e (see FIG. 133) is connected to the movable member 24a via the general-purpose solenoid 24b (see FIG. 20) when the result of the usual figure change display game is in a predetermined stop display mode (hit result mode). ) In the counterclockwise direction, so that the game from the standing state (closed state that restricts the inflow of game balls to the special figure 2 start winning opening 24) to the tilted state (game to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24) It is converted (changed) into an open state that allows the inflow of the ball, in other words, a winning easy state that is advantageous to the player.

  The upper prize winning port 28b provided in the upper fluctuation winning device 28 is normally blocked by the movable member 28a so that the game ball cannot be won, and the special figure variation display game is in the small hit result mode (second special result mode). When the small hit state (second special game state) occurs, the movable member 28a is tilted from the standing state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) by the upper prize winning solenoid 28c (see FIG. 23) (player). Game ball can be won by being converted into an open state advantageous to the player).

  In addition, a winning unit 600 is formed inside the center case 60 in a play space in which a game ball that has won a prize at the upper large winning opening 28b rolls. In the winning unit 600, when the passing (winning) of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 641a (see FIG. 133) provided in the specific area 641 (see FIG. 133), the big hit state is generated (acquired). )can do. Details of the winning unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

  A pseudo-variation winning device 85 is disposed on the right side of the frame 601 of the center case 60 so as to be symmetrical with the up-changing winning device 28. The pseudo-variable winning device 85 includes a pseudo-movable member 85a that is symmetrical to the movable member 28a of the up-variable winning device 28, but the pseudo-movable member 85a is always in an upright state. The pseudo movable member 85a is a fixed member that is not converted from the standing state to the tilted state like the movable member 28a. The pseudo-variable winning device 85 is provided with a large winning opening, and the pseudo movable member 85a is converted from the standing state (closed state, winning restriction state) to the tilted state (open state, winning allowance state) based on the occurrence of the small hit state. In this way, the game ball that has won the grand prize opening may flow into the play space.

  Further, below the center case 60 (lower part), there is provided a special figure 2 hold display unit 82 that is display-controlled by the effect control device 150 and can notify the number of stored special figure 2 start memories. A special figure 1 hold display unit 81 (see FIG. 153) capable of informing the number of special figure 1 start memories is displayed on the main display screen 32.

  In addition, a universal memory display unit 70 capable of notifying the number of memory of the normal map start memory is provided on the upper left side of the frame 601 of the center case 60 at the upper left of the main display screen 32. Here, the common figure memory display unit 70, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, and the up variation winning apparatus 28 are arranged in a fan shape from the upper left to the left of the main display screen 32. Details of the common map storage display unit 70 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

  Further, a chance mode display section 75 is provided above the general-purpose memory display unit 70 for notifying that the game state has entered a pre-reading chance mode permitting the execution of the pre-reading advance notice of the normal chart start memory. Further, a front decoration part 77 is provided on the frame 601 on the right side of the chance mode display part 75.

[Winning unit composition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133 and FIG. 134, the winning unit (play space) 600 formed in the above-described center case 60 will be described. FIG. 133 is an enlarged perspective view of a winning unit 600 according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the winning unit 600 is provided at a winning ball guiding path 605 that guides a game ball that has won a prize at the upper large winning opening 28b to the inner bottom portion (playing space) of the frame 601, and the inner bottom portion of the frame 601. The winning rolling portion 610 and the floor member 620, the rotating body 630 disposed behind the floor member 620, the specific area 641, the normal area 642, and the normal area where the game ball guided rearward by the rotating body 630 can win a prize. A region 643.

  The game ball that has won the upper prize winning opening 28b and passed through the upper count switch 28d flows into the winning ball guiding path 605. The game ball that has flowed into the winning ball guiding path 605 flows down from the outlet 605a to the winning rolling portion 610 on the inner bottom portion of the frame 601. Here, a floor member 620 capable of opening and closing a ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the play space to the outside is disposed at the center of the inner bottom of the frame 601. The winning rolling portion 610 is provided with a gently inclined surface between the outlet 605a of the winning ball guiding path 605 and the floor member 620, and guides the game ball flowing down the winning ball guiding path 605 to the floor member 620.

  On the frame 601 corresponding to the winning rolling part 610 and the floor member 620, a drop regulation guide 602 for restricting the game balls rolling on the winning rolling part 610 and the floor member 620 from dropping extends upward. Is done.

  A rotating body 630 is disposed behind the floor member 620. The rotating body 630 rotates from the front toward the back around the rotating shaft 631 by driving the rotating shaft 631 by a motor. A magnet 632 is embedded in the rotating body 630 in the vicinity of the outer peripheral surface. Thereby, the rotating body 630 can attract the game ball rolling the floor member 620 to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 632) and guide it from the floor member 620 to the three winning areas arranged at the back rear.

  Between the rotator 630 and the main display screen 32, there are provided three winning areas in which game balls can flow in the left-right direction. A normal area 642, a specific area 641, and a normal area 643 are arranged in this order from the left. The The magnet 632 of the rotating body 630 is provided by forming three suction lines that are easy to guide the game ball in each winning area. An adsorption line that easily guides the game ball to the specific area 641 is provided in the central portion of the rotating body 630, and two magnets 632 are arranged at intervals of 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 630. An adsorption line that easily guides the game ball to the normal area 642 is provided on the left portion of the rotating body 630, and four magnets 632 (see FIG. 134) are arranged at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 630. An adsorption line that easily guides the game ball to the normal area 643 is provided on the right portion of the rotating body 630, and four magnets 632 (see FIG. 134) are arranged at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 630.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the upper variation winning slot 28b of the upward swing winning device 28 flows down the winning ball guiding path 605, rolls the winning rolling part 610, and is guided to the floor member 620. The game ball that rolls on the floor member 620 is attracted to the magnet 632 of the rotating body 630 and distributed to one of the rear winning areas, or the ball discharge port is opened at the timing when the floor member 620 is converted to the open state. To the winning ball discharge flow path 650 (see FIG. 134) disposed below the floor member 620.

  Next, a series of operations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the winning unit 600 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 133, the winning unit 600 is cut by a plane passing back and forth through the center of the normal area 643 to the right side. It is sectional drawing seen from. FIG. 134A shows a case where the floor member 620 is closed, and FIG. 134B shows a case where the floor member 620 is open.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (A), the winning unit 600 includes a floor member 620, a rotating body 630, and a winning ball discharge channel 650 below the winning areas 641 to 643. The winning ball discharge flow path 650 is connected to a floor flow down path 651 provided immediately below the floor member 620, a normal flow down path 652 provided directly below the normal area 643, a floor flow down path 651, and a normal flow down path 652. The connection path 653 is provided to be inclined downward from the front to the rear. The winning ball discharge channel 650 is provided with a remaining ball switch 650a for detecting a passing game ball below the junction point between the normal flow path 652 and the connection path 653. The normal flow path 652 is provided with a normal area switch 643a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal area 643 in the vicinity of the normal area 643.

  The same applies to the normal area 642. Although not shown, the normal flow path provided immediately below the normal area 642 is provided with a normal area switch 642a that detects a game ball that has passed through the normal area 642 in the vicinity of the normal area 642. And merges with the normal flow path 652 in the normal region 643 downstream. In addition, the specific area 641 is provided so that a winning game ball flows down to a specific ball discharge flow path (not shown) different from the winning ball discharge flow path 650, and the specific ball discharge flow path includes the specific area 641. A specific area switch 641a for detecting a game ball that has passed through is provided. The specific area switch 641a also serves as a remaining sphere switch.

  The floor member 620 is provided so as to be openable and closable so that the game balls that are rolling without being attracted to the rotating body can be discharged to the outside even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (B), the floor member 620 is an attacker-type opening / closing door that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the end on the rotating body is tilted forward by a solenoid (not shown). The floor member 620 rotates so that the end on the rotating body side is lowered. Thereby, since the game ball flows down to the rotating body side after flowing down to the rotating body side 651, the gaming ball is magnetized as compared to the case where the end opposite to the rotating body side of the floor member 620 is turned down. The time that can be adsorbed to 632 can be extended.

  As described above, the game balls of the winning unit 600 are discharged to the outside by winning in any of the specific area 641, the normal area 642, and the normal area 642, or by discharging the floor member 620.

[Normal map display unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135 and FIG. 136, the universal figure memory | storage display unit 70 which performs the hold display of the universal figure start memory | storage of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. 135 and 136 are diagrams for explaining a universal memory display unit 70 according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  FIG. 135 (A) is a front view of the universal memory display unit 70. FIG.

  The universal map storage display unit 70 corresponds to the upper limit (four in this case) of the universal map start storage number that can be stored in the universal map storage area, and the hold display unit 71, the hold display unit 72, the hold display unit 73, and A hold display unit 74 is provided. The hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74 correspond to the normal map start-up memory stored in the normal map storage area. Similarly, the general-purpose map display unit 56 of the collective display device 50 that makes it possible to grasp the general-purpose map storage number is controlled by the game control device 100, whereas the general-purpose memory display unit 70 is controlled by the effect control device 150. Is done. The hold display section 71 to the hold display section 74 can individually execute a light emission effect and a vibration effect, and each is configured as an effect portion that performs a general-purpose prefetching notice.

  The hold display portion 71 to the hold display portion 74 are attached to a drive base member 70c (see FIG. 136 (A)) having a decorative base member 70a on the front surface via the support arms 71a to 74a, respectively. The holding display part 71 to the holding display part 74 have a space between the decoration base member 70a and can be operated in the vertical direction as a movable body together with the support arms 71a to 74a.

  The hold display portion 71 to the hold display portion 74 have the same front shape (here, a target lens shape), but are provided such that the size increases as the corresponding digestion order of the normal diagram start-up memory becomes earlier. Therefore, the hold display part 71 is the largest and the hold display part 74 is the smallest.

  FIG. 135 (B) is a front view of the general memory display unit 70 from which the hold display section 71 to the hold display section 74, the support arms 71a to 74a, and the decorative base member 70a are removed. FIG. 135C is a front view of the decorative base member 70a.

  An LED substrate 70b is disposed behind the decorative base member 70a. As shown in FIG. 135 (B), the LED substrate 70b is provided with LEDs 71b to 74b as light sources at positions corresponding to the holding display portion 71 to the holding display portion 74 disposed in front. Here, the LEDs 71b to 74b are arranged closer to the operation direction from the normal positions of the hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74. The operation direction is a direction from the center of the hold display portion 71 to the hold display portion 74 toward the support arm 71a to the support arm 74a. The LEDs 71b to 74b are provided so as not to protrude from the hold display portion 71 to the hold display portion 74 in a front view even when the hold display portion 71 to the hold display portion 74 operate in the operation direction.

  And as shown to FIG. 135 (C), the decoration base member 70a is provided with the translucent parts 71c-74c which permeate | transmit or diffuse the light irradiated from LED71b-LED74b of the back LED board 70b. The translucent parts 71c to 74c are provided closer to the operation direction from the normal positions of the hold display part 71 to the hold display part 74 so as to correspond to the LEDs 71b to 74b.

  The decorative base member 70a is formed of a translucent resin. The translucent portions 71c to 74c are convex lenses, concave lenses, or no lens cut, and the other regions are concave and convex lenses.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the number of LEDs 71b to 74b provided in each of the holding display units 71 to 74 is different, and the number of LEDs 71b to 74b provided is higher as the digestion order of the corresponding corresponding map start-up memory is faster. Therefore, the number of LEDs 71b corresponding to the hold display unit 71 is the largest and four, and the number of LEDs 74b corresponding to the hold display unit 4 is the smallest and one. Thereby, the brightness | luminance of the hold display part 71 is the highest, and the brightness | luminance of the hold display part 74 is the lowest.

  136 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA through the center of the holding display portion 72 of the universal memory display unit 70 in FIG. 135 (A) described above.

  The holding display portion 72 is attached to the rear drive base member 70c via the support arm 72a. An LED board 70b and a decorative base member 70a are provided on the front surface of the drive base member 70c. And the light irradiated from LED72b of LED board 70b is permeate | transmitted and diffused by the translucent part 72c of the decoration base member 70a, The front surface of the recessed chamber-shaped holding | maintenance display part 72 located ahead of the translucent part 72c Functions as a light emitting unit.

  The drive base member 70c includes a drive source 72f such as a motor, and a link mechanism 72e that transmits the drive force of the drive source 72f to the support arm 72a. The link mechanism 72e converts the rotational motion of the drive source 72f into the vertical motion of the support arm 72a. Thereby, the hold | maintenance display part 72 functions as a vibration part by moving up and down in conjunction with the support arm 72a. At this time, since the decoration base member 70a, the LED substrate 70b, and the drive base member 70c are not interlocked, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the LED wiring being cut. The support arm 72a may be formed integrally with the holding display unit 72 or may be formed separately.

  The drive base member 70c includes a link mechanism 71e to a link mechanism 74e and a drive source 71f to a drive source 74f with respect to the hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74, respectively. The other hold display unit 71, hold display unit 73, and hold display unit 74 are similarly configured.

  FIG. 136B is a diagram illustrating an operation mode of the hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74.

  The hold display section 71 to the hold display section 74 reciprocate up and down between the normal position and the operation position in the direction in which the support arm 71a to the support arm 74a protrude from the drive base member 70c by the driving force of the drive source 71f to the drive source 74f. It functions as a movable body that repeats. And the movement width of this reciprocating up-and-down movement is larger as the digestion order of the corresponding ordinary map start memory is earlier. Therefore, the movement width of the hold display section 71 is the largest, and the movement width of the hold display section 74 is the smallest. Note that, as described above, the hold display unit 71 moves up and down within a range that does not deviate from the front of the light transmitting unit 71c (LED 71b) even if the movement width is large. The same applies to the other hold display units 71, hold display units 73, and hold display units 74.

  In this way, the general-purpose memory display unit 70 can move the brightness of the light-emitting part and the movement of the vibration part depending on which of the hold-display part 71 to the hold-display part 74 is held and displayed, even in the case of one map start-up memory. The degree of width is different. That is, in the hold display mode corresponding to the general map start memory, the luminance of light emission increases and the movement width of the vibration increases as digestion of the general map start memory approaches. Thereby, since the production scale becomes larger as the digestion of the normal start memory is closer, the expectation of the player can be increased.

[Game Flow]
Here, with reference to FIG. 137, the game flow of the gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 137 is a state transition diagram illustrating a main pattern in which each gaming state transitions to another gaming state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Although the game flow (FIG. 22) showing the state transition diagram of each gaming state has been described in the first embodiment of the present invention, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 The game given to the player depending on the point at which a small hit state is generated and whether the small hit state is triggered by the winning of a game ball to either the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 or the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 The difference in value is very different from the above (FIG. 22). Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment (FIG. 22) will be described.

  The small hit state in the fourth embodiment of the present invention is that the value of the big hit random number extracted when winning in the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 or the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 is the small hit value. This occurs when the result of the variable display game is the second special result mode (small hit result mode).

  The small hit state is generated based on the special figure 1 small hit state (special figure 1 small hit pattern) generated based on the winning at the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 and the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24. The special figure 2 small hit state (special figure 2 small hit pattern) is provided. The special figure 1 small hit state constitutes a second special game state in which the lower large winning port 27b of the lower fluctuation winning device 27 is opened. In addition, the special figure 2 small hit state constitutes a second special game state in which the movable member (movable wing piece) 28a of the up variation winning device 28 is opened, and a big hit state (first special game state) is generated ( It becomes a state transition game for making a transition to. Details of the opening mode of the attacker opening pattern and the blade opening pattern will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the special figure 1 start winning opening 23, the special figure 1 small hit state is established with a probability of 1/200, and the lower large winning opening 27b of the lower fluctuation winning apparatus 27 is opened to the attacker. Is done. Also, when a game ball wins at the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, as in the above (FIG. 22), the special figure 2 small hit state is established with a probability of 195/200, and the up-variable winning device 28 is movable. The member 28a is opened.

  When the special gaming state is changed to the special figure 1 small hit state, the normal gaming state is resumed after the special figure 1 small hit state ends. At this time, in the normal game state after the end of the special figure 1 small hit state, the pre-reading chance mode in which the pre-reading advance notice of the normal chart start memory can be executed while the variable display game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 40 times). Occur. In addition, when the special game state is changed to the special figure 1 small hit state, the special game state is entered again after the special figure 1 small hit state ends, but when the specified number of short-time fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is completed. Is in a normal gaming state.

  Next, the game state transition will be described. In the present embodiment, the normal start gate 25, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, and the upper large winning opening 28 b are arranged in the game area 22 on the left side of the center case 60. The probability per base figure in the normal gaming state is set to 125/128, and even in the normal gaming state, there is a pattern in which the special big hit in FIG.

  As described above, the game board 20 of the present embodiment is configured such that the player makes a left turn in the normal game state and the specific game state. The player hits the right side in a big hit state where the lower big prize opening 27b of the lower fluctuation prize winning device 27 is opened.

  Further, the probability per base in the specific gaming state is set to 125/128, which is the same as that in the normal gaming state, but the base variation time is set to be shortened to 0.5 seconds. Further, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal gaming state is normally set to 90 seconds or 100 seconds, but is shortened to 3 seconds during the prefetch chance mode.

  For this reason, the opportunity to convert the movable member 24a of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 from the closed state to the open state is more likely to occur than in the first embodiment, and special figure 2 start memory is likely to occur. Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a special figure 2 small hit with a probability of 195/200, the upper big prize opening 28b of the upper fluctuation prize winning device 28 is frequently opened. Then, the game ball that has won the upper prize winning opening 28b passes the specific area 641 in the winning unit 600 and becomes V winning, and then a big hit state occurs.

[Processing by game control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 148, a process specialized for the present embodiment among the processes executed by the game control apparatus 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Special map processing]
First, the special figure variation process (S2811) in the special figure game process (FIG. 28) described above will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of special figure variation processing according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. In addition, about the process which is common in 1st Embodiment (FIG. 29), the same process number is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The special figure fluctuation process is a process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is a process for controlling the progress of the fluctuation display game by determining a big hit, a small hit, setting a fluctuation pattern, etc. A process of counting the number of executions of the variable display game in the state (general power support mode) is executed. In the fourth embodiment, a process of counting the number of executions of the variable display game in the prefetch chance mode (specific mode in the normal gaming state) is also executed.

  The game control device 100 starts the special figure fluctuation display game in the process of S2908, and stops the special figure fluctuation display game in the process of S2910. Then, after performing the process (S2911 to S2915) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the specific game state (general power support state) (S2916). .

  When the current gaming state is not in the specific gaming state (the result of S2916 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode (S13801). If the current game state is not in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S13801 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is in the specific gaming state (the result of S2916 is “Y”), or when the current gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S13801 is “Y”), The game control apparatus 100 updates the state update counter that subtracts and counts the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the current gaming state by 1 (S13802). Here, when the gaming state is the specific gaming state, the initial value of the state update counter is set to “100”. When the gaming state is the prefetch chance mode, the initial value of the state update counter is set to “40”. The initial value of the state update counter in the specific gaming state is set in the above-mentioned jackpot process (S3127 in FIG. 33), and the initial value of the state update counter in the prefetch chance mode is a special figure 1 small hit process (see FIG. 141 (S14120).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the state update counter is “0” (S13803). If the state update counter is not “0” (the result of S13803 is “N”), the game control device 100 continues the current gaming state, and thus ends the present process.

  On the other hand, when the state update counter is “0” (the result of S13803 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the current gaming state, and therefore sets the start of the normal gaming state (S2919). Thereafter, the game control device 100 ends this process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the prefetch chance mode in which the normal prefetching notice can be executed while the specified number of variable display games are executed in the normal gaming state occurs. Here, by sharing a short time variation counter capable of counting the number of executions of the variable display game in the specific gaming state as the state update counter, the number of executions of the variable display game can be counted even in the prefetch chance mode. Since the normal game state (prefetch chance mode) and the specific game state do not overlap, the state update counter is not used redundantly.

[Small hit processing]
Next, the small hit process (S2812) in the special figure game process (FIG. 28) described above will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit processing procedure according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. The small hit process (FIGS. 30 and 31) of the first embodiment is a process only for special figure 2 small hits, and the special figure 2 small hit process of this embodiment (S13907 in FIG. 139). The details include the same processing as in FIGS. 142 to 144), but here, a description will be given by adding new reference numerals.

  The small hit processing of the present embodiment is processing for specifying which of the small hits of the special figure 1 small hit and the special figure 2 small hit and controlling the execution (progress) of the small hit state.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 is a small hit (S13901). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (the result of S13901 is “Y”), a special figure 1 small hit pattern determination table shown in FIG. 140A to be described later is set (S13902). The small hit pattern, that is, the attacker release pattern of the bottom fluctuation winning device 27 is determined (S13903). Thereafter, a special figure 1 small hit middle process for controlling the special figure 1 small hit state is executed (S13904), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 2 small hit (the result of S13901 is “N”), the game control device 100, the special figure 2 small hit pattern shown in FIG. 140 (B). A determination table is set (S13905), and a small hit pattern, that is, a blade opening pattern of the up-floating winning device 28 is determined from the set table (S13906). Thereafter, the special figure 2 small hits process for controlling the special figure 2 small hit state is executed (S13907), and this process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 / Special Figure 2 Small Hit Pattern Determination Table]
FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure small hit pattern determination table according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. FIG. 140 (A) is a special figure 1 small hit pattern determination table, and FIG. 140 (B) is a special figure 2 small hit pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), in the special figure 1 small hit pattern determination table, the attacker release mode of the lower fluctuation winning device 27 is set according to the gaming state when the special figure 1 small hit state occurs. Yes. During non-electric support, that is, when the special figure 1 small hit state occurs from the normal gaming state, the lower prize winning opening 27b is opened once for 0.5 seconds with a probability of 100%. A similar release mode is also set during the electric support, that is, when the special figure 1 small hit state occurs from the specific gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the special figure 2 small hit pattern determination table, the blade opening mode of the up variation winning device 28 is set according to the gaming state when the special figure 2 small hit state occurs. Yes. During non-electric support, that is, when the special figure 2 small hit state occurs from the normal gaming state, the movable member 28a is released once for 1.5 seconds with a probability of 100%. In addition, during the electric support, that is, when the special figure 2 small hit state occurs from the specific gaming state, an opening mode is selected in which the movable member 28a is opened once for 1.5 seconds with a probability of 95%, It is set so that the open mode in which the movable member 28a is opened twice for 1.0 second with a probability of 5% is selected.

  In this way, the game value given in the special figure 1 small hit state is not a prize ball but a normal look-ahead chance mode. Although the left-handed game ball is won at the special figure 1 start winning opening 23 and the special figure 1 small hit state is generated, the lower fluctuation prize-winning device 27 can only win the right game ball. When the attacker opens only once for a short time, it is difficult for the player to win a game ball in the lower large winning opening 27b. Therefore, in the special figure 1 small hit state, the player cannot expect winning in the lower large winning opening 27b, and therefore expects the prefetch chance mode.

  On the other hand, the game value given in the special figure 2 small hit state generates a special figure 2 big hit state from the special figure 2 small hit state, which is executed by causing the up-floating winning device 28 to win a game ball ( It is a state transition game for transitioning to The up variation winning device 28 is arranged below the special figure 2 starting prize opening 24, and the player aims to win with the same left strike as if the game ball was won in the special figure 2 starting prize opening 24. Can do. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit state, the player can easily generate a state transition game.

  When the special figure 1 small hit state is generated from the specific gaming state in the special figure 1 small hit pattern determination table, the blade of the up variation winning device 28 is released as an open pattern (the movable member 28a is 1.5 seconds, once). Open) may be set. During the electric support, the movable member 24a of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is frequently opened. At this time, the player aims at the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 rather than the up variation winning apparatus 28. Therefore, the winning probability of the game ball to the up-changing winning device 28 (the possibility that the player will win the prize ball) is low, so that the policy does not deviate from the policy of not giving a prize ball in the special figure 1 hit state.

[Special figure 1 small hit during processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the special figure 1 small hit process (S13904) in the above-described small hit process (FIG. 139) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special figure 1 small hit processing in the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  The special figure 1 small hit middle process is a process for controlling the opening of the lower big prize winning port 27b of the lower fluctuation prize winning device 27 and setting the gaming state after the special figure 1 small hit state ends.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is during non-normal power support, that is, the normal gaming state (S14101).

  If the current gaming state is non-normal power support (during normal gaming state) (the result of S14101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits a small hit fanfare command 1 (S14102), The winning fanfare time 1 is set (S14103).

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not in the non-normal power support (in the specific gaming state) (the result of S14101 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 transmits the small hit fanfare command 2 (S14104). ), A small hit fanfare time 2 is set (S14105).

  Here, in the small hit fanfare time 1 and the small hit fanfare time 2, the small hit fanfare time 1 is longer. This is because when the special gaming state is changed to the special figure 1 small hit state, the prefetch chance mode is newly provided after the special figure 1 small hit state is ended, so that the transition effect to the prefetch chance mode is performed during the fanfare or the fanfare. This is to execute during the ending.

  Next, the game control device 100 stands by until the set fanfare time elapses (the result of S14106 is “N”), and when the fanfare time has elapsed (the result of S14106 is “Y”), the downward fluctuation winning device 27, the lower big prize opening solenoid 27c is set to ON, and the opening time of the lower big prize opening 27b is set (S14107).

  Then, the game control device 100 waits until the opening time of the lower major winning opening 27b elapses (the result of S14108 is “N”), and when the opening time has elapsed (the result of S14108 is “Y”), The big prize opening solenoid 27c is set to OFF (S14109). Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the final opening has been completed (S14110).

  If the final release has not ended (the result of S14110 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the next release (S14111). Then, the game control apparatus 100 waits until the interval time elapses (result of S14112 is “N”), and when the interval time elapses (result of S14112 is “Y”), the process returns to the above-described processing of S14107. Then perform the next release. In this embodiment, as described above (FIG. 140 (A)), since the release is performed once, the processing of S14107 to S14110 is performed only once. Processing is provided so as to cope with changing opening times. For this reason, the lower large winning opening 27b may be opened a plurality of times in the special figure 1 small hit.

  On the other hand, when the final opening is completed (the result of S14110 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball monitoring time (for example, 2.0 seconds) (S14113) and monitors the remaining balls. Wait until the time has elapsed (the result of S14114 is “N”). It should be noted that in the monitoring of the remaining balls when the lower big prize opening 27b of the attacker type is opened, the fact that the game balls are discharged to the outside is considered in view of the fact that it is difficult for inconveniences such as game balls to be clogged. Without detecting it with a sensor, it is only necessary to secure time for the game ball to be discharged to the outside.

  After the lapse of the remaining ball monitoring time (the result of S14114 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (under normal power support) (S14115).

  If it is in the specific game state (the result of S14115 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state update counter that counts the number of variable display games in the specific game state by 1 (S14116) and updates it. It is determined whether or not the subsequent state update counter is “0” (S14117).

  When the state update counter is “0” (the result of S14117 is “Y”), the game control device 100 is set so that the normal gaming state is started as the gaming state after the end of the special figure 1 small hit state. (S14118). If the state update counter is not 0 (the result of S14117 is “N”), the specific game state is continued, so that the game control device 100 sets the game state after the special figure 1 small hit state ends. Not performed.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the specific game state (the result of S14115 is “N”), the game control device 100 is set so that the prefetch chance mode is started as the game state after the special figure 1 small hit state ends ( S14119). Then, an initial value (for example, 40) is set in a state update counter that counts the number of times of the variable display game in the prefetch chance mode (S14120). In addition, when the special gaming state is changed to the special figure 1 small hit state, 40 prefetch chance modes are given, but if there is the remaining number of prefetch chance modes given last time, 40 times are added to the remaining number of times. You may make it do. The prefetch chance mode is ended (reset) when a big hit occurs.

  In this way, after setting the gaming state after the special figure 1 small hit state ends, the game control device 100 transmits the corresponding gaming state command (S14121), and sets the processing number “1” of the special figure variation process. (S14122), and this process is terminated. Thereby, after this process is completed, the game control apparatus 100 controls the fluctuation of the next fluctuation display game in the process of S2810 of the above-described special figure game process (FIG. 28) (S2811, for details, see FIG. 138). The process can be continued.

[Special figure 2 small hit middle processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144, the special figure 2 small hitting process (S13907) in the small hitting process (FIG. 139) will be described. 142 to 144 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hits middle processing of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the special figure 2 small hits process, the setting of the opening time of the upper big prize opening 28b of the top fluctuation winning device 28, the floor opening / closing control in the winning unit 600, and the monitoring process of the remaining balls are executed, and the special figure 2 small hit state is executed. This is a process for controlling execution (progress).

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current gaming state is during non-normal power support, that is, the normal gaming state (S14201).

  When the current gaming state is non-normal power support (in the normal gaming state) (the result of S14201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits a small hit fanfare command 3 (S14202), The hit fanfare time 3 is set (S14203).

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not in the non-normal power support (in the specific gaming state) (the result of S14201 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 transmits the small hit fanfare command 4 (S14204). ), A small hit fanfare time 3 is set (S14205).

  Here, the special figure 2 small hit state may shift from the V prize to the special figure 2 big hit state. The small hit fanfare commands 3 and 4 include information that can identify the number of rounds in the special figure 2 big hit state. The small hitting fanfare time 3 is shorter than the small hitting fanfare time 1 and longer than the small hitting fanfare time 2. The small hitting fanfare command 3 and the small hitting fanfare command 4 are classified according to whether or not non-general power support is being performed.

  Next, the game control device 100 waits until the set fanfare time elapses (the result of S14206 is “N”), and after the fanfare time has elapsed (the result of S14206 is “Y”), A winning opening time (for example, 4.5 seconds) is set (S14207). The special winning opening effective time is a time during which the winning ball detected by the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) of the upper special winning opening 28b is valid. The effective time of the upper university winning opening 28b is a delay time (3 seconds) to the opening time (1.5 seconds) because it takes time for the game ball won immediately before the opening of the movable member 28a to pass through the upper count switch 28d. Seconds). When a signal from the upper count switch 28d is received outside the valid time, for example, it is determined to be unauthorized, and an unauthorized winning command is transmitted to the effect control device 150 to perform unauthorized winning notification (abnormal notification). When the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened a plurality of times, the effective time of the upper prize winning opening 28b is the interval time set in the processing of S14218 described later or the big winning opening opening time set in the processing of S14222. Is also set.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the top prize winning solenoid 28c to ON and sets the opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the top prize winning opening 28b (S14208). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning prize opening period during which the winning to the upper winning prize opening 28b is valid (during the winning prize opening valid time set in the process of S14207 described above) is determined. (S14209). As will be described later, if the remaining ball monitoring period is not in effect (the result of S14224 is “N”), and if there is a remaining ball in the winning unit 600 (the result of S14238 is “N”), the determination process of S14209 is performed again. Is executed.

  When it is during the big prize opening validity period (the result of S14209 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening validity time has passed (S14210).

  Then, if the winning time of the winning a prize opening has not passed (the result of S14210 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the upper winning prize opening 28b (S14211). . Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the signal of the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) has been received. When the game ball passes through the upper prize winning opening 28b (the result of S14211 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball flag and updates the remaining ball count by 1 (S14212). The remaining sphere monitoring time (for example, 30 seconds) is set (S14213). If the game ball has not passed through the upper prize winning opening 28b (the result of S14211 is “N”), the game control device 100 does not set the remaining ball.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is during the blade opening period in which the top prize winning opening 28b is opened (during the big prize opening opening time counting set in the process of S14208 described above) (S14214). ). If it is during the blade opening period (the result of S14214 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening time has elapsed (S14215).

  Then, after the end of the winning a prize opening time (the result of S14215 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the upper winning prize opening solenoid 28c to OFF (S14216). As a result, the movable member 28a rotated in the process of S14208 described above is returned to the initial position (closed state).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the final opening has been completed (S14217). If the final release has not ended (the result of S14117 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the next release (S14218).

  When the final opening is completed (the result of S14117 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of S14119. Similarly, when it is not during the blade opening period (result of S14214 is “N”), and when the opening time of the big prize opening has not passed even during the blade opening period (result of S14215 is “N”), game control The apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of S14119 without setting the upper prize winning solenoid 28c OFF or setting the interval time.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is during the interval period (during the interval time set in the process of S14218 described above) (S14219). If it is during the interval period (the result of S14219 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S14220).

  Then, after the elapse of the interval time (the result of S14220 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the top prize winning solenoid 28c to ON again (S14221), and sets the current prize winning opening time ( S14222). As a result, the movable member 28a that has returned to the initial position in the process of S14216 described above is rotated again, so that the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is not during the interval period (result of S14219 is “N”) and when the interval time has not elapsed even though it is during the interval period (result of S14220 is “N”), the game control device 100 again The process proceeds to S14224 without opening the special winning opening 28b.

  In addition, when it is not during the big winning opening effective period (the result of S14209 is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of S14224 without performing the opening processing of the upper big winning opening 28b.

  In addition, after the special winning opening effective time has elapsed (the result of S14210 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a remaining ball flag (S14223). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere flag is set in the processing of S14212 described above. When there is a remaining ball flag (the result of S14223 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the processing of S14224, but when there is no remaining ball flag (the result of S14223 is “N”), The process proceeds to S14241 without performing the sphere monitoring process.

  Here, in the process after S14224, the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning unit 600 is executed, and in the process after S14240, the game state after the special figure 2 small hit state is set.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during the remaining ball monitoring period (while remaining ball monitoring time is set in the process of S14213 described above) (S14224). Here, when it is not during the remaining ball monitoring period (the result of S14224 is “N”), as described above, the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of S14309 described above.

  If it is during the remaining ball monitoring period (the result of S14224 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining ball monitoring time has elapsed (S14225).

  If the remaining ball monitoring time has not elapsed (the result of S14225 is “N”), the game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is the floor opening timing for opening the floor member 620 of the winning unit 600 ( S14226). If it is the floor opening timing (the result of S14226 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the floor member solenoid 620a to ON (S14227). If it is not the floor opening timing (the result of S14226 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the process of S14228 without performing the process of S14227.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a floor closing timing for closing the floor member 620 (S14228). When it is the floor closing timing (the result of S14228 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the floor member solenoid 620a to OFF (S14229). In addition, when it is not the floor closing timing (the result of S14228 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the process of S14230 without performing the process of S14229.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the remaining ball switch 650a (S14230). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the detection signal of the remaining sphere switch 650a is received. The remaining ball switch 650a is provided in the winning ball discharge flow path 650 through which the game balls that have not won the specific area 641 flow down, and the game ball and the normal area 642 flowed down to the winning ball discharge flow path 650 by the opening of the floor member 620. Alternatively, a game ball guided through the normal area 643 and guided to the winning ball discharge channel 650 is detected.

  When the game ball passes through the remaining ball switch 650a (the result of S14230 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the remaining ball count by 1 (S14231). If the game ball has not passed through the remaining ball switch 650a (the result of S14230 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the process of S14232 without performing the process of S14231.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal area switch 642a or the normal area switch 643a (S14232). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether a detection signal of the normal area switch 642a provided in the normal area 642 or a detection signal of the normal area switch 643a provided in the normal area 643 is received.

  When the game ball passes through the normal area switch 642a (the result of S14232 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits a normal area pass command (S14233). If the game ball has not passed through the normal area switch 642a (the result of S14232 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the process of S14234 without performing the process of S14233.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area switch 641a (S14234). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether a detection signal of the specific area switch 641a provided in the specific area 641 is received.

  If the game ball passes through the specific area switch 641a (the result of S14234 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits a specific area pass command (S14235), and updates the remaining ball count by one. (S14236), the operation of the condition device (right execution bonus) is set (S14237). If the game ball has not passed through the specific area switch 641a (the result of S14234 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the process of S14238 without performing the process of S14235 to S14237.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining sphere is “0” (S14238). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere count is “0”. If the remaining ball is “0” (the result of S14238 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of S14240. If the remaining ball is not “0” (the result of S14238 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of S14209 described above.

  When the remaining ball monitoring time has elapsed (the result of S14225 is “Y”), the game control device 100 transmits a remaining ball error command to the effect control device 150 because the remaining ball flag remains set (S14239). ), The process of S14240 is executed. Thereby, the production control device 150 performs a remaining sphere error notification (abnormality notification).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the condition device is operating (S14240).

  If the condition device is not in operation (the result of S14240 is “N”) and if there is no remaining ball flag after the end of the winning prize effective time (the result of S14223 is “N”), the game control device 100 It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the ordinary power support mode (in the specific gaming state) (S14241).

  When the current gaming state is in the ordinary power support mode (the result of S14241 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 updates the state update counter by 1 (S14242), and the state update counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S14243). When the state update counter is “0” (the result of S14243 is “Y”), since the prescribed number of short-time fluctuations has ended, the game control device 100 sets the start of the normal gaming state (S14244).

  If the state update counter is not “0” (the result of S14243 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not execute the process of S14244 and continues the process of S14245 because the general power support mode is continued. Run.

  Further, when the current gaming state is not in the normal power support mode (the result of S14241 is “N”), the normal gaming state is continued, so that the game control device 100 executes the processes from S14242 to S14244. Without executing this, the process of S14245 is executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number “1” of the special figure variation process (S14245), and ends this process. Thereby, after this process is completed, the game control apparatus 100 controls the fluctuation of the next fluctuation display game in the process of S2810 of the above-described special figure game process (FIG. 28) (S2811, for details, see FIG. 138). The process can be continued.

  On the other hand, when the condition device is in operation (the result of S14240 is “Y”), since the occurrence of a big win is confirmed by the V winning, the game control device 100 sets the V winning flag (S14246). Various time values such as the effective time and the remaining sphere monitoring time are cleared (S14247).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number “3” of the jackpot process (S14248), and ends this process. Thereby, after this process is completed, the game control device 100 controls the big hit process (S2813) for controlling the big hit state (first special game state) in the process of S2810 of the special figure game process (FIG. 28). The process can proceed to FIG.

[Normal game processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the normal game process (S2709) in the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the usual game process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the usual game process, the input of the ordinary figure start gate 25 is monitored, the entire process related to the usual figure fluctuation display game is controlled, and the display of the ordinary figure is set. Moreover, in this embodiment, the result information of the usual chart start memory is determined in advance.

  The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of a game ball to the gate switch 25a (S14501). In the gate switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the ordinary figure starting gate 25, a winning random number for determining the winning of the ordinary figure variable display game is extracted and stored as the ordinary figure starting memory, and the gaming state is prefetched. If the mode is in the mode, this is a process of pre-reading the normal map to determine the result information of the normal map start memory before the execution of the normal map change display game. Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a general power winning switch monitoring process (S14502). The general electric winning switch monitoring process is a process for monitoring the count number of the starting opening 2 switch 24d provided in the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24, that is, the number of game balls won in the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24. This is a process of closing the movable member 24a based on the fact that the number of winning balls to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 has reached the upper limit (for example, 6).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game process timer by subtracting 1 from the normal game process timer if the normal game process timer has already expired and is not “0” (S14503). It is determined whether or not “0” is “0” (S14504).

  When the usual game process timer is “0” (the result of S14504 is “Y”), the game control device 100 branches the usual figure game sequence to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the usual game process number. The table is set in the register (S14505).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number using the usual game sequence branch table (S14506). Then, after the process corresponding to the usual game process number is completed, the return address as the return destination is saved in the stack area (S14507). Thereafter, a process corresponding to the usual game process number is executed (S14508).

  When the usual game process number is “0” (the result of S14508 is “0”), the game control device 100 executes the usual figure usual process (S14509). The usual figure normal process is a process of monitoring the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game, and performing lottery (winning determination) of the result of the usual figure fluctuation display game, determination of the stop symbol and determination of the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern). .

  When the usual game process number is “1” (the result of S14508 is “1”), the game control device 100 executes the process during the usual figure change (S14510). The process for changing the normal map is a process for setting the change and stop time in the normal map change display game.

  When the usual game process number is “2” (the result of S14508 is “2”), the game control device 100 executes a usual figure display process (S14511). In the process of displaying the normal map, the stop display of the normal map variable display game is set, and if the game result is successful, the opening time of the movable member 24a of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 according to the general power support state is set. It is a process to perform.

  When the usual game process number is “3” (the result of S14508 is “3”), the game control device 100 executes the process during the usual figure (S14512). In the normal hit processing, the opening / closing control of the movable member 24a of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 and the setting of the remaining ball timer for effectively discharging the remaining balls in the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 are performed. It is.

  When the ordinary game processing number is “4” (the result of S14508 is “4”), the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing (S14513). The ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is a process for monitoring the remaining ball timer and setting the ending per universal figure.

  When the usual game process number is “5” (the result of S14508 is “5”), the game control device 100 executes the usual game end process (S14514). The normal figure end process is a process for performing a transition setting for performing the normal figure normal process (S14509) after performing the set ending.

  When the process corresponding to each process number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a table for controlling the fluctuation of the general-purpose display device 55 of the collective display device 50 (S14515), and the symbol fluctuation in the general-purpose display device 55 A control process is executed (S14516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the usual game process timer is not “0” (the result of S14504 is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of S14515.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (S14501) in the above-described ordinary game process (FIG. 145) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of gate switch monitoring processing according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 25a (S14601). If there is no input to the gate switch 25a (the result of S14601 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the gate switch monitoring process.

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the gate switch 25a (the result of S14601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of universal chart hold (common chart start memory) is less than the upper limit (for example, the predetermined number 4). Is determined (S14602). Then, when the number of times of usual holding is not less than the upper limit value, that is, when the upper limit value is reached (the result of S14602 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends this process.

  If the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit (the result of S14602 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved drawings by 1 (S14603) and includes information on the number of reserved drawings. The command setting process for setting the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 150 is executed (S14604).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of pending reservations (S14605), and saves the winning random number in the random number storage area of the RWM (S14606).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the symbol random number per symbol in the symbol random number storage area of the RWM (S14607), and further saves the symbol variation pattern random number in the symbol variable pattern random number storage region (S14607). S14608).

  After that, if the gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode, the game control device 100 executes a general figure hold information determination process for performing a normal prefetch determination (S14609), and ends this process. Note that the details of the ordinary map hold information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Normal map hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the universal map hold information determination process (S14609) in the above-described gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 146) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of universal hold information determination processing according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  The general map hold information determination process is for determining the result related information (result information of the general map change display game) corresponding to the general map start memory before the start timing of the general map change display game based on the general map start memory. This process is executed only when the gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current game state is a normal game state in the prefetch chance mode (S14701). If it is not in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S14701 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends this process.

  When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S14701 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the acquired winning random number value matches the winning determination value. In response to this, a hit determination process for determining whether or not it is a normal hit is executed (S14702).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the hit determination process is a win (S14703). If the determination result is a win (the result of S14703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 acquires a hit stop symbol corresponding to the hit symbol random number (S14704). On the other hand, when the determination result is not successful (the result of S14703 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 acquires the off-line stop symbol (S14705).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a general-purpose look-ahead command corresponding to the hit determination result and the stop symbol (hit or miss) (S14706), and executes a command setting process for transmitting to the effect control device 150. (S14708). Thereafter, the game control device 100 ends this process.

  As described above, in this process, only when the current gaming state is the prefetch chance mode, the common map prefetch command is prepared in the process of S14706, and the determination result (prefetch result) corresponding to the common chart start memory is associated. It is possible to notify the effect control device 150 prior to the start timing of the normal map change display game based on the normal map start memory. The effect control device 150 can specify the opening pattern of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 at the time of hitting from the stop symbol information of the ordinary map prefetch command. As a result, the effect control device 150 changes the display mode of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 as a notice effect, for example, to the player before the start timing of the normal-variable display game. The result can be notified. Here, the game control device 100 functions as a prior determination means, and the effect control device 150 functions as a notice effect means.

[Normal specifications]
Here, with reference to FIG. 148, a description will be given of specifications relating to the universal map display game. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of specifications related to the common diagram in the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the normal variation display game is won with a uniform probability of 125/128 in all gaming states. Further, the normal time change time is set differently depending on the game state. For the normal mode change time in the normal mode (normal game state) in the non-general power support mode, 90 seconds or 100 seconds is selected with a probability of 50%. The usual figure change time in the chance mode in the non-general power support mode (the normal gaming state in the look-ahead chance mode) is 3 seconds. The normal figure change time during the general electric power support mode (during a specific gaming state) is 0.5 seconds.

  In addition, the opening pattern of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 in the case of hitting a normal figure differs depending on whether or not the normal power support mode is in effect. The special figure 2 starting prize opening 24 is opened once with a 95% probability with an opening time of 0.5 seconds, and with a 5% probability with an opening time of 3 seconds. Opened once. In addition, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is opened twice with a 50% probability, once with a 1.5 second opening time, and once with a 50% probability. It is opened 3 times with an opening time of seconds.

  In this way, even if the gaming state is in the non-normal power support mode (in the normal gaming state), if the pre-reading chance mode is started in response to the special figure 1 small hit, the normal figure fluctuation time is changed to the normal mode. It is considerably shortened in comparison. Thereby, during the prefetch chance mode, the digestion speed of the general map start memory displayed on the general map memory display unit 70 is high. When the gaming state is in the ordinary power support mode, the ordinary time fluctuation time is further shortened and the opening time of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 at the time of the ordinary time is longer.

[Processing by production control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 149 to FIG. 166, processing specialized in the present embodiment and examples of effects among the processing executed by the effect control device 150 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, referring to FIG. 149 to FIG.

[Normal map pre-reading effect setting processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a general-purpose prefetching effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. The general-purpose prefetch effect setting process is executed by the main control microcomputer 151 (1st CPU) 151 of the effect control device 150.

  The general-purpose pre-reading effect setting process is a process for setting a pre-reading effect (notice effect) for the general-purpose chart start memory that occurs when the gaming state is in the pre-reading chance mode.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode (S14901). If it is not in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S14901 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When the current game state is in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S14901 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not a normal prefetch command has been received from the game control device 100 (S14902). Then, when the ordinary map prefetch command has not been received (the result of S14902 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  When the common map prefetch command is received (the result of S14902 is “Y”), the production control device 150 sets a general map hold display mode determination table corresponding to the prefetch command (S14903), and based on the set table. The hold display mode of the hold display portions 71 to 74 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 is determined (S14904). Details of the general map hold display mode determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the production control device 150 saves the hold display mode determined in the above-described S14904 in the general map hold storage area corresponding to the number of normal maps stored (S14905). Subsequently, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the display color of the hold display mode is greater than or equal to red, that is, red or rainbow (S14906). If the display color is not red or more, that is, white or blue (the result of S14906 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the display color of the hold display mode is greater than or equal to red (the result of S14906 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 saves the vibration effect information in the general map hold storage area corresponding to the number of normal maps stored. (S14907), and this process is terminated.

[Normal figure hold display mode determination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the universal figure hold display mode determination table set in the process of S14903 of the above-described general figure prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 149) will be described. FIG. 150 is an example of a universal map display mode determination table according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  There are three types of results of the normal map fluctuation display game in the look-ahead chance mode: off-normal, short open per 0.5 second (0.5 seconds), and long open per general map (3 seconds). (FIG. 148). As shown in FIG. 150, in the present embodiment, tables (A) to (C) corresponding to the result patterns of these three patterns are provided as the universal map display mode determination table. Note that the release pattern (time) can be specified from the stop symbol information of the common map prefetch command.

  150 (A) to 150 (C) are general map hold display mode determination tables used in the case of a deviation from the normal map, short open per general map, and long open per general map. In the general map hold display mode determination table, the types of colors that can be selected as the hold display modes of the hold display units 71 to 74 of the general map storage display unit 70 and the selection ratio of each color are defined.

  There are four types of colors for the hold display area: “white”, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”. The color has a high expectation that the result of the usual figure variation display game will be per ordinary figure in the order of “white”, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and a long opening advantageous to the player will be given.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), “white” or “blue” can be selected in the case of an extraordinary figure, and “white” having the lowest expectation is selected with a probability of 99%. “Blue” is selected with a probability of 1%. The hold display portion in the case where it is out of the normal map is displayed in white with a probability of 99%.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (B), in the case of a short circuit opening per regular map, “white”, “blue” or “red” can be selected, and “white” is selected with a probability of 85%, and 14% “Blue” is selected with probability, and “red” is selected with 1% probability. Even if it is per ordinary figure, the opening time of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is as short as 0.5 seconds, and it is not easy to win the game ball, so the probability of selecting “red” with high expectation is low. . The hold display portion in the case of a short opening per usual map is displayed in white with a probability of 85%.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (C), “blue”, “red” or “rainbow” can be selected in the case of long open per normal map, “blue” is selected with a probability of 5%, and 75% “Red” is selected with probability, and “rainbow” is selected with 20% probability. In the long opening per usual figure, the opening time of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is as long as 3 seconds, and there is a high possibility of winning the game ball. Therefore, the hold display portion in the case of a long open per normal display is displayed with a high expectation of red or rainbow color with a probability of 95%.

  In this way, the notice effect of the general-purpose variable display game corresponding to the player is performed according to the display color of the hold display unit corresponding to the degree of expectation. When the display color is “Red” or “Rainbow”, the per-standard figure is fixed, and when the display color is “White”, it is out of the normal figure, or the per-standard figure is less likely to win (short open). . In addition, “blue” may be selected for all three patterns. If the display color is “blue”, it may deviate from the usual figure. A thrilling feeling that there is no remains in the player. The notice effect may not be able to predict the game value to be given. Therefore, the interest of the usual figure change display game can be enhanced by the notice effect in the hold display part of the usual figure memory display unit 70.

Note that, as the hold display mode of the hold display unit, a lighting mode (blinking, luminance) or the like may be set together with the color. For example, “white” is low-brightness display, “blue” is medium-brightness display, “red” is high-brightness display, and “rainbow” is high-brightness and blinking display. Display mode.

[Center case effect control processing]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the center case effect control process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The center case effect control process is executed by the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 151 of the effect control device 150.

  The center case effect control process is a process of executing an effect in the effect agent provided in the center case 60 in the effect mode (light emission mode, operation mode) based on the information saved in the ordinary map storage area.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode (S15101). If the current gaming state is in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S15101 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 lights the LED of the chance mode display section 75 (S15102). On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not in the prefetch chance mode (the result of S15101 is “N”), the effect control device 150 turns off the LED of the chance mode display section 75 (S15103).

  Next, the production control device 150 acquires the information stored in the usual map storage area (S15104), and determines whether or not the number of reserved memories is greater than “0”, that is, whether there is a reserved memory (S15105). ). Here, in the general map hold memory area, a digest hold storage area for storing information on the general map start memory corresponding to the currently executed normal map variable display game, and a general map variable display game waiting for execution are stored. A standby holding storage area for storing information of the figure start storage is provided. In the number of reserved storages in the process of S15105, the number of waiting ordinary start memory is counted.

  In the case where the number of stored customary drawings is larger than “0” (the result of S15105 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 displays each movable body (holding display unit) 71 in the lighting color stored in the standby holding storage area. The LEDs 71b to 74b of ˜74 are turned on (S15106). The lighting color is the display color of the hold display mode set in the above-described general-purpose prefetching effect setting process (FIG. 149).

  Next, the effect control device 150 determines whether there is vibration effect information (S15107). The vibration effect information is set in the general diagram start memory in which the display color is “red” or “rainbow” in the above-described general map prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 149). When there is vibration effect information (the result of S15107 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 moves the movable body of the hold display unit corresponding to the general-purpose hold storage in which the vibration effect information is stored up and down. To vibrate (S15108).

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved maps is “0” (the result of S15105 is “N”), the production control device 150 turns off the LEDs 71b to 74b of all the movable bodies (holding display units) 71 to 74. (S15109) Further, the vibrations of all movable bodies (holding display units) 71 to 74 are stopped (S15110). If there is no vibration effect information in the process of S15107 described above (the result of S15107 is “N”), the effect control device 150 stops only the vibrations of all movable bodies (holding display units) 71 to 74. (S15110).

  In the present embodiment, the general-purpose hold storage stored in the pre-reading chance mode described above (FIG. 149) including the notice effect information during the pre-reading chance mode is the same as that of the pre-reading chance mode. The notice effect is executed until the figure holding memory is consumed.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the normal-variation display game is currently changing (S15111).

  When the normal map is changing (the result of S15111 is “Y”), the production control device 150 blinks the general power LED 24h in the lighting color stored in the digestion pending storage area (S15112). Here, the front of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is flashed and displayed in the display color of the hold display mode set in the general figure start display memory corresponding to the changing normal figure change display game. An effect that makes the mouth 24 open is performed.

  If the normal map is not changing (the result of S15111 is “N”), the production control device 150 determines whether or not it is during the normal map release period in which the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is open ( S15113). If it is not during the normal opening period (the result of S15113 is “N”), the effect control device 150 turns off the general power LED 24h (S15114). In this case, there is no normal map change display game that is changing, and since there is no normal map release period, the normal map start memory is not generated. Therefore, the production is not performed.

  In addition, when it is during the normal release period (the result of S15113 is “Y”), the production control device 150 turns on the power transmission LED 24h with the lighting color stored in the digestion pending storage area (S15115). Here, the game result of the usual figure variation display game that has been executed is the usual figure, and the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is open. Therefore, the front of the special figure 2 start prize opening 24 is lit in the display color of the hold display mode set in the normal figure start memory corresponding to the usual figure, thereby informing the opening of the special figure 2 start prize opening 24. Then, an effect that gives a special feeling is performed.

  In this process, the lighting / flashing display of the general power LED 24h in the above-described processes of S15111 to S15115 is performed for all gaming states, but may be limited to the gaming state in the prefetch chance mode.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is currently waiting for execution of the special figure 2 variation display game (S15116). The special figure 2 variable waiting state means that the game state is a big hit state (first special game state), a small hit state (second special game state), or a state where the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation standby is not in progress (the result of S15116 is "N"), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is currently fluctuating (S15117).

  When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of S15117 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 blinks the special electricity LED 28h of the up fluctuation winning device 28 and the special electricity LED 27h of the down fluctuation winning device 27 (S15118). Here, there is an effect in which the upper special prize opening 28b or the lower big prize opening 27b is expected to be opened as a result of the changing special figure 2 variable display game as a winning result.

  When the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of S15117 is “N”), the production control device 150 is in the normal figure opening period in which the special figure 2 starting prize opening 24 is open or in the big prize opening opening period. It is determined whether or not there is (S15119). If it is neither the regular opening period nor the big prize opening opening period (the result of S15119 is “N”), the effect control device 150 causes the special electric LED 28h of the up fluctuation winning apparatus 28 and the special electric LED 27h of the down fluctuation prize winning apparatus 27. Is turned off (S15120). Here, the special figure 2 start memory is not generated, and there is no possibility that the special figure 2 start memory is generated due to the opening of the ordinary power. In addition, since the large winning opening in the special gaming state is not open, there is no possibility that the up variation winning device 28 or the down variation winning device 27 is opened. Therefore, the production is not performed.

  In addition, when it is during the regular opening period or during the big prize opening opening period (the result of S15119 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 is connected to the special electric LED 28h of the up variation winning device 28 and the down variation winning device 27. The special electric LED 27h is turned on (S15121). Here, since there is an expectation of occurrence of the special figure 2 start memory due to the opening of the ordinary train, an effect is made to expect the possibility of deriving the hit result based on the special figure 2 start memory. In addition, since either the up variation winning device 28 or the down variation winning device 27 is opened during the special winning game opening period, the effect of notifying the opening of the large winning opening is performed. The special power LED to be turned on may be limited to the open prize opening.

  Similarly, even when the special figure 2 fluctuation standby is in progress (the result of S15116 is "Y"), the effect control device 150 lights the special electric LED 28h of the up fluctuation winning apparatus 28 and the special electric LED 27h of the down fluctuation winning apparatus 27 ( S15121). Here, since the special figure 2 start memory has been generated, an effect of expecting the possibility of deriving a hit result based on the special figure 2 start memory is performed.

  In this process, lighting / flashing display of the special LEDs 28h and 27h in the above-described processes of S15116 to S15121 is performed for all gaming states, but may be limited to the gaming state in the prefetch chance mode. Moreover, although the special electric LED 28h of the up fluctuation winning device 28 and the special electric LED 27h of the down fluctuation winning device 27 are set as the targets of lighting / flashing, only the special electric LED 28h of the up fluctuation winning device 28 may be used. In this case, in particular, the occurrence of a big hit state from the V prize can be conscious (expected). Further, the special power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, the special power LED 28h of the up variation winning device 28, and the special power LED 27h of the down variation winning device 27 may be turned on when the winning of the game ball is detected.

[Small hit effect setting processing]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the small hit effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. The small hit effect setting process is executed by the main control microcomputer 151 (1st CPU) 151 of the effect control device 150.

  The small hit effect setting process is a process of setting an effect according to the type of the received command when the small hit fanfare command (small hit FF command) transmitted from the game control device 100 is received.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not the small hit FF command 1 has been received (S15201). The small hit FF command 1 is a command that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 150 in the process of S14102 in the special figure 1 small hit middle processing (FIG. 141) described above. Figure 1 shows a small hit.

  When the small hit FF command 1 is received (the result of S15201 is “Y”), the production control device 150 sets the execution of the prefetch chance mode rush production over the small hit period (S15202), and ends this processing. To do. At this time, the effect of notifying that the special figure 1 hit is not performed. An example of the prefetch chance mode entry effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the small hit FF command 1 has not been received (the result of S15201 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the small hit FF command 2 has been received (S15203). The small hitting FF command 2 is a command that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 150 in the process of S14103 in the special figure 1 small hitting process (FIG. 141) described above. A small hit is shown.

  When the small hit FF command 2 is received (the result of S15203 is “Y”), the production control device 150 sets the execution of the ordinary power support period shortening production over the small hit period (S15204), and performs this process. finish. There are frequent chances of opening the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 (big hit chance) during the power train support, and even if the lower big winning opening 27b of the bottom variable prize winning device 27 is opened for a short time due to the special figure 1 small hit. I'm not happy for the player. Therefore, the ordinary power support period shortening effect displays, for example, a message “Unfortunately! Subtract the number of power support!” On the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31.

  If the small hit FF command 2 has not been received (the result of S15203 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the small hit FF command 3 has been received (S15205). The small hit FF command 3 is a command that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 150 in the process of S14202 in the special figure 2 small hit middle processing (FIG. 142) described above. FIG. 2 shows a small hit.

  When the small hit FF command 3 is received (the result of S15205 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 sets the execution of the small hit occurrence effect 1 (S15206) and executes the normal small hit effect. Setting is performed (S15207), and this process is terminated. The special figure 2 small hit may cause a big hit through a state transition game in the winning unit 600. Therefore, the small hit generation effect 1 displays, for example, a message “Lucky! A chance to generate a big hit!” On the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31.

  When the small hit FF command 3 has not been received (the result of S15205 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the small hit FF command 4 has been received (S15208). The small hit FF command 4 is a command that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 150 in the process of S14203 in the special figure 2 small hit middle processing (FIG. 142) described above. 2 small hits are shown.

  When the small hit FF command 4 is received (the result of S15208 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 sets the execution of the small hit occurrence effect 2 (S15209) and executes the normal small hit effect. Set (S15210), the process is terminated. Special figure 2 small hits may cause a big hit through a state transition game in the winning unit 600, and the frequency of special figure 2 small hits will increase during normal power support. Therefore, the small hit generation effect 2 displays, for example, a message “It is a chance to generate the next big hit!” On the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31.

  If the small hit FF command 4 has not been received (the result of S15208 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

[Special figure hold display mode, ordinary map hold display mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, an example of the display mode of the special map hold display and the universal map hold display will be described. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure hold display mode and the universal map hold display mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  As described above, the information in the general-purpose storage stored in the general-purpose storage area (digestion storage area, standby storage area) of the game control device 100 is effect control in the general-purpose information storage determination process (FIG. 147). Transmitted to the device 150. Thereby, the production | presentation control apparatus 150 can perform the notification effect (prefetching effect) which carries out the advance notification of a game result by the display mode of the holding | maintenance display parts 71-74 of the common figure memory | storage display unit 70. FIG.

  Similarly, the information on the special figure holding memory stored in the special figure holding storage area (digestion holding storage area, standby holding storage area) of the game control device 100 is the holding memory prior determination process of the special figure game process (FIG. 28). Through (S2808), it is transmitted to the effect control device 150 in the processing of S2809. As a result, the effect control device 150 can perform a notice effect (prefetch effect) in which a game result is notified in advance by the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display unit 81 and the special figure 2 hold display unit 82.

  FIG. 153 (A) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 hold display mode during non-general power support. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 hold display unit 81 is displayed on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31.

  The notice effect in the special figure 1 hold display unit 81 is performed by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 hold display). There are four display colors: “white”, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”. The display color is expected to increase in the order of “white” <“blue” <“red” <“rainbow”. “White” and “Blue” are selectable when the game result is out of order, and the special figure 1 is a small hit or big hit. “White” indicates that the game result is likely to be out of place, “Blue” "" Indicates that any game result is possible. “Red” indicates that the game result can be selected in the case of the special figure 1 small hit or big hit, and the game result equal to or larger than the small hit is determined. “Rainbow” can be selected only when the game result is a big hit and the special figure 1 small hit has not occurred within the predetermined period immediately before (a direct hit big hit). Indicates that the result is confirmed.

  In addition, the notice effect of the special figure 1 start memory is not performed when the game state is during the ordinary power support. In the special figure 1 hold display section 81 that is supporting ordinary electric power, “white” is always selected regardless of the game result.

  FIG. 153 (B) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 hold display mode during non-general power support. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 hold display section 82 is disposed below the center case 60 and has four hold display sections (light emitting sections) corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory.

  The notice effect in the special figure 2 hold display section 82 is performed by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory (the special figure 2 hold display). There are four types of display colors, “white”, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow” as in FIG. The display color is expected to increase in the order of “white” <“blue” <“red” <“rainbow”. “White” and “Blue” are selectable when the game result is out of order, and the special figure 2 is a small hit or big hit. “White” indicates that the game result is likely to be out of place, “Blue” "" Indicates that any game result is possible. “Red” indicates that the game result can be selected when the special figure 2 is a small hit or a big hit, and the game result is determined to be a small hit or more. “Rainbow” can be selected only when the game result is a big hit (without hitting a V prize) without the special figure 2 small hit (in the case of a direct hit big hit), and the game result of the big hit is confirmed. Indicates that

  FIG. 153 (C) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 hold display mode during the support of ordinary power transmission. During normal power support, special figure 2 start memory is likely to occur and the normal figure fluctuation time is short, so the special figure 2 start memory is quickly digested (that is, the display time of the hold display in the special figure 2 hold display section 82) short). Therefore, the hold display mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner compared to FIGS. 150 (A) and 150 (B).

  There are three display colors for the hold display: “white”, “red”, and “rainbow”. The display color is expected to increase in the order of “white” <“red” <“rainbow”. “White” indicates that the game result is off or can be selected in the case of special figure 2 small hit, and the game result below the small hit is determined. “Red” indicates that the game result can be selected when the special figure 2 is a small hit or a big hit, and the game result of the small hit or more is confirmed. “Rainbow” can be selected only when the game result is a big hit (without hitting a V prize) without the special figure 2 small hit (in the case of a direct hit big hit), and the game result of the big hit is confirmed. Indicates that

  FIG. 153 (D) is a diagram showing a general map hold display mode during the prefetch chance mode. As described above, the notice effect of the normal start memory is limited to the gaming state during the prefetch chance mode. During the pre-reading chance mode, there are three types of game results in the normal start memory: disengagement, hit short open (per short), or hit long open (per long) (see FIG. 148). The general figure hold display mode has been described for each game result in FIG. 150 described above, but here, will be described for each display color.

  There are four types of display colors for the hold display: “white”, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”. The display color is expected to increase in the order of “white” <“blue” <“red” <“rainbow”. “White” means that the game result is out of play or per short, “Blue” means that any game result is possible, and “Red” means that the game result is per short or long. Indicates. “Rainbow” indicates that the game result per long is fixed.

  In the pre-reading chance mode, the game results in the normal start memory are set so that the occurrence probability increases in the order of outlier <per long <per short. In the gaming machine (1 type + 2 type) that generates a big hit if the game ball that has won the top prize winning port 28b of the up-changing prize winning device 28 as in the present invention further wins V in the winning unit 600, the loss probability is set low. As a result, the occurrence frequency of the prefetch chance mode triggered by the occurrence of the special figure 1 small hit is increased, and the normal time fluctuation time in the prefetch chance mode is switched from normal (90 seconds or 100 seconds) to shortened (3 seconds). As a result, even if the probability per base figure in the prefetch chance mode does not change, an effect equivalent to the change of the probability per base figure triggered by the hit (general figure certain change) can be obtained.

[Example of general notice in the prefetch chance mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 154 to FIG. 157, the pre-reading chance mode entry effect and the notice start effect (pre-reading effect) of the normal diagram start memory will be described. FIGS. 154 to 157 are diagrams showing examples of effects in the prefetch chance mode according to the fourth embodiment of this invention. Here, the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31 and the example of the effect provided on the center case 60 (the universal memory display unit 70, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, and the up variation winning device 28) are shown. .

  FIG. 154 (A) to FIG. 154 (D) are diagrams illustrating the prefetch chance mode entry effect.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (A), on the main display screen 32 of the main display device 31, the identification information of the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed at the center of the screen. And the special figure 1 hold display part 81 is provided in the lower left of the screen, and three special figure 1 hold displays among the upper limit four are displayed in the order of storage from the left. Further, on the left side of the special figure 1 hold display part 81, there is provided a digest hold display part 80 for displaying the start memory corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed. In addition, a fourth symbol display section 83 is provided at the upper right of the screen for informing (producing) the situation and result of the special figure variation display game. The 4th symbol display section 83 is for the special figure 2 variable display game on the right side and for the special figure 1 variable display game on the left side, and in the unexecuted state, the black circle “●”, the circle “O”, the double circle “ ◎ ”is displayed (identification information), and during the change, it changes in the order of black circle“ ● ”, circle“ ○ ”, and double circle“ ◎ ”. “●”, small hit is “◯”, and big hit is double circle “◎”. In addition, on the upper left of the screen, there is provided a general map display unit 84 for informing (producing) the situation and result of the normal map variable display game. In the non-executed state, the general-purpose display unit 84 displays any one of the display forms (identification information) of “X”, circle “◯”, and double circle “◎”. `` X '', circle `` ○ '', double circle `` ◎ '' in the order, when the fluctuation is stopped, the deviation is `` X '', the short per circle is `` ○ '', the long per circle is `` double '' `` ◎ '' Become. In addition, the 4th symbol display part 83 and the general symbol display part 84 are good also as what alert | reports only the condition of a change display, changing a display mode only during a change.

  Here, the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. The special figure fluctuation display game being executed is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. On the main display screen 32, the identification information is variably displayed. The digest hold display section 80 displays the same square hold display as the special figure 1 hold display, and the 4th symbol display section 83 for the special figure 1 on the left is in the order of “●”, “○”, “◎”. The display is variable.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the special figure 1 variable display game ends in a variable state, stops in the second special result mode with the identification information “1, 3, 5”, and the fourth symbol display unit 83 Stop at “○”. Thus, the special figure 1 small hit state (second special game state) is entered. In the normal gaming state, when the special figure 1 is a small hit, the pre-reading chance mode capable of executing the pre-reading effect of the normal drawing is entered.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 154 (C) and (D), in the special figure 1 small hit state, the lower large winning opening 27b of the lower fluctuation winning apparatus 27 is only once for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds). Converted from closed to open. Meanwhile, on the main display screen 32, a message “Prefetch chance mode has entered!” Is displayed on the entire screen, and subsequently the images of the general memory display unit 70, the second start winning opening 24, and the up swing winning device 28. A prefetch chance mode entry effect is displayed in which a message prompting the player to play while paying attention to the display is displayed. The prefetch chance mode entry effect is set in the process of S15202 of the aforementioned small hit effect setting process (FIG. 152).

  In addition, since the normal figure start memory is not generated during this period, the hold display portions 71 to 74 of the general figure storage display unit 70 are in the off state, and the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning port 24 is also in the off state. . Further, since there is no occurrence of special figure 2 start memory, special electric LED 28h is in an extinguished state. These effects are executed by the effect control device 150 in the above-described center case effect control process (FIG. 151).

  FIG. 155 to FIG. 157 are diagrams for explaining a conventional prefetch effect in the prefetch chance mode. Below, production execution will be described with reference to the above-described center case production control process (FIG. 151).

  FIG. 155 (A) shows a state immediately after the special figure 1 small hit state is finished and the gaming state becomes the prefetch chance mode. At the center of the main display screen 32, the pre-read chance mode entry effect ends, and the identification information is once displayed in the previous stop mode “1, 3, 5” until a new variable display game is started. The number of special figure fluctuations (remaining number of times) during the prefetch chance mode is displayed at the lower right of the main display screen 32. When the gaming state is the prefetch chance mode, the chance mode display section 75 of the general memory display unit 70 is lit (result of S15101 is “Y” → S15102).

  Here, in the game area 22, the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 25, and the usual figure start memory is generated. The result of the normal map start storage that has occurred is “out of”, and the hold display mode determined in the above-mentioned general map pre-reading effect setting process (FIG. 149) is “white”. For this reason, the hold display section 71 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 is lit and displayed in white with low luminance (the result of S15104 → S15105 is “Y” → the result of S15106 → S15107 is “N” → S15110). During this time, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is also turned off (the result of S15111 is “N” → S15113 is “N” → S15114). In addition, since the special figure 2 start memory does not occur, the special LED 28h is in the off state (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S15117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “N” → S15120).

  FIG. 155 (B) shows that the first special figure change display game is started in the prefetch chance mode, and the normal figure change corresponding to the normal figure start memory displayed on the hold display section 71 of the general figure storage display unit 70 is shown. The state where the display game is started is shown. The special figure variation display game started here ends in FIG. 157 (B) described later, and the common figure variation display game started here also ends in FIG. 156 (C) described later. Although illustration is omitted, the chance mode display unit 75 continues to be lit until the prefetch chance mode ends, that is, until the special figure variation display game is executed 40 times (S15101 → S15102).

  Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started. For this reason, on the main display screen 32, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold display part 81 is reduced by one, and the digest hold display part 80 displays the same hold display as the special figure 1 hold display part 81. Then, 1 is subtracted from the number of special figure fluctuations (remaining number of times) during the prefetch chance mode, and the identification information is variably displayed at the center of the screen. In the fourth symbol display section 83, the display for the special figure 1 variable display game starts changing from “◯” indicating the previous result and is switched in the order of “● → ○ → ◎”.

  In addition, the normal map display game is started. As a result, the display of the general map display section 84 of the main display screen 32 starts to change from “×” indicating the previous result and is switched in the order of “◯ → ◎ → ×”. Then, the hold display section 71 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 is turned off (the result of S15104 → S15105 is “N” → S15109 → S15110), and the front decoration of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is blinked ( The result of S15111 is “Y” → S15112). At this time, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 blinks in white. Note that there is no occurrence of special figure 2 starting memory or open of the public power, so the special electric LED 28h is in the off state (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S15117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “N” → S15120 ).

  FIG. 155 (C) shows a state in which the normal start memory is generated before the special figure 1 variable display game and the normal figure variable display game started in FIG. 155 (B) are finished.

  Here, in the game area 22, the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 25, and the usual figure start memory is generated. The result of the normal map start storage that has occurred is “out of”, and the hold display mode determined in the above-mentioned general map pre-reading effect setting process (FIG. 149) is “white”. For this reason, the hold display section 71 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 is lit and displayed in white with low luminance (the result of S15104 → S15105 is “Y” → the result of S15106 → S15107 is “N” → S15110). During this time, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 continues to blink in white (the result of S15111 is “Y” → S15112). Note that there is no occurrence of special figure 2 starting memory or open of the public power, so the special electric LED 28h is in the off state (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S15117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “N” → S15120 ).

  FIG. 156 (A) shows the same state as FIG. 155 (C) described above.

  FIG. 156 (B) shows a state in which the normal start memory is generated while the special figure 1 variable display game and the normal figure variable display game are continuously executed (varied).

  Here, in the game area 22, the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 25, and the usual figure start memory is generated. The result of the normal map start storage that has occurred is “winning”, and the hold display mode determined in the above-mentioned general map prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 149) is “red”. For this reason, the hold display section 72 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 is lit and displayed in red with high brightness, and vibrates by repeated up and down movement (the result of S15104 → S15105 is “Y” → the result of S15106 → S15107 is “ Y "→ S15108). The special power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 continues to blink white (result of S15111 is “Y” → S15112). Also, since there is no occurrence of special figure 2 start memory or open of the public power, special electric LED 28h is in the off state (result of S15116 is “N” → result of S15117 is “N” → result of S15119 is “N” → S15120 ).

  FIG. 156 (C) shows a state when the changing normal game display game is stopped. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game is still changing.

  At this time, the general-purpose display portion 84 of the main display screen 32 switches to “x” indicating that the change is stopped and the deviation is displayed. As a result, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is turned off (result of S15111 is “N” → result of S15113 is “N” → S15114). There is no change in other productions.

  FIG. 156 (D) shows a state when the next usual map change display game is started. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game is still changing.

  Next, the universal map display game corresponding to the hold display displayed on the hold display unit 71 in FIG. 156 (C) described above is executed. For this reason, the general-purpose display unit 84 of the main display screen 32 starts to change from “x” which is the previous result. As a result, the hold display displayed on the hold display unit 72 in FIG. 156 (C) described above moves to the hold display unit 71. At this time, the hold display mode in the hold display unit 72 is also displayed on the hold display unit 71. Continue to the embodiment. Therefore, the on-hold display unit 71 is lit and displayed in red with high brightness and vibrates due to repeated up and down movement. The result of S15104 → S15105 is “Y” → S15106 → S15107 is “Y” → S15108). Further, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 blinks in white again (the result of S15111 is “Y” → S15112). Note that there is no occurrence of special figure 2 starting memory or open of the public power, so the special electric LED 28h is in the off state (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S15117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “N” → S15120 ).

  FIG. 156 (E) shows a state when the usual figure change display game started to change in FIG. 156 (D) is stopped. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game is still changing.

  At this time, the general-purpose display portion 84 of the main display screen 32 switches to “x” indicating that the change is stopped and the deviation is displayed. As a result, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is turned off (result of S15111 is “N” → result of S15113 is “N” → S15114). There is no change in other productions.

  FIG. 156 (F) shows a state when the next usual map change display game is started. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game is still changing.

  Next, the universal map display game corresponding to the hold display displayed on the hold display unit 71 in FIG. 156 (E) is executed. For this reason, the general-purpose display unit 84 of the main display screen 32 starts to change from “x” which is the previous result. Then, the hold display sections 71 to 74 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 are turned off and in a stationary state (the result of S15104 → S15105 is “N” → S15109 → S15110). Thereafter, there is no occurrence of the normal start memory until the later-described FIG. 157 (E), and the hold display portions 71 to 74 are kept in the light-off state and the stationary state.

  Further, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 blinks in red (the result of S15111 is “Y” → S15112). The special figure 2 start winning opening 24 reflects the display color of the pending display mode of the normal figure start memory being digested in the color of the ordinary power LED, but does not reflect the vibration effect in consideration of the influence on the winning state. Further, when the display color is “rainbow” in which the long open hit is fixed, a countdown effect until the open may be performed on the main display screen 32. Note that there is no occurrence of special figure 2 starting memory or open of the public power, so the special electric LED 28h is in the off state (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S15117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “N” → S15120 ).

  FIG. 157 (A) shows a state in which the special figure start winning port 24 is converted to an open state based on the result of the usual figure change display game which starts changing in FIG. 156 (F) described above. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game is still changing.

  At this time, the general-purpose display portion 84 of the main display screen 32 switches to “◎” representing the long hit by stopping the fluctuation. Then, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 changes to an open state in which the movable member 24a is rotated outward and the game ball easily flows. The special power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 lights in red (the result of S15111 is “N” → S15113 is “Y” → S15115). In addition, the special electric LED 28h of the up-floor winning device 28 is turned on by the opening of the ordinary electric power (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S15117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “Y” → S15121).

  Then, the game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 and the special figure 2 start memory is generated. At this time, the special figure 2 start storage hold display is displayed on the special figure 2 hold display section 82. The special figure 2 hold display section 82 is disposed below the center case 60, but may be displayed on the left end of the main display screen 32. In this case, the special figure 2 hold display has a distinguishable shape (for example, a round shape) with respect to the square shape of the special figure 1 hold display. In the present embodiment, the special display 2 hold display section 82 is also provided on the main display screen 32. Since the special figure 2 hold display part 82 of the main display screen 32 is displayed in the vicinity of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 (Penden), it is easy for the player to grasp the Punden prize.

  FIG. 157 (B) shows a state in which the opening of the power transmission by the normal map is completed and the first special figure variation display game is started in the above-described FIG. 155 (B) and enters the prefetch chance mode. .

  At this time, on the main display screen 32, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop result mode (disconnected) (not shown), and in the fourth symbol display section 83, the display for the special figure 1 variable display game stops changing. It changes to “●” representing the loss. It should be noted that after the end of the normal map, the normal map change display game is not executed because there is no normal map start memory, and the display of the general map display unit 84 maintains the previous result “◎”. As a result, the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is turned off (the result of S15111 is “N” → the result of S15113 is “N” → S15114). Thereafter, there is no occurrence of the normal start memory until the later-described FIG. 157 (E), and the general power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 continues to be extinguished.

  Then, one special figure 2 hold display is displayed on the special figure 2 hold display section 82 of the main display screen 32. As a result, the special power LED 28h of the upward fluctuation winning device 28 is turned on (the result of S15116 is “Y” → S15121).

  FIG. 157 (C) shows a state where the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started and is changing. Here, since the special figure 2 start memory is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 start memory, the variable display game of the special figure 2 start memory won by the opening of the ordinary power in FIG. 157 (A) described above is executed. The

  At this time, the identification information fluctuates on the main display screen 32 (not shown), and in the fourth symbol display section 83, the display for the special figure 1 fluctuating display game remains “●” as the previous result. The display for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate. And the hold display of the special figure 2 hold display part 82 moves to the digestion hold display part 80 (illustration omitted). Further, by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special electric LED 28h of the up fluctuation winning device 28 is switched from lighting to blinking (result of S15116 is "N" → result of S16117 is "Y" → S15118).

  FIG. 157 (D) shows a special figure 2 small hit state (second special result form) generated as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed in FIG. 157 (C) described above. 2nd special game state).

  At this time, on the main display screen 32, the identification information stops in the second special result mode (not shown), and the special figure 2 small hit effect is performed. In the 4th symbol display section 83, the display for the special figure 1 variable display game is “●” as the previous result, and the display for the special figure 2 variable display game stops the fluctuation and represents the small hit. Switch to “○”.

  In the special figure 2 small hit state, the special figure 2 small hit state is determined according to the release pattern determined from the special figure 2 small hit pattern determination table (FIG. 140 (B)) in the above-described small hit process (FIG. 139). In the process (FIGS. 142 to 144), the movable member 28a is rotated to open the upper prize winning opening 28b. Here, since it is a small hit during the pre-reading chance mode, that is, during non-maintenance support, it is opened once for 1.5 seconds. Then, during the special winning opening opening period, the special electric LED 28h of the up-shift winning device 28 switches from blinking to lighting (the result of S15116 is “N” → the result of S16117 is “N” → the result of S15119 is “Y” → S15121).

  Then, when the game ball wins the top prize winning port 28b of the up-shift winning device 28, the state transition game in the winning unit 600 is performed. Details of the state transition game in the winning unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 157 (E) shows the state during the state transition game that is performed when the upper large winning opening 28b is released in the special figure 2 small hit state and the game ball is won in the upper large winning opening 28b. The state transition game is an effect game that can be executed in the special figure 2 small hit state.

  Here, since the blade opening period (big prize opening opening period) in the special figure 2 small hit state has ended, the special electric LED 28h of the up variation winning device 28 is turned off (result of S15116 is "N" → result of S16117) Is “N” → S15119 is “N” → S15120). On the main display screen 32, the special figure 2 small hit effect is continuously performed, and the display of the other 4th symbol display part 83 and the general figure display part 84 is not changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the four hold display sections 71 to 74 that hold the general chart start memory on hold from the upper left to the left of the main display screen 32, and the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 are displayed. The upper variation winning device 28 is connected in a row and is arranged in a fan shape in a row. The hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74 function as a plurality (four in this case) of producing units that perform a general-purpose prefetching notice effect in the prefetch chance mode. In addition, the special figure 2 start winning opening 74 and the up variation winning device 28 also have a light emission function, and perform a linkage effect with the light emission effects of the hold display portion 71 to the hold display portion 74. The hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, and the up variation winning device 28 have front light emitting units of the same type and different sizes. The size of the front light-emitting portion is smaller as the effect portion is the largest in size and the distance from the up-changing prize winning device 28 is longer. Here, in the clockwise direction from the left end, the up-variable winning device 28, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, the hold display portion 71, the hold display portion 72, the hold display portion 73, and the hold display portion 74 are arranged in this order. Each front light emitting section is provided so that the ball size becomes smaller in this order.

  Then, when the game state is the prefetch chance mode, the prefetch notice effect in the normal start memory is executed. In the pre-reading notice effect, the effect mode of each effect unit changes according to the digestion of the normal diagram start memory. For example, in the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit 4 (effect unit), the progress of the game progresses. It will move to the holding | maintenance display part 3, the holding | maintenance display part 2, and the holding | maintenance display part 1, and will approach the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 which performs a public power release. In this way, the player can visually recognize that the hold display with a high degree of expectation gradually approaches the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 as the game progresses, thereby effectively conscious of the possibility of the release of the general electric power ( Expectation) and can enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect for the normal figure start memory has been described, but the special figure start memory may be used. In this case, instead of the hold display units 71 to 74 of the general figure storage display unit 70, the special figure 1 hold display unit 81 or the special figure 2 hold display unit that performs the hold display of the special figure start memory up to the upper limit number (four). What is necessary is just to make 82 the production | generation part of a prefetch notice effect. Then, according to the digestion of the special figure start memory, an effect may be performed in which the hold display approaches the big winning opening to be released.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ordinary start gate 25, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 and the upper large winning opening 28b are provided in the game area 22 on the left side of the center case, but are provided in the game area 22 on the right side of the center case. May be. At this time, the universal memory display unit 70 is disposed on the right side of the main display screen 32 so that the holding display section 71 side is adjacent to the special figure 2 start winning opening 24. Then, the notice start effect (prefetch effect) of the normal diagram start memory may be performed during the ordinary power support. In this case, since the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 25 while making a normal left strike (how to hit the special figure 1 start winning opening 23), the control burden can be reduced. it can.

(Modifications 1 to 3)
Here, with reference to FIG. 158 to FIG. 160, modified examples 1 to 3 of the above-described general notice announcement effect (FIG. 154 to FIG. 157) will be described. Here, the effect in the production | presentation part which the holding | maintenance display parts 71-74 of the common figure memory | storage display unit 70, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, and the upward fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 28 were connected is demonstrated.

[Modification 1]
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing time-series examples of effects in the prefetch chance mode according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the look-ahead chance mode, the holding display units 71 to 74 of the general-purpose memory display unit 70 of the modified example 1 enable the player to grasp the holding memory number by lighting in white as in the present embodiment, When the game state is the look-ahead chance mode, only the general chart start memory (hold display) that is the specific game result (long release per normal figure) is lit up and other game results (disconnected, short open per general figure) The lighting display is not performed for the hold display that becomes). Similarly, for the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, when the start memory during digestion does not result in a specific game result, the ordinary power LED 24h is not blinked or lit.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (A), in the hold display section 73 of the general figure storage display unit 70, a specific general figure start memory in which the game result is long open per normal figure is displayed on hold. As for the hold display mode of this specific map start memory, the display color is “red (high brightness)” and the vibration effect information is set in the above-mentioned map prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 149). For this reason, the hold display unit 73 is lit in red with high brightness and swings up and down. Here, the usual figure start memory corresponding to the hold display part 71 and the hold display part 72 is also generated. However, since these usual figure start memories do not become a specific game result, the hold display part 71 and the hold display part 72. Is off.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (B), the specific map start memory corresponding to the hold display section 73 in FIG. 158 (A) described above is digested in order from the map start memory corresponding to the hold display section 71. The display position changes in the order of the hold display section 72 and the hold display section 71 as indicated by arrows in the figure. Then, along with the display position, the hold display mode changes in the order of the hold display part 72 and the hold display part 71.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (C), when the specific general chart start memory is digested, the special power LED 24h of the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 is in the hold display mode set in the specific general chart start memory. Flashes according to the display color (“red”).

  As described above, in the first modification, only the general chart start memory for deriving a game result advantageous to the player (long release per universal figure) is the target of the light emission effect, and therefore a hold display that is an advantageous game result is displayed. The player can easily grasp it.

[Modification 2]
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing time-series examples of effects in the prefetch chance mode according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the second modified example, when the specific display start memory (pending display) is included in the holding display units 71 to 74 of the common figure storage display unit 70 based on the first modification, not only the target holding display unit. The general memory display unit 70 is vibrated (oscillated).

  FIGS. 159 (A) to (C) correspond to FIGS. 158 (A) to (C) described above. As shown in FIG. 159 (A), the hold display section 73 corresponding to a specific common chart start memory lights up in red with high brightness. Then, the general memory display unit 70 as a whole swings. Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (B), only the display color of the corresponding hold display mode changes with the change of the display position of the specific normal diagram start memory (hold display). And while the specific start-up memory is included in any of the on-hold display unit 71 to the on-hold display unit 74, the general map display unit 70 continues to swing. FIG. 159 (C) is the same as FIG. 158 (C) described above. As described above, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 does not reflect the vibration information of the hold display mode set in the normal figure start memory being digested in consideration of the influence on the winning.

  In addition, although the modification 2 is based on the production | generation aspect of the modification 1, you may enable it to grasp | ascertain the number of holding | maintenance memory | storage also including the usual start memory | storage which does not become a specific game result like this embodiment. For example, the hold display unit corresponding to the general chart start memory that does not result in a specific game result may be represented by white lighting regardless of the set hold display mode. Further, when only a part of the hold display part is turned on (other hold display parts are turned off) as in the first modification and the second modification, the display color of the turn-on hold display part may be a specific single color. Good.

  As described above, in the second modification, when vibration information is included in the hold display mode of the specific general map start memory, not only the display corresponding to the hold display unit but the entire general map display unit 70 is swung. Therefore, the movable range is large, and the player can be further grasped.

[Modification 3]
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing, in time series, examples of effects in the prefetch chance mode according to the third modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the third modified example, based on the first modified example, a digestion hold display unit 76 corresponding to the normal diagram start memory (holding display) being digested is newly provided in the common figure storage display unit 70.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (A), the digestion hold display section 76 is disposed between the hold display section 71 and the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, and the front surface portion thereof (the portion that emits light by the LED) is reserved. The display portion 71 <digestion hold display portion 76 <special figure 2 is provided so as to increase in order of the winning prize opening 24.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 160 (B), the specific general chart start memory (hold display) displayed on the hold display section 74 is stored in the hold display section 74 while waiting for the progress of the map change display game. The display of the hold display changes from the display unit 71 to the hold display unit 71 and further to the digestion hold display unit 76 during digestion (during fluctuation). Then, in the normal figure, the special figure 2 start winning opening 24 adjacent to the digestion hold display section 76 and the upper prize winning opening 28b adjacent to the special figure 2 starting winning opening 24 are lit. Then, when a game ball wins in the special figure 2 start winning opening 24, the upper university winning opening 28b is turned on (waiting for the special figure 2), blinking (while changing the special figure 2), and turned on (during the opening of the special prize opening). To do.

  In this way, in the third modified example, the digestion suspension display unit 76 is provided separately, so that, as in the first modified example, the flashing display of the special figure 2 start winning port 24 indicates that it is changing, and the special figure 2 start winning port 24 is displayed. It is easier to grasp the progress status related to the normal diagram start memory (holding display) to be lit than to represent the normal power release period per normal map by the lighting display.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166, a state transition game that can be shifted from the small hit state to the big hit state will be described. In this embodiment, the state transition game is performed in the special figure 2 small hit state in which the upper prize winning opening 28b is opened. In the state transition game, the acquisition (occurrence) of the big hit state is determined when the game ball that has won the top prize winning opening 28b further wins a specific area (V zone) 641 of the winning unit 600.

[Small hit effect control processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first half of the small hit effect control process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 162 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the latter half of the small hit effect control process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The small hit effect control process is executed by the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 152 of the effect control device 150.

  The small hit effect control process is a process of performing a screen effect of the main display screen 32 in the small hit state.

  The effect control device 150 first determines whether or not a small hit fanfare command (small hit FF command) has been received (S16101). If the small hit FF command is not received (the result of S16101 is “N”), the effect control device 150 ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the small hit FF command is received (the result of S16101 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 sets the character determination table corresponding to the round number information (stop symbol information) in the small hit FF command. (S16102). The number-of-rounds information is determined when a game ball wins the special figure 2 start winning opening 24. The number of rounds when a big hit occurs is determined when the special figure 2 start memory that triggered the occurrence of the small hit state is generated even when the small hit state is shifted from the big hit state through the state transition game. ing. Details of the character determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 150 sets the current small hit effect character based on the character determination table set in the above-described processing of S16102 (S16103), and the stay ratio by area according to the determined small hit effect character Is set (S16104). The area stay ratio is a ratio of displaying a small hit effect character at positions (left, middle, and right, respectively) corresponding to the normal area 642, the specific area 641, and the normal area 643 on the main display screen 32.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 150 executes a fanfare effect using the small hit effect character set in the process of S16103 described above (S16105). Then, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the fanfare time has elapsed (S16106). When the fanfare time has not elapsed (the result of S16106 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the fanfare effect until the fanfare time elapses (S16105).

  If the fanfare time has elapsed (the result of S16106 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes a small hit effect using the small hit effect character (S16107). In addition, the effect control device 150 moves the small hit effect character according to the stay rate by region set in the process of S16104 described above (S16108).

  Next, the production control device 150 determines whether or not a game ball has been won in the upper prize winning opening 28b (S16109). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the signal of the upper count switch 28d (count sensor 216) has been received.

  When a game ball is won at the upper prize opening 28b (the result of S16109 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 first determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received (S16110). ). The specific area passing command is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 150 when the game ball passes the specific area 641 of the winning unit 600 (when a detection signal from the specific area switch 641a is received).

  When the specific area passing command is received (the result of S16110 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 sets a determination value for the specific area (S16111). The determination value for the specific area is a counter value indicating the position of the area (middle) corresponding to the specific area 641 among the three areas (left, middle, and right). And the production | presentation control apparatus 150 performs a character defeat determination process (S16112). In this character defeat determination process, the position counter value at which the small hit effect character stays at the passing timing of the game ball to the specific area 641 and the counter value indicating the position of the specific area set in the above-described processing of S16111. This is a process of determining whether or not they match, that is, whether or not the small hit effect character is staying at a position (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641 when the game ball passes through the specific area 641.

  Then, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the character defeat is successful as a result of the character defeat determination process (S16112) described above (S16113). Character defeat is possible when a small hit effect character stays at a position (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641 when the game ball passes through the specific area 641.

  When the character defeat is successful (the result of S16113 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the character defeat successful effect (S16114) and sets the execution of the round promotion effect (S16115). In the round promotion effect, an effect that makes it seem as if the number of rounds has been added due to the successful defeat of the character is performed. Actually, the number of rounds initially determined (at the time of starting winning a prize) may be changed to a high round by rounding up within the range of the round upper limit (15R in this case).

  If the character defeat is not successful, that is, if it is unsuccessful (the result of S16113 is “N”), the effect control device 150 executes the character defeat failure effect (S16116) and sets the execution of the round notification effect. (S16117).

  If the specific area passing command has not been received (the result of S16110 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the normal area passing command has been received (S16118). The normal region passing command is an effect control device from the game control device 100 when the game ball passes the normal region 642 or the normal region 643 of the winning unit 600 (when a detection signal from the normal region switch 642a or the normal region switch 643a is received). 150.

  When the normal area passing command has not been received (the result of S16118 is “N”), the effect control device 150 proceeds to the process of S16127 described later.

  When the normal region passing command is received (the result of S16118 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 sets a determination value for the normal region (S16119). The determination value for the normal area is a counter value indicating the position of the area (left, right) corresponding to the normal area 642 and the normal area 643 among the three areas (left, middle, right). And the production | presentation control apparatus 150 performs a character defeat determination process (S16120). The character defeat determination process here indicates the position counter value at which the small hit effect character stays at the passing timing of the game ball to the normal area 642 or the normal area 643, and the position of the normal area set in the process of S16119 described above. Whether or not the counter value matches, that is, when the game ball passes through the normal area 642 or the normal area 643, the small hit effect character stays at a position (left, right) corresponding to the normal area 642 or the normal area 643 This is a process for determining whether or not it has been performed.

  Then, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the character defeat is successful as a result of the character defeat determination process (S16120) described above (S16121). Character defeat is possible when a small hit effect character stays at a position (left, right) corresponding to the normal area 642 or the normal area 643 when the game ball passes through the normal area 642 or the normal area 643, respectively. Become.

  When the character defeat succeeds (the result of S16121 is “Y”), the production control device 150 executes the character defeat success production (S16122), and sets the execution of the special figure 2 prefetch production as a privilege (S16123). . Although the special figure 2 pre-reading effect is performed in the special figure 2 hold display unit 82, it may be performed only in the specific gaming state.

  If the character defeat is not successful, that is, if it is unsuccessful (the result of S16121 is “N”), the production control device 150 executes the character defeat failure production (S16125) and executes the special figure 2 prefetching production. Release (end) (S16126). Note that, with regard to the pre-reading effect started in a state where the execution of the pre-reading effect is set, the pre-reading effect is executed to the end even when the execution of the pre-reading effect is canceled halfway.

  Instead of executing the special figure 2 pre-reading effect set in the process of S16123, execution of the pre-reading chance mode may be set, or both may be set. If execution of the prefetch chance mode is set in the process of S16123, the prefetch chance mode is reset in the process of S16126. Further, instead of executing the special figure 2 prefetching effect, the reliability (credibility) of the prefetching effect in the prefetch chance mode may be improved.

  On the other hand, if there is no game ball winning in the upper prize winning opening 28b (the result of S16109 is “N”), the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the valid period has passed (S16124). The term of validity is the special winning opening opening time set in the process of S14107 of the above-described special figure 1 small hit process (FIG. 141) or the above-mentioned special figure 2 small hit medium process (FIGS. 142 to 144). The special winning opening valid time set in the process of S14207 is shown.

  If the valid period has not elapsed (the result of S16124 is “N”), the effect control device 150 returns to the process of S16108 described above.

  When the valid period has elapsed (the result of S16124 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 executes the process of S16125 described above.

  Thereafter, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the small hit state ends (S16127). When it is the end timing (the result of S16127 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 cancels the execution of the small hit effect that was started in the process of S16107 described above (S16128), and ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not the end timing of the small hit state (the result of S16127 is “N”), the effect control device 150 returns to the process of S16108 described above.

[Character determination table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the character determination table set in the process of S16102 in the above-described small hit effect control process (FIGS. 161 and 162) will be described. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character determination table according to the fourth embodiment of this invention.

  In the big hit state in this embodiment, three (5R, 10R, 15R) round numbers are set. A character determination table is provided for each round. In the character determination table, selection ratios of small hit effect characters A to C and area-specific stay ratios are defined.

  FIG. 163 (A) is a character determination table set in the case of 5R big hit. Here, the character A is selected at a rate of 70%, the character B is selected at a rate of 30%, and the character C is not selected. Then, regardless of which character is selected, the proportion of the character staying in the region (medium) corresponding to the specific region 641 is small, and the region corresponding to the normal region 642 or the normal region 643 (left, right) for most of the time. To stay in. Therefore, in the case of 5R big hit, it is unlikely that the character will be successfully defeated in the above-described small hit effect control process (FIGS. 161 and 162).

  FIG. 163 (B) is a character determination table that is set in the case of 10R big hit. Here, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, and the character C is selected at a rate of 15%. Character B stays evenly in three areas (left, middle and right). On the other hand, the character A has a high ratio of staying in the area (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641, and the ratio of staying in the normal area 642 or the area (left, right) corresponding to the normal area 643 is small. Character C is the opposite of character A and has a low ratio of staying in the area (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641 and a ratio of staying in the area (left, right) corresponding to the normal area 642 or the normal area 643. Many. Therefore, in the case of 10R big hit, there is a high possibility that the character is successfully defeated when the character A is selected.

  FIG. 163 (C) is a character determination table set in the case of 15R big hit. Here, the character B is selected at a rate of 30%, the character C is selected at a rate of 70%, and the character A is not selected. The character C stays evenly in three areas (left, middle, and right). On the other hand, the ratio of the character B staying in the area (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641 is large, and the ratio of staying in the area (left, right) corresponding to the normal area 642 or the normal area 643 is small. Therefore, in the case of 15R big hit, there is a high possibility that the character will be successfully defeated when the character B is selected.

  FIG. 163 (D) is a diagram illustrating characters A to C. FIG. Characters A to C are set so that the degree of expectation of high rounds increases in the order of character A <character B <character C. For this reason, the ratio at which the character C is selected at the 5R big hit and the ratio at which the character A is selected at the 15R big hit are both set to 0%.

  Thus, the character A with low high round expectation is likely to be selected with 5R jackpot, the character B with high expectation of high round is 10R big hit, and the character C with high high round expectation is easily selected with 15R big hit. The selected character has a different ratio of staying in the area (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641 according to the number of rounds, and the staying ratio is set to increase as the number of rounds increases. For example, the character B is small when the 5R jackpot is small, average (medium) when the 10R jackpot, and many when the 15R jackpot. For this reason, the higher the round, the easier it is to destroy the character. In other words, if a character is successfully defeated in the small hit effect, it tends to be a high round (the execution rate of the round promotion effect is high), and the character C is more likely to be a higher round than the character A. .

[Example of production during small hits]
Next, with reference to FIG. 164 to FIG. 166, the effect in the special figure 2 small hit state will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing time-series examples of effects in the special figure 2 small hit state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (A), the current game state is the ordinary power support state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed. At this time, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the small hit result mode (second special result mode), and the special figure 2 small hit state (second special game state) is started.

  At this time, the game control device 150 transmits the small hitting fanfare command 4 to the effect control device 150 in the process of S14204 of the above-described special figure 2 small hitting process (FIG. 142). Below, it demonstrates focusing on the production | presentation of the main display screen 32 by the production | presentation control apparatus 150. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (B), first, a fanfare effect is performed. In the fanfare effect, the main display screen 32 is notified of the fact that the small hit effect character C is the current defeat character on the main display screen 32 according to the sound effect. The message “This is it” appears. The fanfare effect is executed in the process of S16105 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161).

  Then, after the fanfare effect, the small hit effect using the small hit effect character C is executed. The small hit effect is executed in the process of S16107 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161). At this time, the game control device 100 rotates the movable member 28a of the up variation winning device 28 counterclockwise around the rotation shaft portion 28e, and the upper large winning opening 28b is opened, so that the game ball can be won. Become. Then, on the main display screen 32, if a game ball that passes through the upper large winning opening 28b and rolls from the gaming area 22 to the winning unit 600 wins the specific area 641 (V winning), a big hit state occurs. The message “V win with big win!” Is displayed. In addition, when the small hit effect character C is displayed in the area (medium) corresponding to the specific area 641, a message of “Now defeat enemies!” Prompting the player to win V and aim to destroy the character is also displayed. .

  In addition, “V” indicating the position of the specific area 641 is displayed at the bottom of the main display screen 32 and a small hit effect character C is displayed. Move to. The movement of the small hit character C is executed in the process of S16108 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161).

  The specific area 641 is normally invisible to the player or difficult to grasp that it is a specific area. Here, since the position of the specific area 641 is notified on the main display screen 32 in accordance with the opening of the upper prize winning opening 28b, the sense of unity between the main display screen 32 and the specific area 641 can be improved. When the small hit effect is started, information related to the special figure change display game and the normal figure change display game (hold display, number of time reductions, etc.) is not displayed on the main display screen 32.

  Thereafter, an effect corresponding to the area where the game ball rolling the winning unit 600 wins and the winning timing is executed.

[V prize winning success example]
FIG. 165 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of an effect when a V winning is achieved in the small hit effect of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (C) show a case where V is won and the character defeat is successful, and FIGS. 165 (D) to 165 (F) show cases where the V win is won but the character defeat is unsuccessful.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (A), when the small hit effect character C is displayed overlapping the display “V” indicating the position of the specific area 641 on the main display screen 32, the game ball wins the specific area 641. Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), on the main display screen 32, the character defeat success effect is executed. In the character defeat success production, the main display screen 32 displays a message “Congratulations on winning V!” And a message “Get a round promotion ticket!” Informing you that you have won the round promotion by defeating the character. The effect that the small hit effect character C is destroyed and disappears is performed. The character defeat success effect is executed in the process of S16114 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), a round promotion effect is executed on the main display screen 32. In the round promotion effect, in spite of the fact that a 10-round jackpot game has been determined, an effect is provided in which a notification is given as if the 10-round jackpot game was acquired after being promoted from the 5th round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that the big hit round has been promoted by defeating the character, and the interest of the game can be improved. The round promotion effect is executed in the process of S16115 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161). The round promotion effect may be executed at a branch point such as 5 rounds or 10 rounds instead of being executed at the start of the big hit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), when the small hit effect character C is displayed in the area corresponding to the normal area 642 (next to the left of “V”) on the main display screen 32, the game ball is in the specific area. When winning 641, a character destruction failure effect is executed on the main display screen 32 as shown in FIG. 165 (E). In the character defeat failure production, a message “Congratulations on V winning!” Celebrating the V prize is displayed on the main display screen 32, and the small hit effect character C continues to be displayed due to the failure of the character defeat. The character defeat failure effect is executed in the process of S16116 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (F), a round notification effect is executed on the main display screen 32. In the round notification effect, an effect is provided in which notification is made as if a 10-round jackpot game has been won by the V prize. The round notification effect is executed in the process of S16117 of the above-described small hit effect control process (FIG. 161).

[V prize winning failure example]
FIG. 166 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of an effect when the V winning is not achieved in the small hit effect of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 166 (A) and 166 (B) show a case where the V winning is not made, but the character defeat succeeds, and FIGS. 166 (C) and 166 (D) show a case where the V winning is not made and the character defeat is unsuccessful.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (A), when the small hit effect character C is displayed in the area corresponding to the normal area 642 (next to the left of “V”) on the main display screen 32, the game ball is displayed in the normal area 642. When winning, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), on the main display screen 32, the character defeat success effect is executed. In the character defeat success production, a message “Unfortunate!” Is displayed on the main display screen 32 to notify the failure of the V prize, and a message “Get a pre-reading effect ticket!” Is displayed to inform the privilege acquired by the successful character defeat. The In addition, an effect that the small hit effect character C is destroyed and disappears is performed. The character defeat success effect is executed in the process of S16122 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), when the small hit effect character C is displayed in the area corresponding to the normal area 643 (right adjacent to “V”) on the main display screen 32, the game ball is in the normal area. When winning 643, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), the character display failure effect is executed on the main display screen 32. In the character defeat failure production, a message “Sorry!” Notifying the failure of the V prize is displayed on the main display screen 32, and the small hit performance character C is continuously displayed due to the failure of the character defeat. The character defeat failure effect is executed in the process of S16125 of the aforementioned small hit effect control process (FIG. 161). In addition, if there is a privilege that has been granted due to the successful defeat of the character, the privilege disappears.

  In the present embodiment, the central winning area among the three winning areas is set as the specific area 641. However, the specific area 641 every time the upper large winning opening 28b is opened or each game ball is added to one of the winning areas. The arrangement may be switched. In this case, the display position of “V” indicating the position of the specific area 641 displayed on the main display screen 32 is also moved in accordance with the switching of the arrangement of the specific area 641.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit effect character is displayed on the main display screen 32, but may appear as a character movable accessory (board effect device 172). In this case, the character moving means for controlling the movement (movement) of the small hit character is performed by the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 152 of the effect control device 150 in this embodiment, but for the main control of the effect control device 150. The microcomputer (1st CPU) 151 performs this through the board effect motor / SOL control circuit 163.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the top big winning opening 28b opened by the occurrence of the special figure 2 small win state further wins (generates) a big win state by winning in the specific area 641 of the winning unit 600. ) There is a chance. In addition, when a game ball is won in any winning area of the winning unit 600 and a small hit effect character stays at a position corresponding to the winning area (when the character is successfully defeated), Benefits (round promotion effect, special figure 2 look-ahead effect) are given. This privilege is not limited to winning in the specific area 641, but also in winning in the normal areas 642 and 643. Further, there are a plurality of types of small hit effect characters, and the expected degree of the number of rounds to be obtained and the ease of success of character destruction vary depending on the appeared small hit effect characters.

  Thereby, in the state transition game, not only where the game ball rolling the winning unit 600 wins the specific area 641, but also the type and movement of the small hit effect character, and the timing when the game ball wins the normal areas 642 and 643. And so on, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

(Effect of the fourth embodiment)
According to the fourth embodiment, the general-purpose memory display unit 70 stores the right to execute the general-purpose variable display game as a general-purpose start memory based on the winning of a game ball in the start area (the general-purpose start gate 25). It has a possible specified number (4) of rendering units (holding display unit 71 to holding display unit 74). Then, the game control device 100 uses the fluctuation display means (S14509) to execute the usual figure fluctuation display game by digesting the usual figure start memory stored in the usual figure start storage means (S14501, FIG. 146) in the order stored. Pre-judgment means (S14609, FIG. 147) for pre-determining whether or not the universal variation display game corresponding to the universal map start memory has a specific result (per universal map) before the game is executed. Further, the production control device 150 uses a specific universal figure start memory (the display mode set based on the determination table in FIG. 150 is blue or more) in which the general figure start memory executes the notice effect from the prefetch command received from the game control device 100. ) Is determined in advance in accordance with a change in the digest order of the general-purpose chart start-up memory (Figure 149). There is a notice effect means (S15105 to S15110) for giving a notice effect while changing the effect part for performing the action. Here, the four effect units (the hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74) are arranged such that the effect units with the earlier digestion order are closer to the variable winning unit (Special Figure 2 start winning port 24). (FIGS. 155 to 157). And the brightness | luminance of light emission is set so that the production | presentation part with an early digestion order is high (FIG. 135), and the vibration width of a vibration becomes large (FIG. 137). As a result, each time the usual figure variation display game is executed, the effect part corresponding to the specific usual figure start memory is changed to an effect part close to the variable prize winning part. That is, as the game progresses, the notice effect in a predetermined mode approaches the variable winning part, and the possibility that the variable winning part is converted to the open state can be effectively provided to the player. It can enhance interest. Moreover, since it becomes easy to grasp the timing when the variable winning portion is converted to the open state, it becomes easier for the player to aim for winning of the game ball to the variable winning portion.

  In addition, the four effect units (the hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74) are provided so as to be operable in a predetermined operation mode (vertical reciprocation). The effect control device 150 executes the notice effect by operating the effect part in a predetermined operation mode (reciprocating motion in the vertical direction) by the notice effect means (particularly, S15108). Accordingly, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a high appealing power to the player using a human characteristic that is easy to react to a moving object. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, light sources (LEDs 71b to 74b) that can emit light individually are provided in the four effect units (the hold display unit 71 to the hold display unit 74). The production control device 150 emits light sequentially from the production unit (holding display unit 71) that is close to the variable prize winning unit (special figure 2 start winning port 24), so that the memory number notifying means for informing the normal figure starting memory number. (S15106), when performing the notice effect in a predetermined light emission mode, the notice part is caused to emit light with a light emission color different from the light emission color for informing the number of stored notifications (S14904 → S15106). As a result, it is possible to execute a gorgeous notice effect that is not confused with the notification of the number of start memories, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, a specific light emitting unit (general power LED 24h) capable of emitting light is provided in the variable winning unit (special drawing 2 start winning port 24). The variable winning portion light emitting means (S15112, S15115) capable of causing the variable winning portion to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (flashing, lighting). Thereby, since the variable winning part next to the effect part (holding display part 71) also emits light so as to be continuous with the light emission of the effect part in the notice effect, the variable winning part may be converted to an open state. It is possible to produce the effect effectively and to make it easy to grasp the conversion timing.

  In addition, the light sources (LED 71b to LED 74b) provided in each of the four effect units (hold display unit 71 to hold display unit 74) are light sources of the effect units close to the variable winning unit (Special Figure 2 start winning port 24). The brightness or the amount of light is set so as to increase (FIG. 135). In the notice effect, the light emission mode becomes more conspicuous as the execution of the normal fluctuation display game approaches, that is, as the fluctuation winning portion approaches. Thereby, the expectation that the variable winning portion is converted to the open state can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the four effect parts (the hold display part 71 to the hold display part 74) are set so as to be larger as the effect part is closer to the variable winning part (special figure 2 start winning opening 24) (FIG. 135). That is, the notice effect becomes more conspicuous as it approaches the variable winning portion. Thereby, the expectation that the variable winning portion is converted to the open state can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is in the second special game state (special game 1 small hit state in the normal game state), after the second special game state, the predetermined period (40 Specific game mode generating means (S14119) for generating a specific game mode (pre-reading chance mode). Then, when the specific game mode is generated (result of S14901 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 performs the notice effect by the notice effect means (S15105 to S15110). Thereby, if a specific game mode occurs, a notice effect is executed, so that the game performance is improved and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the effect control device 150 uses the change display means (S14509) to change the normal figure change display time (3 seconds, FIG. 148) when the specific game mode occurs to the normal figure change display time (90 seconds or 100 seconds). As a result, the display variation time in the specific game mode is shortened, so that the effect section in the notice effect is changed with a good tempo, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the four effect parts (the hold display part 71 to the hold display part 74) are arranged close to each other so as to form a line with the variable winning part (Special Figure 2 start winning opening 24), It is possible to visually recognize the effect part and the variable winning part with the same line of sight without moving the movement, and it is easy to concentrate on the process until the variable winning part is converted to the open state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In addition, according to the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 specifies the winning unit 600 when the game ball that won the variable winning portion (upper large winning opening 28b) in the special figure 2 small hit state (auxiliary game). When the region 641 is passed, a state transition game for generating a special figure 2 big hit state is executed. Here, the effect control device 150 moves the small hit effect character to the first position (left area, right area) corresponding to the normal areas 642 and 643 and the second position (middle area) corresponding to the specific area 641. Character moving means (S16108) to be moved, and when the game ball passes through the normal areas 642 and 643, the small hit effect character is in the first position (the left area in the case of the normal area 642 and the right area in the case of the normal area 643). The off-time determination means (S16120, S16121) for determining whether or not it exists, and a privilege (execution of special figure 2 pre-reading effect) is given to the player when the small hit effect character is present at the first position Off-time privilege granting means (S16123). As a result, in the state transition game, not only the game ball that rolls the winning unit 600 in the game space passes through the specific area 641, but also the where the game ball passes through the normal areas 642 and 643 (timing). Since interest of the player can be given, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when it is determined that the small hit effect character is present at the first position by the disengagement determination means (S16120, S16121) (the result of S16121 is “Y”), the effect control device 150 performs a predetermined notification effect. The off-time notification effect means (S16122) for executing (character destruction success effect) is provided. Thereby, even if the player passes the game ball to the normal areas 642 and 643, the player has the pleasure that the timing at which the game ball passes and the timing at which the small hit effect character moves (stays) to the first position match. You can feel the sense of accomplishment and a sense of accomplishment as a result of matching the timing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the way (timing) where the game ball passes through the normal areas 642 and 643, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect control device 150 determines whether or not the small hit effect character is present at the second position (the middle area corresponding to the specific area 641) when the game ball passes through the specific area 641. Means (S16112, S16113) and per-time privilege granting means (S16115) for granting a privilege (round promotion effect) to the player when the small hit effect character is present at the second position. Thereby, not only whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 641 but also the player's interest can be given to the timing of passing, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, the effect control device 150, when it is determined by the hitting time determining means (S16112, S16113) that the small hit effect character is present at the second position (the result of S16113 is "Y"), a predetermined notification effect. A hit-time notification effecting means (S16114) for executing (a character defeat success effect) is provided. As a result, the player feels joy that the timing of passing the game ball to the specific area 641 and the timing at which the small hit effect character has moved to the second position are matched, and that the player has gained a privilege due to the matching timing. And a sense of accomplishment. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, the game control device 100 determines a special game state that is generated when a game ball won in the upper prize winning opening 28b passes the specific area 641 from a plurality of types of special game states having different values. (S13805). Then, the effect control device 150 uses the character determination table (FIG. 163) in the aforementioned character moving means (S16108) to determine the small hit effect character set according to the determination result (number of rounds) of the type determining means. Change to movement mode (stay rate). Thus, the player can infer (predict) the type of the special game state that occurs when the game ball passes the specific area 641 according to the movement mode of the character. Since the game performance of (auxiliary game) is enhanced, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, the effect control device 150 is such that, in the character moving means (S16108), the special determination state having a higher value than the special game state having a lower value is determined by the type determining means (S13805). Is increased at the second position (the middle area corresponding to the specific area 641), and the ratio at which the small hit effect character is determined to be present at the second position by the hit determination means (S16112, S16113). To increase. As a result, the higher the value of the special game state, the higher the possibility that the timing will coincide, so that the player can be more interested in the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area 641. Interest can be improved.

  In addition, the effect control device 150 makes a small hit according to the determination result of the above-described type determination means (S13805) from among a plurality of types of characters (A to C) having different expectations for the occurrence of a specific special gaming state. Character determining means (S16103) for determining an effect character is included. As a result, the type of special game state generated when the game ball passes the specific area 641 can be estimated (predicted) according to the type of the small hit effect character that moves, and the state transition of the special figure 2 small hit state Since the game characteristics of the game (auxiliary game) are enhanced, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all points and is not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description of the invention but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 20 Game board 22 Game area 24 Special figure 2 Start winning opening 24a Movable member 28 Up variation winning device 28a Movable member 28b Upper large winning port 31 1st display (main display device)
32 Main display screen 60 Center case 70 General-purpose memory display unit 71-74 On-hold display (movable body)
71b-74b LED
75 Chance mode display section 76 Digestion hold display section (movable body)
100 Game control device 150 Production control device (display control device)
600 winning units (play space)
620 Floor member 630 Rotating body 641 Specific area 642, 643 Normal area

Claims (9)

A variable display game is executed based on a winning of a game ball in a start area provided in the game area, and the variable prize section provided in the game area is closed when the variable display game has a predetermined specific result. In gaming machines that can be converted from open to open,
Start storage means capable of storing the right to execute the variable display game based on a winning of a game ball in the start area as a start memory within a prescribed number of ranges;
Fluctuation display means capable of executing the fluctuation display game by digesting the start-up memories stored in the start-up storage means in the stored order;
Pre-determination means capable of pre-determining whether or not the variable display game corresponding to the start-up memory has the specific result before the execution of the variable display game;
A plurality of performance units that are set to a number corresponding to the prescribed number and are set such that the distance from the variable prize winning unit is different;
Notice condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the pre-determined start memory is a specific start memory that establishes a notice condition;
A notice effect means capable of executing a notice effect by causing the effect part corresponding to the digest order of the specific start-up memory to produce an effect in a predetermined manner. ,
The game machine characterized in that the notice effect means changes the effect part that causes the effect to be produced in the predetermined manner in accordance with a change in the digest order of the specific start-up memory. The plurality of rendering units can operate in a predetermined operation mode,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice effect means executes the notice effect by operating the effect part in a predetermined operation mode. A plurality of light sources capable of individually emitting the plurality of rendering units;
A memory number notifying means capable of notifying the number of start memories by causing the plurality of light sources to emit light in order from the side closer to the variable winning portion;
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the notice effect means executes the notice effect by causing the effect part to emit light with a light emission color different from that of the stored number notification means. A specific light source capable of causing the variable winning portion to emit light;
4. The game according to claim 3, further comprising: a variable winning portion light emitting means capable of causing the variable winning portion to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode by the specific light source during the execution of the variable display game. Machine.   5. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the plurality of light sources are set such that a luminance or a light amount increases as the light emitting unit that emits light close to the variable winning unit emits light.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the plurality of performance units are set so as to be larger as they are closer to the variable winning unit. A special figure fluctuation display game is executed based on a winning of a game ball in a special start area provided in the game area, and the special figure fluctuation display game has a special result determined in advance. Configured to generate a gaming state,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special game state,
A specific game mode generating means capable of generating a specific game mode for a predetermined period after the second special game state ends;
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the notice effect means executes the notice effect during the occurrence of the specific game mode. The fluctuation display game is executed over a predetermined fluctuation time,
The variation display means, when the specific game mode occurs, executes the variation display game so that the variation time is shorter than before the specific game mode occurs. 8. The gaming machine according to 7.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the plurality of performance units are arranged close to each other so as to form a line with the variable prize winning unit.